JP2022132628A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.

SOLUTION: No winning results when winning of a CB combination is not established in a game where the CB combination is won in a normal state. In this case, there are two kinds of CB combinations and a stop operation mode of a third stop for avoiding establishment of CB winning differs according to respective CB combinations, and the stop operation mode which avoids the establishment of the CB winning in one CB combination, is the stop operation mode which establishes the CB winning in the other CB combination. In a game in which the CB combination is won and the CB winning is not established, ART shift lottery processing is executed, and a game state shifts to an ART state in shift winning. In the ART state, a winning state of the CB combination is carried over. However, when a predetermined combination is won in lottery processing of a combination, the CB winning is established to complete the ART state when stop operation is performed in a mode in which the predetermined combination cannot be won.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read/write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing according to the program read from the read-only storage means while writing information to and reading information from the read/write storage means. When executing this process, information is input from sensors and the like to the control means, and information is output from the control means to the electric actuators, the light emitting elements, and the like. It is also known that the control means, the read-only storage means, the read/write storage means, and the like are integrated into one chip.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while medals are being bet, the control means executes the lottery process of the winning combination. Further, when the winning lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation stop control is executed at to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. For example, a game medium is provided as the provision of the privilege (see Patent Literature 1, for example).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform various controls appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing various controls.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 executes a specific process in which a plurality of types of processes are set in a predetermined execution order, and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means when executing the process. having a control means to cause
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the plurality of kinds of processes;
a second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the plurality of kinds of processes;
When the first predetermined process is started, the information stored in the internal storage means is not saved in the save storage means, and when or after the second predetermined process is started, the information is stored in the internal storage means. a saving executing means for saving the received information to the saving storage means;
a return executing means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined process is finished;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform various controls.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between patterns visible through the display window and combination lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the aspect of the stop symbol when a normal bell win occurs, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the aspect of the stop symbol when a supplementary bell win occurs. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing reel rotation processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stop preparation process performed by main side MPU. 4(a) and 4(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a priority information area; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing priority order information creation processing executed by the main MPU; 7 is a flowchart showing line determination processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of winning performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing reel stop processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stop position determination process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal conditions. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the established winning mode when a lottery table for normal state is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining combinations of symbols corresponding to the first to twenty-seventh supplementary bell combinations; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pull-in bit setting process executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (f) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how attraction-in bit information is derived. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the pull-in bit table for each reel specified in the single CB table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of the first CB winning prize and a combination of symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of the second CB winning prize; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the possible winning range of the 1st CB winning second group combination and the possible winning range of the 2nd CB winning second group combination on the left reel, and (b) middle reel. is an explanatory diagram for explaining the possible winning range of the 3rd group winning combination of the 1st CB winning combination and the possible winning range of the 3rd group winning combination of the 2nd CB winning combination; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the possible winning range of the first group winning combination and the possible winning range of the first group winning combination of the second CB winning combination. (a), (c), and (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the stopping mode of symbols on each reel when the first CB winning is established, and (b), (d), and (f) the second CB winning. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of stopping symbols on each reel when is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for internal states. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when an internal state lottery table is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols corresponding to a first CB winning fourth group winning combination and a symbol combination corresponding to a second CB winning fourth winning combination. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of compensation bell combinations to be won at index values IV=2 to 10, respectively, and combinations of symbols corresponding to each type of compensation bell combination. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the possible winning range of the supplementary bell combination groups corresponding to index values IV=2 to 4 on the left reel, and (b) for index values IV=5 to 5 on the middle reel. (c) Winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to each of the index values IV=8 to 10 on the right reel. It is an explanatory view for explaining a feasible range. (a) to (h) When winning is won with the index value IV=8 in the internal state in which the 1st CB combination is in a winning state, the manner of establishing a prize will depend on the reel stop order and stop operation timing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a state of change. (a) to (h) When winning is won with the index value IV=5 in the internal state where the 1st CB combination is in a winning state, the manner of establishing a prize will depend on the reel stop order and stop operation timing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a state of change. (a) to (h) When winning is won with the index value IV=2 in the internal state in which the 1st CB combination is in a winning state, the manner of winning a prize will be determined according to the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels. It is an explanatory view for explaining a state of change. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for RT after CB. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the established prize mode when a lottery table for RT after CB is selected; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for relief RT. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping the reels and the winning mode established when a lottery table for relief RT is selected; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing short RT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing ART transition determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an outer end management process executed by the main MPU; (a1) to (e1) are time charts showing the output mode of the chance signal and the display state of the internal state notification unit when the normal state shifts to the chance state, and (a2) to (e2) the normal state to the short RT state. (a3) to (e3) output mode of the chance signal and internal 4 is a time chart showing display states of a state notification unit; (a) It is a front view of a special display part, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a special display part. 4(a) and 4(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between notification content in the image display device and display content in the special display section. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the information control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting|reporting process at the time of a stop performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for operation alerting|reporting performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how the special display section and the image display device respectively announce the relationship with the winning combination. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the chance state process performed by main side MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing base state processing executed by the main MPU; (a) is a flowchart showing first special state processing executed by the main MPU; (b) is a flow chart showing second special state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing CB setting processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a replay winning notification process executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of CB election performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CB post-processing performed by main side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how game states change. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an ending image displayed on the image display device; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data stored in a character ROM; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a first ending base image, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second ending base image, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a special ending base image. is. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an adjustment mode of an ending image. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the display mode of the ending image is adjusted. It is a flowchart which shows the ending display control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing for adjustable periods performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in a main-side ROM; It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of each area in main side RAM. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing first non-specific control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second non-specific control process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing third non-specific control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the start wait processing executed in the main side MPU in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing first non-specific control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing start waiting processing executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing reel stop processing executed by the main MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a non-specific control calling process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a non-specific control calling process executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing first non-specific control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing relief RT control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 . The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with its left side as a pivot shaft. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be viewed through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

These reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected to stepping motors (not shown), and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motors. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, there is provided a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated while medals are being bet, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals as game media is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are guided to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 . The hopper device 53 discharges the medals stored in the storage tank through the medal discharge port 58 to the medal receiving tray when a prize corresponding to the awarding of the game media is established on the activated main lines ML1 to ML3, which will be described later. 59 has a function of paying out.

Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and two virtual medals are inserted at once. and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the checkout button 51 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals. In the slot machine 10, medals and virtual medals correspond to game media.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIG. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on and off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 57 is provided to be operated to change within the range of setting 6”.

<Designs attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 3 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively, and these numbers are visible from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R of the main controller 70, which will be described later. These are numbers for recognizing the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “replay 1” symbol (for example, the 20th reel on the left reel 32L), a “LUCKY” symbol (for example, the 19th reel on the left reel 32L), a “bell” symbol (for example, the 18th reel on the left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 16th on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (eg, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Replay 3 " symbol (for example, 12th on the left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (for example, 10th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 9th on the left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (for example, , fourth on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 3, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

4(a) to 4(c) are front views of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In a configuration in which three patterns are visible through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, five straight lines L1 to L5 are assumed as shown in FIG. 4(a). It becomes possible to Specifically, the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R are connected to the right downward line L1, the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. An upper line L2 connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, a middle line L3 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R, the lower symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. A lower line L4 connecting the lower pattern and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and a rising right line L5 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. be. On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10, if the number of game media (medals and virtual medals) betted to start one game is "3", as shown in FIG. Only one of the lines L1 is set as the main line ML1, which is the line for which a prize is established. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in a situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML1, the game medium is provided. Winning is not established even if any of the profit of replay, the profit of replaying, and the transition of the game state occurs, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of winning is stopped on lines other than the main line ML1. In game states other than the CB state ST3, which will be described later, both the number of game media required to start one game and the number of game media that can be betted to start one game are set to "3". be.

On the other hand, in the CB state ST3, which will be described later, both the number of game media required to start one game and the number of game media that can be betted to start one game are set to "2". When the number of gaming media betted to start one game is "2", as shown in FIG. , the number of game media being bet is "3", and the main lines ML2 and ML3 are set as bent lines instead of straight lines. Specifically, a first main line ML2 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the right A second main line ML3 connecting the upper symbols of the reel 32R is set. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in a situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "2," and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the first main line ML2 or the second main line ML3. , any of the profit of providing a game medium, the profit of replaying, or the transition of the game state occurs, and there is a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning establishment on the lines other than the first main line ML2 and the second main line ML3. Even if you stop, it does not mean that you have won a prize.

As described above, when the number of bets is "3" and when the number of bets is "2", the number and type of main lines ML1 to ML3 are changed. Even if there is, it is possible to change the stop mode of the 9 symbols when the winning is established between the CB state ST3 to be described later and other game states. This makes it possible to diversify the pattern stop modes.

When the number of bets is "3", only one straight line is set as the main line ML1. are set as the main lines ML2 and ML3. As a result, in game states other than the CB state ST3, which will be described later, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the type of symbols for which the prize is established when the prize is established. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the kind of symbol for which the winning is established when the winning is established.

5 and 6, the relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described below. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning, and FIGS. 6A and 6B are bell winning It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the mode of the stop symbol when occurs.

In the following explanation, it is assumed that the number of bets is "3", but the number of bets is "2" for normal bell winning, supplementary bell winning, first cherry winning and second cherry winning. , and the winning symbol combination is the same as when the number of bets is "3". However, as already explained, the number and types of the main lines ML1 to ML3 are different depending on whether the number of bets is "3" or "2". The overall stopping mode is different between when the number of bets is "3" and when it is "2".

The small wins for which game media are awarded include normal bell wins, supplementary bell wins, first cherry wins, and second cherry wins. Specifically, on the main line ML1, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol. In that case, it usually becomes a bell prize. When the normal bell wins in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the number of game media to be awarded is "9". In addition, when the normal bell wins in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the number of game media to be awarded is "2".

In the case of a normal bell winning in a situation where the number of bets is "3", as shown in FIG. Become. A player can easily recognize that a prize has been won when a combination of the same symbols is stop-displayed on a straight line. In this case, by stopping and displaying the same combination of "bell" symbols when winning a normal bell, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the occurrence of the winning.

On the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is any one of the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol. Any one of the "White 7" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol and "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the "Watermelon" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol. If it is one of the patterns, it will be a supplementary bell prize. If the compensation bell wins in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the number of game media to be given is "1". In addition, when the compensating bell wins in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the number of game media to be given is "2". In other words, the number of game media to be awarded in the case of winning the compensation bell is more when the number of bets is "2" than when the number of bets is "3".

When the compensation bell wins in a situation where the number of bets is "3", as shown in FIG. On the middle line L2 different from the line ML1, all of the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the supplementary bell has been won. In addition, the line on which the combination of "bell" symbols is stop-displayed when the compensation bell is won is the middle line L2, which is different from the main line ML1 on which the combination of "bell" patterns is stop-displayed when the normal bell is won. Such a difference allows the player to distinguish between a normal bell win and a supplementary bell win.

On the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is one of the "Cherry" symbol, the "Replay 1" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32M has a "Cherry" symbol. If the stop symbol of 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first cherry wins. If the first cherry win is achieved in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the number of game media to be awarded is "1". In addition, when the first cherry win is obtained in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the number of game media to be awarded is "2". In other words, the number of game media to be awarded in the case of winning the first cherry is more when the number of bets is "2" than when the number of bets is "3".

On the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is one of the "watermelon" symbol, the "replay 1" symbol and the "replay 3" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol and the "replay 1" symbol. If the symbol is either one of the "Replay 2" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Bell" symbol, the second cherry wins. If the second cherry is won in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the number of game media to be awarded is "9". If the second cherry is won in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the number of game media to be awarded is "2".

First replay winning prize, second replay winning prize, third replay winning prize, and fourth replay winning prize that allows the next game to be played without placing a new bet on game media. There is a prize, a fifth replay prize, a sixth replay prize, a first relief replay prize, and a second relief replay prize. Specifically, the stopped symbols of the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are any one of the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol, and the "replay 2" symbol. If the stopped symbol on the reel 32M is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay 1" symbol, the first replay wins. If the player wins the first replay in a game state other than the post-CB RT state ST6, which will be described later, only the benefit of replaying is given. , not only is the privilege of replaying given, but also the game state shifts to the normal state ST1, which will be described later.

On the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is any one of a "replay 1" symbol, a "replay 2" symbol and a "replay 3" symbol. When the symbol stopped on the reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second replay wins. On the main line ML1, the left reel 32L has a "bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, and a "watermelon" symbol. If it is one of the "LUCKY" symbols, it will be the 3rd replay winning prize. On the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. ” symbol, it becomes the 4th replay winning prize. On the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is "replay." 1” symbol, it becomes the fifth replay winning prize. On the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is "replay". 1” symbol, it becomes the 6th replay winning prize.

On the main line ML1, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, 1 Relief replay wins. On the main line ML1, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, 2 Relief replay wins. When the first relief replay win or the second relief replay win is achieved in the post-CB RT state ST6, which will be described later, not only is the privilege of replaying given, but also the game state shifts to the relief RT state ST7, which will be described later. (See FIG. 22).

SB winning, first CB winning and second CB winning are available as state transition winning in which only game state transition is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay 2" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "LUCKY" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "cherry" symbol. If there is, it will be an SB prize. When the SB winning is established, the game state shifts to the SB state ST5 (see FIG. 22).

SB state ST5 is a game state in which only one game is continued. In the SB state ST5, both the number of game media required to start one game and the number of game media that can be betted to start one game are set to "3". In addition, in the SB state ST5, the supplementary bell win is surely established, and the game medium of "1" is provided. The content of the SB state ST5 is not limited to the above content. It is good also as a structure which winning a prize of is established.

A plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to establishment of the first CB prize are set, and these symbol combinations can be classified into a plurality of groups of first to fourth group wins. The combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st group win of the 1st CB prize is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either a "bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is This is a combination of a "bell" symbol and a "BAR" symbol as the stop symbol on the right reel 32R. The combination of symbols corresponding to the second group combination of the 1st CB winning prize is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either the "RED 7" symbol or the "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M. is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol. The combination of symbols corresponding to the third group combination of the 1st CB winning prize is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either a "bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is Any one of the "red 7" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol and the "replay 3" symbol, and the stopping symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "replay 1" symbol. The combination of symbols corresponding to the 4th group winning combination of the 1st CB prize is that the stopped symbols of the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are "RED 7", "WHITE 7", "BAR" and "LUCKY". any one of the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M is any one of the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, the “LUCKY” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol; A combination in which the stopped symbols are either "Cherry" symbols or "Replay 1" symbols, and the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol and " LUCKY" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "bell" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol, and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are a "BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol and a "replay 1" symbol. LUCKY" symbol, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either the "Replay 1" symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is "Red 7". Any one of the "White 7" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol and "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the "Watermelon" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol. Any combination of symbols is applicable. The function and effect of distinguishing the combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of the 1st CB prize into the first to fourth group wins will be described later in detail.

A plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to establishment of the second CB prize are set, and these symbol combinations can be classified into a plurality of groups of first to fourth group wins. The combination of symbols corresponding to the first group combination of the 2nd CB winning prize is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either a "bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is This is a combination of a "bell" symbol and a stop symbol of the right reel 32R being either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol. The combination of symbols corresponding to the 2nd group win of the 2nd CB prize is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either the "white 7" symbol or the "LUCKY" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M. is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol. The combination of symbols corresponding to the 3rd group win of the 2nd CB prize is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either a "bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is It is a combination in which either the "white 7" symbol or the "replay 2" symbol and the stopping symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "cherry" symbol or the "replay 1" symbol. The combination of symbols corresponding to the 2nd CB winning 4th group combination is that the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are "Red 7", "White 7", "BAR" and "LUCKY". any one of the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M is any one of the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, the “LUCKY” symbol, the “replay 2” symbol, and the “replay 3” symbol; A combination in which the stopped symbol is a "bell" symbol, and a stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is any one of a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol and a "LUCKY" symbol. , a combination in which the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is any of the "BAR" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol. , on the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M are the "Red 7" symbol, the "White 7" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol and the Any of the "replay 3" symbols, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is any one of the "BAR" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol. The function and effect of distinguishing the combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of the second CB prize into the first to fourth group wins will be described later in detail.

When the first CB winning or the second CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state ST3 (see FIG. 22). The CB state ST3 is a game state in which 5 games are continued. In the CB state ST3, both the number of game media required to start one game and the number of game media that can be betted to start one game are set to "2". Therefore, in each game in the CB state ST3, the first main line ML2 and the second main line ML3 are the winning target lines.

In each game in the CB state ST3, all the wins of the normal bell win, supplementary bell win, first cherry win and second cherry win are won, and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the reels 32L, 32M, No matter what mode the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of 32R (hereinafter, also referred to as stop operation timing) is, any minor win is established. Then, when any minor winning combination is established, the game medium of "2" is provided regardless of the type of the established minor winning combination.

In the CB state ST3, a non-CB state (normal state ST1, short RT state ST4, SB state ST5, post-CB RT state ST6, relief RT state ST7, deviated RT state ST10, ART state ST20) that is not the CB state ST3 and are controlled differently. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, it can be said that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are controlled to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. On the other hand, in the CB state ST3, the reel control described above is performed for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the same reel control as in the non-CB state, but the reel control described above is not performed for the left reel 32L. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. In other words, in the CB state ST3, it can be said that the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the CB state ST3, the reel control to slip only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L. Control may be performed such that the reels are slipped up to a maximum of one symbol, or reel control may be performed such that only the predetermined reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slipped up to a maximum of one symbol. Furthermore, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated second or the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated last are controlled to slip only up to one symbol. Further, the reel control may be performed such that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated in a certain order are slipped by only one symbol at maximum.

<Device for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 performs light emission control in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and also performs light emission control in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. A pair of left and right speakers 62 are provided, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, sound output control is executed so that a sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound corresponding to the winning result is output. Alternatively, sound output control is executed so that sound is output. Further, the speaker 62 performs sound output control so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 performs display control so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

A performance operating device 64 manually operated by the player to change the content of the image displayed on the image display device 63 is provided on the right side of the return button 46 on the front door 12 . The production operating device 64 has a center button 64a and four peripheral buttons 64b to 64e arranged in a cross shape around the center button 64a. By performing a predetermined operation on the center button 64a and peripheral buttons 64b to 64e, the image corresponding to the predetermined operation is changed. The relationship between the operation of the effect operating device 64 and the content of the image will be described later in detail.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be awarded when a small winning combination is won. a given number display portion 66 for displaying the number of game media; and a special display portion 67 for performing a display corresponding to the notified content when the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63. , 1st CB role (1st CB winning 1st to 4th group roles) and 2nd CB role (2nd CB winning 1st to 4th group roles) An internal state reporting unit 68 is provided for reporting that the data is being carried over. Each of the credit display section 65, the given number display section 66, and the special display section 67 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED such as green. However, the display units 65 to 67 are not limited to this, and part or all of the display units 65 to 67 may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. good too. On the other hand, the internal state reporting unit 68 is provided with only one LED, and if the state of winning either the first CB or the second CB is not carried over, the internal state reporting unit 68 68 is maintained in a non-lighted state, and when the state of winning either the first CB or second CB combination is carried over, the internal state notification part 68 is maintained in a lighted state.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 . The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11 . The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box. In order to open the circuit board box, it is necessary to release the fastened state, and when the fastened state is released, a breaking point will occur. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the board box has been opened.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 80 in addition to the main control device 70 . The effect control device 80 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 80 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . Incidentally, the effect control device 80, like the main control device 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

<Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 70 has a main control board 71 that controls the main game. An MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 . The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44; inserted medal detection sensors 45a, 45b for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45; credit insertion buttons 47, 48; , 49 individually detect the operation of credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a, the settlement detection sensor 51a detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection detects the operation of the reset button 56. Various sensors such as a sensor 56 a and a setting key detection sensor 57 a for detecting insertion of a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

Incidentally, two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are arranged side by side in the passage direction of the guide passage through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53. FIG. That is, as the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a provided on the upstream side of the guide path, and a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a provided on the downstream side of the guide path from the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a. and a second inserted medal detection sensor 45b. After the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a is ON and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is OFF, both the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are turned ON. In addition, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a is in the OFF state and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is in the ON state, whereby the MPU 72 specifies that one medal has been inserted. be. A new medal is detected by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a before both the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are turned off after the above series of cycles are completed. The guide passage is formed so that it will not be broken.

On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, a payout motor for the hopper device 53, a special display A unit 67, an internal state notification unit 68, an external output terminal board 69, an effect control device 80, and the like are connected. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. As already explained, the selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b if reception is permitted, and guides them to the hopper device 53 if reception is prohibited. It has a function of discharging to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 80 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 80 for notifying the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. In such a case, display control of the special display section 67 is executed so that a display corresponding to the notified content is performed. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 80 , whereas direct display control of the special display section 67 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed in the effect control device 80, and the special display section 67, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the presentation and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

The MPU 72 is maintained in an off state when the state of winning any CB role is not carried over, and lights up when the state of winning any CB role is carried over. The display control of the internal state notification unit 68 is executed so that the state is maintained. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp whether or not the state of winning any CB combination is carried over by visually checking the internal state notification section 68.例文帳に追加In addition, since the display control of the internal state notification unit 68 is directly performed by the MPU 72 without going through the effect control device 80, the reliability of the display content of the internal state notification unit 68 can be improved.

The MPU 72 outputs a signal for output to a chance signal terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 69 when the game state is a chance state ST21 to be described later, thereby transmitting a chance signal from the chance signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall. is started, and when the chance state ST21 to be described later ends, the output of the output signal to the chance signal terminal is stopped, thereby stopping the output of the chance signal from the chance signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall. . Further, the MPU 72 outputs an output signal to the ART signal terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 69 when the game state is any one of the base state ST22, the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24, which will be described later. By outputting, the ART signal is started to be output from the ART signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall, and the game state is set to a state that is neither a base state ST22, a first special state ST23, or a second special state ST24, which will be described later. , the output of the ART signal from the ART signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall is stopped by stopping the output of the output signal to the ART signal terminal.

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A power failure signal is output to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done. However, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 .

The performance control device 80 includes a performance control board 81 for executing execution control of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 82 is mounted on the performance control board 81 . The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 82, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 84 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 84. good too.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port. The MPU 72 of the main controller 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 as already described, and various commands are received from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 82 performs light emission control of the upper lamp 61 and sound output control of the speaker 62, thereby performing various notifications and various effects.

In addition to the MPU 82, the effect control board 81 also includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 82 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 82 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the effect control device 80 are respectively the effect side. It is called MPU82, production side ROM83, and production side RAM84.

<Main processing of main MPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing started in the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by the timer interrupt process are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 .

After the initialization process is finished, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the ON operation is performed (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is ON when the power switch 55 is turned ON (step S103: YES), all clear processing is executed (step S103: YES). step S104). In the all clear processing, all areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". When the all-clear processing is executed, the game state becomes the normal state ST1 regardless of the state before the power shutdown.

If a negative determination is made in step S103 or if the processing of step S104 is executed, winning probability setting processing is executed (step S105). In the winning probability setting process, the current set value is read under the condition that the set key is inserted and turned on, and the current set value is displayed on the special display section 67 provided on the game panel 20.例文帳に追加The special display section 67 is a display section for executing notification corresponding to when the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, and is also used for displaying set values when changing settings. be done. Since the area for storing the set value data in the main RAM 74 is surely initialized immediately before the winning probability setting process, the set value displayed on the special display portion 67 corresponds to "Setting 1". is "1". In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the special display portion 67 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the setting value is "setting 6", the setting value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set values on the special display portion 67 is terminated. After executing the winning probability setting process, the process shifts to the normal process (step S106). The normal processing will be explained later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main processing (step S102: NO), the power recovery processing from step S107 onward is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown.

In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S107). Specifically, if the setting value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S108). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S109). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S107 to S109, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and saved in the stack area 74b for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. By returning the obtained data to the register of the main MPU 72, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S110). Also, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S111). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the production side MPU 82 (step S112), it returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S113).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S107 to S109, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is prohibited (step S114), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S115), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S116). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S104).

<Timer Interrupt Processing of Main MPU 72>
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and the power failure processing is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in a work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74, which will be described later. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether the data in the main RAM 74 is normal or not is calculated and stored in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is performed. restrict. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the respective stepping motors in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S208, it is monitored whether or not a cancellation operation for canceling the abnormality notification is being performed, and if it is specified that the cancellation operation for canceling the abnormality notification is being performed, the abnormality notification is canceled. An abnormality notification cancellation command for the purpose is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82. As a result, the anomaly notification is canceled regardless of the type of anomaly notification being performed. When the reset button 56 is pressed while the key cylinder 14 is being locked in a predetermined manner, the cancellation operation for canceling the abnormality notification is performed.

In step S209, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S210, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S211, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 82 is performed. In step S212, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S<b>213 , the values of the registers saved in the later-described specific control stack area 74 b in the main RAM 74 in step S<b>201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72 . After that, in step S214, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Normal Processing of Main MPU 72>
Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301), and then display clear processing is performed (step S302). In the display clearing process, when the display of the special display portion 67 is controlled so that a predetermined display is performed in the previous game, the predetermined display is cleared. As a result, the special display portion 67 is put into a light-off state in which nothing is displayed.

After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S303). FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the start waiting process. In the start waiting process, if any replay prize has been won in the previous game (step S401: YES), an automatic insertion process for betting the same number of game media as the number of bets in the previous game. (step S402). Specifically, the value of a bet counter provided in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to the number of bets in the previous game. The bet counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of game media bets in each game.

In the start waiting process, if the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b have detected the medals in the regular order as already described (step S403: YES), a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 If the value of the bet counter provided in is not equal to or greater than the maximum specified number (step S404: NO), the value of the bet counter is incremented by 1 (step S405), and if the value of the bet counter is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number ( Step S404: YES), 1 is added to the value of a credit counter provided in a later-described work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S406). The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of stored virtual medals in the main MPU 72 . Further, the maximum specified number is "3" in a game state other than the CB state ST3, and the maximum specified number is "2" in the CB state ST3. It should be noted that when the automatic inserting process (step S402) is being executed, the value of the bet counter in the slot machine 10 is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number. Step S403: YES), the value of the credit counter is incremented by one.

In the start waiting process, when any one of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is operated (step S407: YES), credit insertion corresponding processing is executed so that the bet amount corresponding to the operation is set. (step S408). In the credit insertion handling process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the maximum amount of game media that can be betted at that time is placed in a bet state. When the 3-credit input button 49 is operated, the corresponding bet state is set. In this case, when virtual medals are used for the bet, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals bet is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, when the number of virtual medals required for setting the bet amount corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is not stored, betting is possible in relation to the stored virtual medals. A maximum amount of game media has been bet. It should be noted that when the automatic insertion process (step S402) is being executed, the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47-49 is disabled.

In the start waiting process, if the value of the bet counter is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit stored number (specifically, "50") (step S409: YES), reception prohibition processing is executed. (step S410). In the acceptance prohibition process, the selector 52 is set in the acceptance prohibition state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive section 52a. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. If the reception is already prohibited, that state is maintained. On the other hand, if the value of the bet counter is less than the maximum specified number or the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit stored number (step S409: NO), acceptance permission processing is executed (step S411). In the reception permission process, the selector 52 is set to the reception permission state by starting to output a drive signal to the selector driving section 52a. As a result, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. In addition, when it is already in the acceptance permitted state, the state is maintained.

In the start waiting process, a first non-specific control process is executed for monitoring fraud with respect to the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b (step S412). The processing contents of the first non-specific control processing will be described later in detail.

In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 51 is operated (step S413: YES) and the automatic insertion process (step S402) is not executed (step S414: NO), the bet counter and the credit counter The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medals corresponding to the total number are discharged to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 (step S415). As a result, the internally stored game media are paid out to the player as actual medals.

In the start waiting process, a second non-specific control process is executed to monitor unauthorized access to the reset button 56 (step S416). The processing contents of the second non-specific control processing will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 10), after execution of the start waiting processing in step S303, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached the specified number (step 304), and the number of bets has reached the specified number. If not, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S303). The specified number is "3" in a game state other than the CB state ST3, and the specified number is "2" in the CB state ST3. If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S305). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S303). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, after activating the main lines ML1 to ML3 corresponding to the prescribed number of bets, the acceptance prohibition process already described is executed (step S306). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. After that, a lottery process for performing a lottery for a role in the current game is executed (step S307), and after executing a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S308), a stop button is pressed. 42 to 44 are operated to generate a stop command, reel stop processing is executed to stop the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S309).

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S310). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination is established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with the number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, the value corresponding to the small win this time is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded. The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the number of medals is paid out to the medal tray 59.例文帳に追加

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S311). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of a wait timer provided in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S312). The wait timer is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the start of the next game is forced to wait after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to one game have stopped rotating. It is a counter, and when the wait timer has a value of 1 or more, the start of the next game is forced to wait until the value of the wait timer becomes "0". The value set in the wait timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is executed.

If the value of the wait timer is "0" (step S312: NO), outer edge management processing is executed (step S313). Although details will be described later, the outer end management process executes a process for controlling the output state of the chance signal and the ART signal through the external output terminal board 69 . After that, the acceptance permission process already described is executed (step S314). As a result, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b.

<Lottery processing of main MPU 72>
The lottery process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained (step S501). In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, a lottery table for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is read out from data for specific control, which will be described later, in the main ROM 73 (step S502). Here, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance. , it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process is to be executed based on. It should be noted that "setting n+1" is more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". In addition, game states in which the lottery table is different in the main MPU 72 even if the set values are at the same stage are the normal state ST1, which will be described later, the internal state ST2, the CB state ST3, and the short RT state ST4, which will be described later. , an SB state ST5, a post-CB RT state ST6 to be described later, and a relief RT state ST7 to be described later. In step S502, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current game state is selected.

After selecting the lottery table (step S502), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S503). Here, index values IV are set in the lottery table (see FIG. 23, for example), and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and set with a point value PV. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the free run counter.

In step S503, the index value IV to be referred to in the lottery table selected this time is set to "1". After that, a judgment value DV used for judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set (step S504). In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S501 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV "1" and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value. A new determination value DV is set.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S505). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535", a winning data acquisition process is executed for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74. (Step S506). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the lottery table to be referred to are set in the main RAM 74 . In the state where the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the winning data of the first CB role and the winning data of the second CB role, regardless of whether or not the winning corresponding to the winning data is established, the current game is played. is cleared to "0" after the completion of , and if the winning data for the first CB combination or the winning data for the second CB combination is established, the winning data is cleared to "0".

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S505: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In this case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S507), and it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S504 to continue determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S504, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S505, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If the process of step S506 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S508, this means that the determination of whether the winning combination is correct has been completed. In this case, the determination processing of the effect content is executed (step S509). In the effect content determination processing, a process for determining the general content of the effect to be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game is executed. As the content of the outline, high-expectation content, medium-expectation content, and low-expectation content are set so that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of ART state ST20, which will be described later, is gradually lowered in situations other than ART state ST20. It is Further, in the situation of the ART state ST20, the content of high expectation, the content of medium expectation and the content of low expectation are set so that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a more advantageous situation for the player gradually decreases. there is In the process of determining the contents of the effect, in the situation where the ART state ST20 is not present, the currently set mode type among the multiple types of ART transition lottery modes that determine the winning probability in the ART transition lottery process, and the winning in this game. Using a lottery table corresponding to the combination with the winning combination, the contents of the outline of the performance are determined by lottery. In addition, in the process of determining the contents of the effect, in the situation of the ART state ST20, the currently set mode type among the plurality of types of modes that determine the probability of occurrence of a situation advantageous to the player, Using a lottery table corresponding to a combination with a winning role, the outline of the performance is determined by lottery.

Information corresponding to the general contents determined in the process of determining the contents of the effect is set in a game start command, and the game start command is set as an object to be transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 (step S510). The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 82 recognize that a new game has started, and is for making the production side MPU 82 recognize the general content of the production decided by the main side MPU 72. It is a command, and is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When receiving a game start command, the effect-side MPU 82 grasps the general content of the effect in the current game from the game start command, and determines the details of the effect in a manner corresponding to the grasped general content of the effect. It is decided by lottery. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance-side ROM 83 to the performance-side RAM 84, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

After that, a notification control process is executed (step S511). In the notification control process, although the details will be described later, a process for controlling the display of the special display portion 67 is executed, and a notification corresponding to the display contents of the special display portion 67 is executed by the image display device 63. Execute the process to make

<Reel Rotation Processing of Main MPU 72>
Next, the reel rotation process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel rotation process, first, the winning data of the combination stored in the main RAM 74 is referred to, and the type of the offset specifying table corresponding to the winning data is specified (steps S601 to S605). The offset designation table is set as data for specific control, which will be described later, and is pre-stored in the designation table storage area 91 (see FIG. 7) of the main ROM 73 . The offset designation table is a table in which various setting information for setting stop information used when stopping the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is defined. Specifically, the offset specification table includes information for specifying the type of the pull-in bit table used when stopping the left reel 32L and the pull-in bit table used when stopping the middle reel 32M. Information for specifying the type by the main side MPU 72 and information for specifying the type of the pull-in bit table used when stopping the right reel 32R by the main side MPU 72 are set.

The attraction bit table is set as data for specific control, which will be described later, and is stored in advance in the attraction bit table storage area 92 (see FIG. 7) of the main ROM 73 . The pull-in bit table is a table that determines the priority of whether or not to stop the 21 symbols attached to the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the base position (lower row in this slot machine 10). The priority is set in two stages. However, the priority does not represent the priority itself of the symbols to be stopped at the base position, but represents part of the information for deriving the priority information. In detail, the drawing-in bit table has 2-bit data assigned to each symbol number from 0 to 20 attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a one-to-one correspondence. there is The priority order information will be described in detail later, but it is determined which of the symbols that can be stopped at the base position at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. used for

In details of the processing of steps S601 to S605, first, it is determined whether or not winning data for the CB combination (first CB combination or second CB combination) is set in the main RAM 74 (step S601). If the winning data for the CB role is set (step S601: YES), on condition that the winning data other than the winning data for the CB role is not set in the main RAM 74 (step S602: YES), the offset specification table is set. , the single CB table is read out from the designated table storage area 91 (step S603). On the other hand, if winning data other than winning data for the CB role as well as the winning data for the CB role are set in the main RAM 74 (step S602: NO), the overlapping CB table is stored as the offset specifying table. Read from area 91 . As a result, in a situation where winning data for the CB role is set in the main RAM 74, winning data other than the winning data for the CB role are not set and winning data other than the winning data for the CB role are set. It is possible to change the type of the offset designation table depending on the situation, and as a result, it is possible to change the mode of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Aspects of stop control in each situation will be described later in detail.

If the winning data for the CB combination is not set in the main RAM 74 (step S601: NO), the offset designation table corresponding to the setting status of the winning data in the main RAM 74 is read out (step S605). In this case, the single CB table and duplicate CB table are never read.

If any one of steps S603 to S605 has been executed, the start interrupt process is permitted (step S606). The starting interrupt process is included in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). As part of this, start-up interrupt processing is activated. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 1.49 msec, so while the start interrupt process is enabled, the start interrupt process is also started at a cycle of about 1.49 msec.

In the starting interrupt process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. to start. Then, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are accelerated in a predetermined acceleration manner, and when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are rotated at a constant speed after the acceleration processing is completed, the constant speed rotation information is sent to the main side. It is set in the register of MPU72.

After permitting the interrupt process for starting, a stop preparation process for setting the stop information of the rotating reel is executed (step S607). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the constant speed rotation information is set in the register of the main MPU 72, and the process waits in step S608 until the constant speed rotation information is set. When the constant speed rotation information is set, execution of the start interrupt processing is prohibited, and the constant speed rotation information in the register of the main MPU 72 is cleared (step S609).

Next, the stop preparation process will be described. The stop preparation process is executed at step S607 in the reel rotation process (FIG. 13) as already described. In addition, when a stop command is issued to one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in reel stop processing (FIG. 19) described later, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped are stopped. It is executed in step S1105, which is a situation in which the process for causing the That is, the stop preparation process is executed using a period required for the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to become constant after a new game is started. It is executed using a period for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command based on the occurrence of the stop command for 32R.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing stop preparation processing. First, information indicating the right reel 32R is stored as target reel information in the register of the main MPU 72 (step S701). After that, it is determined whether or not a stop command has already been issued to the reel indicated by the target reel information (hereinafter referred to as "target reel") (step S702). If no stop command has been generated (step S702: NO), priority order information creation processing for setting information for determining symbols to be stopped at the base position for the current target reel is executed (step S703). On the other hand, if a stop command has already been issued (step S702: YES), the priority order information creating process is not executed.

Thereafter, on condition that the current target reel is not the left reel 32L (step S704: NO), the target reel information is updated (step S705). Specifically, when the right reel 32R is the target reel, the target reel is updated to the middle reel 32M, and when the middle reel 32M is the target reel, the target reel is updated to the left reel 32L. If the target reel information has been updated, the process returns to step S702 to set stop information for the target reel.

That is, in the stop preparation process, the process for setting the stop information is performed in the order of the right reel 32R→middle reel 32M→left reel 32L. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S704 that the target reel is the left reel 32L, this means that the stop information for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been set, and thus the stop preparation process is terminated. Here, as already explained, the stop preparation process is executed during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and during the period during which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are controlled to stop. In this case, priority order information creation processing (step S703) is executed for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during the acceleration period, and a stop command is still issued during the period during which stop control is being performed. Priority order information creation processing (step S703) is executed for one or two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not occurred.

In the priority order information creation process, priority order information for deriving the stop information is created based on the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the stop command has been issued, the winning status of the winning combination, and the like. When creating this priority information, a priority information area 101 provided in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 is used (see FIG. 7).

15(a) and 15(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the priority information area 101. FIG. The priority information area 101 includes a large number of determination information buffers B, as shown in FIG. 15(a). The determination information buffer B is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each symbol number of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, since a symbol is set for each symbol number of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it can be said that the determination information buffer B is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each symbol. Since 21 determination information buffers B are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the priority information area 101 has 63 determination information buffers B in total. Each determination information buffer B is composed of 1 byte, and the priority information area 101 has a total data capacity of 63 bytes.

Each bit of the determination information buffer B has a function of storing specific determination information individually or in a predetermined combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(b), the 7th most significant bit has a function as an illegal winning determination bit for storing illegal winning information, and the 6th to 3rd bits It has functions as a replay bit for storing game information and a given number bit for storing obtained number information, and the second bit is a replay bit for storing replay information and an accessory. It has a function as a key bit for storing information, and the 1st to 0th bits have a function as a lead-in bit for storing lead-in bit information. In the stop position determination process (FIG. 20), which will be described later, the priority order information formed by the value of each bit of the determination information buffer B is derived. In this case, the priority information has a larger value as the upper bit is set to "1". Then, the magnitude of the priority order information is compared and determined, and the stop symbol number is derived based on the highest priority order information. For this reason, the priority information becomes the priority when stopping the pattern, and the symbol number with the higher priority information has the higher priority to stop at the base position, and the symbol number with the lower priority information stops at the base position. lower priority.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing priority order information creation processing. First, the determination information buffer address of the target reel is acquired (step S801). That is, in the stop preparation process (FIG. 14), which one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the target reel set this time is specified, and the number of symbols corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ( 21) are acquired. After that, an initialization process is executed to initialize the data in each determination information buffer B corresponding to those addresses (step S802). In the initialization process, the data of each determination information buffer B is set such that the seventh bit, which is the unfair winning determination bit, is set to "1" and the other bits are set to "0".

After that, data is written in the register of the main side MPU 72 so that the current target symbol number becomes "21" (step S803). Then, the value of the written object pattern number is subtracted by 1 (step S804), the number of search lines is acquired, and the acquired number of search lines is written in the register of the main side MPU 72 (step S805). As already explained, in gaming states other than the CB state ST3, the number of bets in one game is "3", and only one main line ML1 is the winning target line, and in the CB state ST3, the number of bets in one game is "2". , and the two main lines ML2 and ML3 are the winning target lines. Therefore, if the number of bets is "3", the search line is "1", and if the number of bets is "2", the search line is "2".

After that, line determination processing is executed (step S806). By line determination processing, priority order information is created for the current target symbol number of the current target reel. Although the details will be described later, when creating the priority order information, it is assumed that the target symbol number of the target reel stops at the base position, and for each bit of the determination information buffer B corresponding to the target symbol number, various A process of storing information of "0" or "1" is performed in consideration of the situation.

After that, it is determined whether or not the target symbol number is "0" (step S807). If not "0" (step S807: NO), return to step S804, subtract 1 from the target design number, and create priority order information for the target design number. That is, in the priority order information creation process, it is assumed that the symbol numbers from 20th to 0 are stopped at the base position, and the priority order information is created for these symbol numbers in order. If the value of the target symbol number is "0" (step S807: YES), it means that priority information has been created for all symbol numbers of the target reel. finish.

FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing line determination processing executed in step S806 in the priority order information creation processing (FIG. 16).

First, 1 is subtracted from the number of search lines set in the register of the main MPU 72 (step S901). As already described, in the priority order information creation process (FIG. 16), prior to executing the line determination process in step S806, in step S805, if the number of bets is "3", the number of search lines becomes "1". If the number is "2", the number of search lines is "2". Therefore, immediately after the line determination process is started, if the number of bets is "3", the number of search lines is "0", and if the number of bets is "2", the number of search lines is "1". When the number of bets is "3" and the number of search lines is "0", the search line is the main line ML1. When the number of bets is "2" and the number of search lines is "1", the search line is the first main line ML2, and when the number of search lines is "0", the search line is the second main line ML3. Become.

After that, establishment determination processing is executed (step S902). In the success determination process, when a stop command has already been issued (including when the stop command has already been issued), the symbol numbers on the search line are specified for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the stop command has already been issued. . Also, the symbol number on the search line is specified for the target reel this time. Then, based on the specified symbol numbers, the types of symbol combinations existing on the current search line are specified.

If the number of reels for which a stop command has already been issued is 0, assuming that the current target symbol number on the current target reel stops at the base position, on the current search line on the target reel It is specified whether or not the symbol corresponding to the existing symbol number is a symbol corresponding to the winning combination, or whether there is a possibility of forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. Such a case where the number of reels for which a stop command has already been issued is 0 occurs when the stop preparation process of step S607 in the reel rotation process (FIG. 13) is executed. In addition, when the left reel 32L is the target reel and the target symbol number is the 16th "watermelon" symbol, the success determination process is executed assuming the state shown in FIG. is the target reel and the target symbol number is the 12th "cherry" symbol, the establishment determination process is executed assuming the state shown in FIG. If the target symbol number is the 15th "cherry" symbol, the success determination process is executed assuming the state shown in FIG. 37(b).

If the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued is one, a stop command has already been issued on the assumption that the current target symbol number on the current target reel has stopped at the base position. Whether or not there is a possibility that the symbols corresponding to the respective symbol numbers present on the current search line in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the current target reels establish a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. to identify In this way, when the number of reels for which a stop command has already been issued is one, it means that the stop preparation processing in step S1105 in the reel stop processing (FIG. 19) is performed in a situation where a stop command has been issued for one reel. Occurs when executed. In addition, when a stop command is issued to the left reel 32L and the 16th "watermelon" symbol is to be stopped at the base position, the middle reel 32M is the target reel and the target symbol number is the 16th " In the case of the "watermelon" symbol, the establishment determination process is executed assuming the state shown in FIG. 39(c). In addition, when a stop command is issued to the middle reel 32M and the 12th "Cherry" symbol is to be stopped at the base position, the right reel 32R is the target reel and the target symbol number is the 16th "Cherry" symbol. In the case of the "Replay 1" symbol, the success determination process is executed assuming the state shown in FIG. 39(f).

If there are two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, a stop command has already been issued on the assumption that the current target symbol number on the current target reel stops at the base position. In each of the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the target reel of this time, there is a possibility that the symbols corresponding to the respective symbol numbers present on the search line of this time form a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. identify whether there is When there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R has already stopped and the other reel 32L, 32M, This occurs when the stop preparation process of step S1105 in the reel stop process (FIG. 19) is executed in a situation where a stop command is issued to 32R. Note that the left reel 32L has already stopped and the 16th "watermelon" symbol has stopped at the base position, and the middle reel 32M has received a stop command and the 16th "watermelon" symbol has stopped at the base position. In the case where the right reel 32R is the target reel and the target symbol number is the 15th "cherry" symbol, the success determination process is performed assuming the state shown in FIG. 39(d). Run.

After that, an illegal winning determination process is executed (step S903). Here, unfair winning means that a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination targeted for the lottery stops on the main lines ML1 to ML3 that are activated even though the winning combination has not been won. Say something to put away. In the unfair winning determination process, the priority order information of the symbol numbers causing the unfair winning is surely made smaller than the priority order information of the symbol numbers not causing the unfair winning. Specifically, in a situation where a stop command has already been issued to the two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is illegal to stop the symbol corresponding to the current target symbol number at the base position of the current target reel. If winning occurs, all bits of the determination information buffer B corresponding to the current target symbol number are cleared to "0". Then, the line determination process is terminated without executing the process after step S904 for the target symbol number.

Here, as described above, the illegal winning determination bit in the determination information buffer B stores "1" as an initial value. On the other hand, when it is determined that an illegal winning will occur, all bits in the determination information buffer B including the illegal winning determination bit are cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to set the priority order information of the target symbol numbers in which the illegal winning occurs to a smaller value than the priority order information of the target symbol numbers in which the illegal winning does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol of the symbol number in which the unfair winning occurs on the target reel from stopping at the base position, thereby preventing the occurrence of the unfair winning. Further, by clearing all bits including the unfair winning judgment bit to "0", it becomes easy to compare numerical values when comparing and judging priority order information when performing stop control.

After executing the unfair winning determination process (step S903), a predetermined outcome avoidance process is executed (step S904). In the slot machine 10, the predetermined number is a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main line ML1 in a situation in which any CB combination is won alone and no winning of the CB combination is established. That is. In the process for avoiding the predetermined number of symbols, the priority information of the symbol number which causes the predetermined number of symbols when the CB combination is not won alone is made smaller than the priority information of the symbol number which does not generate the predetermined number of symbols. be. Specifically, in a situation where a stop command has already been issued to the two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, if the symbol corresponding to the current target symbol number is stopped at the base position of the current target reel, CB If a predetermined outcome occurs in a situation where the role is not won alone, only the 0th bit corresponding to the current target pattern number is set to "1" and the other bits are cleared to "0". do. Then, the line determination process is terminated without executing the process after step S905 for the target symbol number.

Here, as described above, the illegal winning determination bit in the determination information buffer B stores "1" as an initial value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined number will occur in a situation where the CB role is not won alone, only the 0th bit of the determination information buffer B is set to "1", and the other bits are set to "0". ” is cleared. As a result, the priority order information of the target pattern number that causes a predetermined outcome in a situation where the CB combination is not won alone can be set to a higher value than the priority order information of the target pattern number that causes an illegal winning. In addition, it can be set to a value smaller than the priority order information of the target symbol number that does not correspond to either the occurrence of the predetermined number or the occurrence of the unfair winning in the situation where the CB combination is not won alone. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of unfair winning, and prevent the occurrence of the predetermined number in a situation where the CB combination is not won alone. When a predetermined number occurs in a situation where the CB combination is won alone, the game state can shift to an ART state ST20 which is advantageous to the player and will be described later. Under such circumstances, the occurrence of the predetermined number is prevented as much as possible in a situation in which the CB role is not won alone, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the appearance of the predetermined number. It becomes possible.

After executing the predetermined outcome avoidance process (step S904), it is determined whether or not winning data for any combination is set in the main side RAM 74 (step S905). If the winning data for any combination is set (step S905: YES), the winning process is executed (step S906).

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the winning process. In the processing at the time of winning, first, the winning symbol establishment determination processing is executed (step S1001). In the winning symbol success determination process, it is determined whether or not the symbol number identified as existing on the current search line in the success determination process (step S902) of the line determination process (FIG. 17) matches the winning combination. judge.

As a result of the winning symbol success determination process (step S1001), it is determined that there is a symbol on the search line that enables establishment of the replay winning that is the winning target in the situation where any replay combination is won. If determined (step S1002: YES), the replay bit in the determination information buffer B for the current target symbol number is set to "1" (step S1003). As described above, in the determination information buffer B, the 6th to 3rd bits function as a replay bit and the number of grant bits, and the 2nd bit functions as a replay bit and an accessory bit (Fig. 15(b)). Therefore, in step S1003, "1" is stored in the 6th to 2nd bits of the buffer B for determination information.

As a result of the winning symbol establishment determination process (step S1001), there is a symbol that enables establishment of a prize for the winning combination in a situation where any one of the SB, 1st CB and 2nd CB winnings is won. If it is determined that it exists on the search line (step S1004: YES), the accessory bit in the determination information buffer B for this target symbol number is set to "1" (step S1005). As described above, in the determination information buffer B, the second bit functions as a replay bit and an accessory bit (see FIG. 15(b)). Therefore, in step S1005, "1" is stored in the second bit of the buffer B for determination information. For example, when the line determination process (FIG. 17) is executed assuming the state shown in FIG. 37E, the state shown in FIG. 37F, or the state shown in FIG. 37H, Since it is possible to establish the first CB prize on the main line ML1, if the winning data of the first CB combination is set in the main side RAM 74, the determination information buffer for the current target symbol number Set the role bit in B to '1'.

As a result of the winning symbol success determination process (step S1001), there exists a symbol on the search line that enables the establishment of the minor winning combination that is the winning target in the situation where any minor winning combination is won. If it is determined (step S1006: YES), the number of given game media when the corresponding minor winning combination is established is read from the main ROM 73, and the read number of given game media is set as the target symbol number of this time. It is set in the added number bit in the determination information buffer B (step S1007). As described above, the determination information buffer B has the functions of the 6th to 3rd bits as replay bits and number-of-addition bits (see FIG. 15(b)). Therefore, in step S1007, data corresponding to the number of given game media corresponding to possible minor wins is stored in the 6th to 3rd bits of the buffer B for determination information. For example, when the line determination process (FIG. 17) is executed assuming the state shown in FIG. 37B or the state shown in FIG. Since it is possible, if the winning data for the normal bell combination is set in the main RAM 74, the given number of bits in the determination information buffer B for the target symbol number this time is set to the normal bell win. , data corresponding to "9", which is the number of game media to be given, is set.

When the process of step S1003 is executed, when the determination of step S1006 is negative, or when the process of step S1007 is executed, the process for adjusting the assigned number of bits (steps S1008 to S1010) is executed. Specifically, when none of the RT states ST2, ST4, ST6 to ST7 exists and the number of targets for establishing a minor winning prize is 2 or more (step S1008 and step S1009: YES), adjustment of the award number bit Processing is executed (step S1010). In the process of adjusting the number of bits to be added, all the bits of the number of bits to be added in the determination information buffer B for the current target symbol number, that is, all of the 6th to 3rd bits are set to "1". As a result, when there are a plurality of target symbol numbers that enable the winning of a winning small winning combination, one of the plurality of target symbol numbers is subject to the execution of the adjustment processing of the number of bits to be provided. It is possible to set the priority order information of the object design number to a value higher than the priority order information of the object design number which was not subjected to the adjustment processing of the number of bits to be added. The effect of the execution of the number of bits to be assigned adjustment process (step S1010) will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the line determination process (FIG. 17), when a negative determination is made in step S905 or when the process of step S906 is executed, the value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as data of the number of search lines is "0" (step S907). If the search line number data is not "0" (step S907: YES), the process returns to step S901 to execute the processing of steps S902 to S906 for the next search line. On the other hand, if the search line number data is "0" (step S907: NO), the pull-in bit setting process is executed (step S908).

In the attraction bit setting process, the attraction bit table corresponding to the current target reel among the attraction bit tables specified in the offset specification table read in the reel rotation process (FIG. 13) is stored in the main side ROM 73. Read out from the area 92, and according to the data set in the attraction bit table, the attraction bit (1st bit and 0th bit) in the determination information buffer B for the current target symbol number is set. As a result, in a situation in which none of the winning combinations is won or in a situation in which the first CB combination or the second CB combination is won, the predetermined stop mode has a larger value in the priority order information than the other stop modes. becomes possible. Details of the pull-in bit setting process will be described later in detail.

<Reel Stop Processing of Main MPU 72>
Next, the reel stop processing executed in step S309 of the normal processing (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a third non-specific control process is executed for monitoring illegality with respect to the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b (step S1101). The processing contents of the third non-specific control processing will be described later in detail. After that, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to issue a stop command to any of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1102). In the slot machine 10, a period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating to when they rotate steadily at a predetermined speed is set as an invalid period. 44 is operated, the ON signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are invalidated. When a stop command is generated, stop position determination processing is executed to determine the stop symbol numbers of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command is generated (step S1103).

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing stop position determination processing. First, the temporary information register provided in the register of the main MPU 72 is initialized (step S1201). The temporary information register consists of 1 byte and is an area for temporarily storing priority information. By initializing the temporary information register, the values of all bits of the temporary information register become "0". After that, the temporary sliding number register provided in the register of the main MPU 72 is initialized (step S1202). The provisional sliding number register is an area for temporarily storing the sliding number when stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be stopped this time. By initializing the temporary sliding number register, the temporary sliding number becomes "0".

After that, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (hereinafter also referred to as "reel to be stopped") for which the stop command is issued this time are specified (step S1203). Then, the value of the maximum number of slips corresponding to the current game state and the reel to be stopped is set in the number of slips counter provided in the register of the main RAM 74 (step S1204). As already explained, in game states other than the CB state ST3, the maximum sliding number is set to 4 symbols for any of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In the CB state ST3, the maximum number of slides is set to 4 symbols for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, while the maximum number of slides for the left reel 32L is set to 1 symbol. Also, the number of the symbol that has reached the base position at the timing when the stop command is generated on the reel to be stopped (that is, the arrival symbol number) is specified (step S1205).

After that, the comparison determination process shown in steps S1206 to S1212 is executed. In the comparison determination process, first, the symbol number for determination is derived by adding the value of the sliding number counter to the arrival symbol number (step S1206). In addition, when the value of the sliding number counter is "0", the determination symbol number is the reached symbol number. After that, referring to the determination information buffer B corresponding to the determination symbol number, priority information is obtained (step S1207).

It is then determined whether the priority information is equal to or greater than the temporary information stored in the temporary information register (step S1208). In this determination process, each bit of the determination information buffer B is arranged from the upper side to obtain an 8-digit binary number converted into a hexadecimal number, and each bit of the provisional information register is arranged from the upper side to obtain an 8-digit number. A value assumed as a binary number converted to a hexadecimal number is compared. If the priority information is equal to or greater than the provisional information (step S1208: YES), the priority information corresponding to the current judging pattern number is stored in the provisional information register (step S1209), and the provisional sliding number The current value of the sliding number counter is stored in the register (step S1210). After that, the process proceeds to step S1211. If the priority information is smaller than the provisional information (step S1208: NO), the process proceeds to step S1211 without executing the processes of steps S1209 and S1210.

In step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the sliding number counter is "0". If the value of the sliding number counter is not "0", the value of the sliding number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1212, and then the process returns to step S1206. On the other hand, when the value of the slip number counter is "0", the number of slips stored in the temporary slip number register is added to the arrival symbol number, and the stop symbol number that actually stops the reel to be stopped at the base position. is derived (step S1213).

Thus, in the comparison determination process, each priority order information from the symbol number obtained by adding the maximum sliding number to the arrival symbol number to the arrival symbol number is compared. Therefore, when the comparison determination process is completed, the provisional information register stores the highest priority information among the priority information, and the provisional sliding number register stores the arrival pattern of the priority information stored in the provisional information register. The number and the corresponding number of slips are stored. Then, the sliding number becomes the sliding number in the case of stopping the reel to be stopped this time, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number obtained by adding the sliding number to the arrival symbol number becomes the target to be stopped at the base position. .

Returning to the description of the reel stop processing (FIG. 19), after the stop position determination processing (step S1103) is executed, the stop interrupt processing is permitted (step S1104). The stop interrupt process is performed as part of a series of processes in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) by performing the process of step S1104 in the reel stop process. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 1.49 msec, so while the stop interrupt process is enabled, the stop interrupt process is also started at a cycle of about 1.49 msec. In the stop interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the pattern number that has reached the base point position matches the stop pattern number determined in the previous stop position determination process (FIG. 20), and if they match, the deceleration process to start. As a result, the symbol of the stop symbol number determined in the stop position determination process is stopped at the base position. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped have been completely stopped in response to the current stop command, stop completion information is set in the register of the main MPU 72 .

After permitting the stop interrupt process, the stop preparation process is executed (step S1105). The contents of the stop preparation process have already been explained. After that, by determining whether or not the stop completion information is set in the register of the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped for which the stop command is issued this time have been stopped. If the stop completion information is not set, the process of step S1106 is repeatedly executed. When the stop completion information is set, the interrupt processing for stop is prohibited, and the stop completion information in the register of the main MPU 72 is cleared (step S1107). Then, a notification process at the time of stop for executing notification corresponding to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the first stop is executed (step S1108). The processing contents of the notification processing at the time of stop will be described later in detail.

When a negative determination is made in step S1102, or when the process of step S1108 is executed, it is determined whether or not rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped (step S1109). If the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has not stopped (step S1109: NO), the process returns to step S1101. On the other hand, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating (step S1109: YES), a winning determination process is executed (step S1110).

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the winning judgment process. In the winning determination process, first, the types of symbols stopped on one main line ML1 to ML3 on the left reel 32L, the types of symbols stopped on one main line ML1 to ML3 on the middle reel 32M, The types of symbols stopped on one of the main lines ML1 to ML3 on the right reel 32R are grasped (steps S1301 to S1303).

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is provided with an index sensor for detecting that the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one turn. When the state of receiving the non-detection signal from the index sensor is changed to the state of receiving the detection signal, the main MPU 72 detects that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the index sensor have returned to the reference position. identify. As already explained, stepping motors are used as driving means for rotationally driving the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are specified using the number of drive signal outputs (that is, the number of steps of the stepping motor). This number of outputs is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 .

In steps S1301 to S1303, the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are specified using the number of drive signal outputs to the stepping motors after it is specified that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have returned to the reference positions. The types of symbols stopped and displayed on the main lines ML1 to ML3 are specified from the rotation position. Then, 2-byte data set for each type of symbol is read from the main ROM 73 for each symbol stopped and displayed on the main lines ML1 to ML3 in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. After that, as the logical operation processing of the symbol combination, the 2-byte data grasped in steps S1301 to S1303 are AND-processed with the bits of the same order, thereby deriving the 2-byte data corresponding to the symbol combination ( step S1304). When the number of bets is "2", the processes of steps S1301 to S1304 are executed for each of the first main line ML2 and the second main line ML3, and when the number of bets is "3" executes the processing of steps S1301 to S1304 for the main line ML1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in step S1304 corresponds to any winning data (step S1305). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined whether or not the winning data corresponds to the winning data of the combination set in the main RAM 74 (step S1306). If it corresponds to the winning data of the combination (step S1306: YES), a winning correspondence process is executed (step S1307). In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is provided so that medals or virtual medals are awarded in the medium awarding process (step S310) in the normal process (FIG. 10) if the winning is a minor win. is set in a given counter provided in a later-described work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74. On the other hand, if the winning is one of the replay winnings, a flag setting process is executed so that the automatic insertion process (step S402) is executed in the next start waiting process (FIG. 11).

After executing the winning handling process (step S1307), the total number of rewards counting process is executed (step S1308). In the awarded total number measurement process, the first total winning number counter 102 and the second total winning number counter 103 provided in a work area 74a for specific control (to be described later) in the main RAM 74 indicate that the current minor role winning has been established. Add the given number of game media corresponding to . The first total win counter 102 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to count the total number of game media awarded to the player in a first special state ST23 or a second special state ST24 described later. The second total acquisition number counter 103 mainly counts the total number of game media given to the player until the ART state ST20 ends when the ART state ST20, which will be described later, is started and the continuation condition is not satisfied. This is a counter for counting by the side MPU 72 . Using the first total win counter 102 and the second total win counter 103, the player is notified of the total number of game media awarded to the player in each situation. The content of this notification will be described later in detail. Note that the value of the first total acquisition number counter 102 is cleared to "0" when the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 ends and the state returns to the base state ST23. In addition, the value of the second total acquisition number counter 103 is changed when a transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the ART state ST20 where the continuation condition is not satisfied, or when a transition to the ART state ST20 occurs when the ART is terminated halfway. Cleared to "0" when the ART's halfway end state ends without

On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the winning combination (step S1306: NO), an abnormality notification command is set as an object to be output to the effect side MPU 82 (step S1309). The production side MPU 82 executes the abnormality notification corresponding to the illegal winning by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by receiving the abnormality notification command. After that, after executing the operation prohibition process in step S1310, the progress of the game is stopped by entering an infinite loop. In the operation prohibition process, the next timer interrupt process is prohibited, and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all the actuators connected to the output ports. This operation prohibited state is released by executing the all clear processing (step S104).

<About the contents of each game state>
Next, the contents of each game state set in the slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state. As already described, the slot machine 10 has normal state ST1, internal state ST2, and CB state as game states in which the lottery tables to be used in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72 are different. There are seven types of states: ST3, short RT state ST4, SB state ST5, post-CB RT state ST6, and relief RT state ST7.

<Normal state ST1>
The normal state ST1 is a state to stay when the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S104) is executed. A normal state lottery table to be used in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72 in the normal state ST1 will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the normal state, and FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established. FIG. 23 is a lottery table for the normal state in the case of "setting 3". In other setting values, although the point value PV set for each index value IV is different, the number of index values IV and The types of wins set for each index value IV are the same.

For the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 23, the normal bell combination and the 1st to 27th supplementary bell combinations are set. Then, when winning with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. The supplementary bell role is treated as the winning role.

Here, as already explained, the combination of the symbols for the compensating bell winning is that the stopped symbols of the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "LUCKY" symbol. , and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is any one of the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol and the "replay 3" symbol, and the right reel 32R is a combination of symbols in which the stop symbol is any one of a "BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol and a "LUCKY" symbol (see FIG. 5). In this case, the combinations of symbols that result in compensation bell winning prizes are divided into 27 groups, and 1st to 27th compensation bell combinations are set in one-to-one correspondence with each group.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining combinations of symbols corresponding to the 1st to 27th supplementary bell combinations. As shown in FIG. 25, the symbols on the left reel 32L of the 1st to 9th supplementary bell combinations are "Red 7" in common, and the symbols on the left reel 32L of the 10th to 18th supplementary bell combinations are "White." 7" symbol and "LUCKY" symbol, and the 19th to 27th compensation bell combinations have the left reel 32L symbol "BAR" in common. In addition, the 1st to 3rd, 10th to 12th, 19th to 21st supplementary bell roles have a common pattern of "red 7" on the middle reel 32M. 15, The 22nd to 24th supplementary bell roles have the middle reel 32M pattern in common with the "white 7" pattern and the "replay 2" pattern, the 7th to 9th, 16th to 18th, and 25th to 25th In the 27 supplementary bell combination, the symbol of the middle reel 32M is common to the "LUCKY" symbol and the "replay 3" symbol. In addition, the first, fourth, seventh, tenth, thirteenth, sixteenth, nineteenth, twenty-second and twenty-fifth supplementary bell roles have a common "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. , 5th, 8th, 11th, 14th, 17th, 20th, 23rd and 26th compensating bell combinations have a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R in common. The ninth, twelfth, fifteenth, eighteenth, twenty-first, twenty-fourth, and twenty-seventh supplementary bell combinations share the "LUCKY" symbol on the right reel 32R.

The normal bell combination and the 1st to 27th supplementary bell combinations are set to the index value IV=1 in the lottery table for the normal state (FIG. 23). As shown in FIG. 24, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the normal bell combination and the 1st to 27th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations. Even if it is won with the index value IV=1, the normal bell prize is not established, and the supplementary bell prize is surely established. In this case, the number of given game media is "9" when the normal bell win is established, whereas the given number of game media is "1" when the supplementary bell win is established. Therefore, even if the winning game is won with the index value IV=1 in the normal state ST1, the number of game media to be provided will not be "9" and the number of game media to be provided will be "1".

Such winning treatment is realized by executing the process (steps S1008 to S1010) for adjusting the awarded number bits in the winning process (FIG. 18). As already explained, in the winning process (FIG. 18), if none of the RT states ST2, ST4, ST6 to ST7 (step S1008: YES), the number of wins to be established among the small wins for which the winning data is set is 2 or more (step S1009: YES), all the bits of the given number bits in the determination information buffer B, that is, all of the 6th to 3rd bits are set to "1" (step S1010 ).

In such a processing configuration, the symbol corresponding to the normal bell combination on the left reel 32L is the "Bell" symbol, and the symbol number (reference point position) capable of stopping the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 The symbol numbers to be stopped at ) are 19th, 16th, 11th, 6th and 1st. In this case, the symbol numbers of 19th, 16th, 11th, 6th and 1st have only one bell combination as the target number of small wins to be established. Therefore, a value corresponding to "9", which is the number of game media to be awarded when a normal bell win is established, is set to the number of awarded bits in the determination information buffer B for these symbol numbers. Specifically, the state of the 4-bit assigned number bit is "1001".

On the other hand, on the left reel 32L, the symbol corresponding to the first to ninth supplementary bell combinations is the "red 7" symbol, and it is possible to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. The symbol number (symbol number to stop at the base position) is 12th. Further, the symbols corresponding to the 10th to 18th supplementary bell combinations for the left reel 32L are the “WHITE 7” symbol and the “LUCKY” symbol, and the “WHITE 7” symbol or the “LUCKY” symbol on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. The symbol numbers (symbol numbers to be stopped at the base position) that can be stopped are 20th, 17th and 2nd. In addition, the symbol corresponding to the 19th to 27th supplementary bell combinations on the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, and the symbol number (reference point position) capable of stopping the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L The symbol number that stops at ) is number 7. In this configuration, when the 20th, 17th, 12th, 7th, and 2nd symbol numbers stop at the base position, the number of supplementary bell wins of different types with different numbers of winning targets for small wins, respectively. , corresponding to 9. Therefore, in the non-RT state such as the normal state ST1, all bits of the given number bits in the determination information buffer B for these symbol numbers are set to "1".

When "1" is set to all bits of the given number bit, the state of the given number bit of 4 bits becomes "1111", and the state of the given number bit of the symbol number that makes it possible to establish a normal bell prize (" 1001"). As a result, the pattern with the pattern number that enables establishment of the supplementary bell prize is selected as the pattern to be stopped to the base position with priority over the pattern with the pattern number that enables establishment of the normal bell prize. It will happen. Furthermore, since the symbols that enable the establishment of the supplementary bell prize when it stops at the base position are arranged on the 20th, 17th, 12th, 7th and 2nd numbers, respectively, the index value on the left reel 32L. The number of symbols between one symbol that enables establishment of a compensation bell prize when winning with IV=1 and one symbol that enables establishment of a prize that is arranged next in the rotation direction of the reel. is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning is won with the index value IV=1 in the normal state ST1, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the supplementary bell winning prize is displayed on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. The pattern that enables establishment stops.

Such a stop control execution mode is the same for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, although the types of symbols enabling establishment of the supplementary bell prize are different. In other words, the pattern numbers that enable establishment of a normal bell prize when the middle reel 32M stops at the base position are 19th, 16th, 11th, 6th and 3rd, whereas the symbol numbers stop at the base position. The symbol numbers that enable establishment of the compensatory bell prize are 20th, 17th, 12th, 7th and 4th. In the pattern numbers that enable the formation of a normal bell prize when stopped at the base position, the number of objects for which a minor winning prize is established is only one of the normal bell wins. In the symbol numbers that enable the establishment of a prize, the number of targets for establishment of a minor winning combination is nine corresponding to the number of different types of supplementary bell winning combinations. Then, one winning establishment possible symbol that enables establishment of a compensating bell winning when winning is won on the middle reel 32M with the index value IV=1, and one winning establishment arranged next in the reel rotation direction. The number of symbols between possible symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=1 in the normal state ST1, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M, the supplementary bell winning prize is displayed on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. The pattern that enables establishment stops.

In addition, the symbol numbers that enable establishment of a normal bell prize when the right reel 32R is stopped at the base position are 20, 15, 10, 5 and 2, whereas the symbol numbers are stopped at the base position. The symbol numbers that enable establishment of the compensatory bell prize are 16th, 11th, 6th, 3rd and 0th. In the pattern numbers that enable the formation of a normal bell prize when stopped at the base position, the number of objects for which a minor winning prize is established is only one of the normal bell wins. In the symbol numbers that enable the establishment of a prize, the number of targets for establishment of a minor winning combination is nine corresponding to the number of different types of supplementary bell winning combinations. Then, one winning establishment possible symbol that enables establishment of a compensatory bell winning when winning is achieved on the right reel 32R with the index value IV=1, and one winning establishment arranged next in the reel rotation direction. The number of symbols between possible symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, if a win is won with the index value IV=1 in the normal state ST1, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the right reel 32R, the supplementary bell winning prize is displayed on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. The pattern that enables establishment stops.

With the above configuration, when winning is won with the index value IV=1 in the normal state ST1, any one of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is subject to the first stop. On the main line ML1 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a symbol enabling establishment of a compensation bell prize is stopped and displayed. Then, in the first stop, when the symbols enabling the establishment of the supplementary bell prize are stopped and displayed on the main line ML1, establishment of the normal bell prize is not possible. Therefore, even in the second stop and the third stop, on the main line ML1 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be stopped, the symbols that enable the establishment of the compensation bell prize are stopped and displayed. As a result, when winning is won with the index value IV=1 in the normal state ST1, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are compensated for. Bell prize will be established.

Returning to the description of the lottery table for the normal state (FIG. 23), the normal bell combination and the first to ninth supplementary bell combinations are set for the index value IV=2, and the normal bell combination for the index value IV=3. and the 10th to 18th supplementary bell combinations are set, and the normal bell combination and the 19th to 27th supplementary bell combinations are set for the index value IV=4. When winning with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 24, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the normal bell combination is treated as the winning combination, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If so, the first to ninth complementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations. Also, when winning with the index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. In the case of the reel 32R, the 10th to 18th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. In the case of the reel 32R, the 19th to 27th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations.

In this case, for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the symbols that enable the establishment of a normal bell prize are one winning possible symbol and one winning possible symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. are arranged so that the number of symbols between them is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when the winning is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 4, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped with respect to the rotational positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Regardless of the timing of the operation, the bell prize is usually established,
When the 1st to 9th supplementary bell combinations are in a winning state collectively, when the 10th to 18th supplementary bell combinations are collectively in a winning state, and when the 19th to 27th supplementary bell combinations are collectively in a winning state In the case of the winning state, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M that enable the establishment of the supplementary bell prize are "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol and ""Replay3" symbol, and the stopped symbols of the right reel 32R that enable establishment of the compensation bell prize are the "BAR" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol. In this case, the symbols that enable the compensation bell winning to be established on each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are one winning possible symbol and one winning possible symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols between and is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 43 and 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the symbols that enable the compensation bell winning to be established are stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. be.

On the other hand, even when the 1st to 9th compensation bell combinations are in a winning state collectively, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L that enables establishment of compensation bell winning is only the "red 7" symbol. . Since only one "red 7" pattern is arranged on the left reel 32L, when the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L is not the predetermined stop operation timing, the compensation bell wins. The symbol that enables the establishment of the above is not stop-displayed on the main line ML1 (hereinafter, also referred to as a so-called dropout). In addition, even when the 10th to 18th supplementary bell combinations are all in a winning state, the stop symbols of the left reel 32L that enable establishment of the supplementary bell prize are "WHITE 7" and "LUCKY". Design only. Since only three of these "white 7" symbols and "LUCKY" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, a so-called omission occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. Further, even when the 19th to 27th supplementary bell combinations are all in a winning state, the stop pattern of the left reel 32L that enables establishment of the supplementary bell prize is only the "BAR" symbol. Since only one "BAR" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L, a so-called dropout occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. In other words, if the win is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 4, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, any prize including compensation bell winning It may happen that the small role winning is not established.

As shown in FIG. 23, the normal bell combination and the 1st to 3rd, 10th to 12th, and 19th to 21st complementary bell combinations are set for the index value IV=5, and the index value IV=6. is set with the normal bell combination and the 4th to 6th, 13th to 15th and 22nd to 24th supplementary bell combinations, and the index value IV=7 is set with the normal bell combination and the 7th to 9th and 16th 18th, 25th to 27th supplementary bell combinations are set. When winning with index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 24, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal bell combination is treated as the winning combination, and the first stop is the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R. If so, the 1st to 3rd, 10th to 12th, and 19th to 21st complementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations. Also, when winning with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. In the case of the reel 32R, the 4th to 6th, 13th to 15th, and 22nd to 24th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations. Also, when winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. In the case of the reel 32R, the 7th to 9th, 16th to 18th, and 25th to 27th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations.

In this case, as already explained, the symbols that enable the establishment of a normal bell prize are arranged on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as not to cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when winning with any of the index values IV=5 to 7 and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped with respect to the rotational positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. A normal bell win is established regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the 1st to 3rd, 10th to 12th, 19th to 21st supplementary bells are all in a winning state, the 4th to 6th, 13th to 15th, 22nd to 24th supplementary bells When the winning combination is in a winning state collectively, and when the 7th to 9th, 16th to 18th, 25th to 27th supplementary bell winning combinations are in a winning state collectively, the supplementary bell winning The stop symbols on the left reel 32L that enable establishment are the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol and "BAR" symbol, and the stop of the right reel 32R that enables the establishment of the compensation bell prize. The patterns are a "BAR" pattern, a "watermelon" pattern and a "LUCKY" pattern. In this case, the symbols that enable the establishment of the supplementary bell prize on each of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are one winning possible symbol and one winning possible symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols between and is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 and 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, the symbol that enables the establishment of the compensation bell winning is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. be.

On the other hand, even when the 1st to 3rd, 10th to 12th, and 19th to 21st supplementary bell combinations are in a winning state collectively, the middle reel 32M enables establishment of a supplementary bell prize. The stop symbol of is only the "red 7" symbol. Since only one "red 7" symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M, a so-called omission occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotational position of the middle reel 32M. In addition, even when the 4th to 6th, 13th to 15th, and 22nd to 24th compensation bell combinations are in a winning state all together, the middle reel 32M that enables establishment of compensation bell winnings. The stop symbols are only the "White 7" symbol and the "Replay 2" symbol. Since only two of these "white 7" symbols and "replay 2" symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M, a so-called omission occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotational position of the middle reel 32M. In addition, even when the 7th to 9th, 16th to 18th, and 25th to 27th compensation bell combinations are in a winning state all together, the middle reel 32M that enables establishment of compensation bell prizes. Stop symbols are only "LUCKY" symbols and "Replay 3" symbols. Since only two of these "LUCKY" symbols and "replay 3" symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M, so-called omissions occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotational position of the middle reel 32M. In other words, if the win is won with any of the index values IV=5 to 7, and the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, depending on the stop operation timing of the middle reel 32M, any prize including compensation bell winning It may happen that the small role winning is not established.

For the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 23, the normal bell combination and the 1st, 4th, 7th, 10th, 13th, 13th, 16th, 19th, 22nd and 25th complementary bell combinations are set. The index value IV=9 is set with the normal bell combination and the 2nd, 5th, 8th, 11th, 14th, 17th, 20th, 23rd and 26th supplementary bell combinations, The normal bell combination and the 3rd, 6th, 9th, 12th, 15th, 18th, 21st, 24th and 27th supplementary bell combinations are set for the index value IV=10. When winning with index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 24, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the normal bell combination is treated as the winning combination, and the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M. If so, the 1st, 4th, 7th, 10th, 13th, 16th, 19th, 22nd and 25th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations. Also, in the case of winning with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. In the case of the reel 32M, the 2nd, 5th, 8th, 11th, 14th, 17th, 20th, 23rd and 26th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations. Also, when winning with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. For the reel 32M, the 3rd, 6th, 9th, 12th, 15th, 18th, 21st, 24th and 27th supplementary bell combinations are treated as winning combinations.

In this case, as already explained, the symbols that enable the establishment of a normal bell prize are arranged on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as not to cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when winning with any of the index values IV=8 to 10 and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped with respect to the rotation positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The normal bell win is established regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the 1st, 4th, 7th, 10th, 13th, 16th, 19th, 22nd and 25th supplementary bells are all in a winning state, the 2nd, 5th, 8th and 2nd When the 11th, 14th, 17th, 20th, 23rd and 26th supplementary bells are all in a winning state, and when the 3rd, 6th, 9th, 12th, 15th, 18th and 18th When the 21st, 24th and 27th supplementary bell combinations are in a winning state all together, the left reel 32L stop pattern enabling establishment of the supplementary bell prize is a “red 7” pattern and a “white 7” pattern. , "LUCKY" and "BAR" symbols, and the stopped symbols of the middle reel 32M that enable the establishment of the supplementary bell winning are the "Red 7" symbol, the "White 7" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol, and the "Replay 2" symbol. A symbol and a "Replay 3" symbol. In this case, the symbols that enable the establishment of the supplementary bell prize on each of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are one winning possible symbol and one winning possible symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols between and is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 and 43 with respect to the rotational positions of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, the symbols enabling the establishment of the compensation bell winning are stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. be.

On the other hand, even if the 1st, 4th, 7th, 10th, 13th, 16th, 19th, 22nd and 25th supplementary bell combinations are all in a winning state, the supplementary bell wins. The stop symbol of the right reel 32R that enables the establishment of is only the "BAR" symbol. Since only one "BAR" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R, a so-called dropout occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotational position of the right reel 32R. Also, even if the 2nd, 5th, 8th, 11th, 14th, 17th, 20th, 23rd and 26th supplementary bell wins are all in a winning state, the supplementary bell win The stop symbol of the right reel 32R that can be established is only the "watermelon" symbol. Since only one "watermelon" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R, a so-called dropout occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotational position of the right reel 32R. In addition, even if the 3rd, 6th, 9th, 12th, 15th, 18th, 21st, 24th and 27th supplementary bell wins are all in a winning state, the supplementary bell win The stop symbol of the right reel 32R that can be established is only the "LUCKY" symbol. Since only three "LUCKY" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R, a so-called dropout occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotational position of the right reel 32R. In other words, if a win is won with any of the index values IV=8 to 10, and the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first stop, depending on the stop operation timing of the right reel 32R, any prize including compensation bell winning is possible. It may happen that the small role winning is not established.

As shown in FIG. 23, the first cherry combination is set for the index value IV=11. When winning with index value IV=11, only the first cherry combination is treated as a winning combination as shown in FIG. . The symbols that enable the establishment of the first cherry prize on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are one winning possible symbol and one winning possible symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=11, the winning of the first cherry is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

As shown in FIG. 23, the second cherry combination is set for the index value IV=12. When winning with index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 24, only the second cherry combination is treated as a winning combination regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. . The symbols that enable the second cherry winning to be established on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are one winning possible symbol and one winning possible symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=12, the second cherry winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

As shown in FIG. 23, the second replay combination is set for the index value IV=13. When winning with index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 24, only the second replay combination is treated as a winning combination, regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. . The symbols that enable the establishment of the second replay prize on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are one symbol capable of establishing a winning prize and one symbol capable of establishing a winning prize disposed next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=13, the second replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

As shown in FIG. 23, the third replay combination is set for the index value IV=14. When winning with index value IV=14, only the third replay combination is treated as a winning combination as shown in FIG. . The symbols that enable the establishment of the third replay prize on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are one symbol capable of establishing a winning and one symbol capable of establishing a winning that is arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=14, the third replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

As shown in FIG. 23, the first replay combination is set for the index value IV=15. When winning with the index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 24, only the first replay combination is treated as the winning combination regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. . The symbols that enable the establishment of the first replay winning on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are one symbol that can establish a winning and one symbol that can establish a winning that is arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=15, the first replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

As shown in FIG. 23, the SB hand is set for the index value IV=16. When winning with index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. 24, only the SB combination is treated as the winning combination regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Therefore, the SB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. On the other hand, on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, only one symbol that enables the establishment of the SB prize is arranged, and on the right reel 32R, only three symbols that enable the establishment of the SB prize are arranged. . Therefore, depending on the stop operation timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the SB winning is not realized.

For the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 23, the first to fourth group wins of the first CB winning are set. As already explained, the 1st CB winning 1st group, the 1st CB winning 2nd group, the 1st CB winning 3rd group, and the 1CB winning 4th group are the 1st CB winning. The combination of symbols corresponding to establishment is different. However, even if any one of the first to fourth group wins of the first CB win is established, the first CB win is established. When winning with IV=17, as shown in FIG. 24, if the 1st stop is the left reel 32L, the 1st, 3rd and 4th group winnings of the 1st CB win are treated as winning hands. Further, if the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the first group winning combination and the fourth group winning combination are treated as winning combinations, and if the second stop is the right reel 32R, the first CB winning third combination is treated as a winning combination. Group roles and fourth group roles are treated as winning roles. Also, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the winning combinations of the first group, the second group and the fourth group winning of the first CB are treated as the winning combinations, and if the second stop is the left reel 32L, the first CB. The winning first and fourth group wins are treated as winning hands, and if the second stop is the right reel 32R, the first CB winning second and fourth group wins are treated as winning wins. If the first stop is the right reel 32R, the winning combinations of the second group, the third group and the fourth group of the first CB winning combination are treated as winning combinations, and if the second stop is the left reel 32L, the first CB. The third and fourth group winning combinations are treated as winning combinations, and if the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the first winning second and fourth group combinations are treated as winning combinations. In other words, if the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first group winning combination and the fourth group winning combination are treated as winning combinations, and if the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second winning combination of the first CB winning combination is treated as a winning combination. The group combination and the fourth group combination are treated as the winning combination, and if the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the third group combination and the fourth group combination of the first CB winning are handled as the winning combination.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st group win of the 1st CB prize is either a "Bell" symbol or a "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. BAR" pattern (see FIG. 5). In this case, the symbol that enables the establishment of the winning of the first group combination of the 1st CB winning on each of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is arranged next to one winning establishment possible symbol in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. On the other hand, on the right reel 32R, there is only one symbol that enables the winning of the first group combination of the first CB winning. occurs. As already explained in this configuration, the first group winning combination of the first CB winning is set as a winning combination when the first stop and the second stopping are the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M. In a situation in which winning of the first group combination is prioritized, so-called loss does not occur until the first stop and second stop, and so-called loss may occur at the third stop.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the second group winning combination of the 1st CB prize is that the left reel 32L has either the "Red 7" symbol or the "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M has the "Bell" symbol, and the right reel 32R has the "Bell" symbol. It is either a "cherry" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol (see FIG. 5). In this case, the symbols that enable the establishment of the winning of the second group combination of the first CB winning on each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are arranged next to one winning establishment possible symbol in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. On the other hand, since only two symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L that enable the winning of the second group combination of the first CB winning, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, a so-called omission may occur. occurs. As already explained in this configuration, the second group combination of the 1st CB winning prize is set as a winning combination when the first stop and the second stop are the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. In a situation where winning of the second group combination is given priority, so-called loss does not occur until the first stop and second stop, and so-called loss can occur at the third stop.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the 3rd group winning combination of the 1st CB prize is either a "Bell" symbol or a "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L, and a "Red 7" symbol, a "LUCKY" symbol and a "Lucky" symbol on the middle reel 32M. The right reel 32R is either a "replay 3" symbol, and the right reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol (see FIG. 5). In this case, the symbol that enables the winning of the third group combination of the 1st CB winning on each of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R is arranged next to one winning symbol in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. On the other hand, since only three symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M to enable the winning of the third group combination of the first CB prize, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M, a so-called omission may occur. occurs. As already explained in the configuration, the third group combination of the first CB winning is set as a winning combination when the first stop and the second stop are the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R. In a situation where winning of the 3rd group combination is prioritized, so-called loss does not occur until the first stop and the second stop, and so-called loss can occur at the third stop.

As already explained, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st CB winning 4th group combination is that the stopped symbols of the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol and " LUCKY" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any one of "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "replay 2" symbol and "replay 3" symbol, A combination in which the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol, and a stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol. symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is either the "bell" symbol or the "replay 1" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is either the "BAR" symbol or the "watermelon symbol and "LUCKY" symbol, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 is either the "replay 1" symbol or the "replay 3" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is Any one of "red 7", "white 7", "LUCKY", "replay 2", and "replay 3", and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are "BAR" and "watermelon". and any combination of "LUCKY" symbols (see FIG. 5). In this case, the symbol that enables the establishment of the winning of the 4th group combination of the 1st CB winning on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the one that is arranged next to the symbol that can establish the winning of the reel in the rotational direction of the reel. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Then, if the establishment of the winning of the 4th group winning combination of the 1CB winning combination is prioritized, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are in any manner. Also, the winning of the 4th group winning of the 1st CB winning will be established.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st CB winning 4th group winning combination is set in this manner, the 1CB winning 4th group winning 1CB winning combination is made to correspond to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Even if the 1st to 3rd group winning roles are set, as long as there is no event that prevents the establishment of the 1st CB winning 4th group winning role, the 1st CB winning 4th group winning role Establishment takes precedence. Then, if the winning of the 4th group winning combination of the 1CB winning combination is given priority, if the 1CB winning combination is won in the normal state ST1, the 1CB winning combination is established and the winning state of the 1CB winning combination is carried over. state will not occur. On the other hand, in the normal state ST1, a configuration is adopted in which the winning of the first to third group winnings of the first CB winning is prioritized over the winning of the fourth group winning of the first CB winning. Such a configuration will be described later in detail.

For the index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 23, the 1st to 4th group wins of the 2nd CB winning are set. As already explained, the 1st group winning 2nd CB, the 2nd group winning 2CB, the 3rd group winning 2CB, and the 4th group winning 2CB, and the 2nd CB winning The combination of symbols corresponding to establishment is different. However, the 2nd CB win is established even if any of the 1st to 4th group wins of the 2nd CB win are established. When winning with IV=18, as shown in FIG. 24, if the 1st stop is the left reel 32L, the 1st, 3rd and 4th group wins of the 2nd CB are treated as winning hands. Further, if the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the winning combination of the first group and the fourth group winning the second CB is treated as a winning combination, and if the second stop is the right reel 32R, the third winning combination of the second CB is treated as a winning combination. Group roles and fourth group roles are treated as winning roles. Also, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the winning combinations of the first group, the second group and the fourth group of the second CB winning are treated as the winning combinations, and if the second stop is the left reel 32L, the second CB. The winning first and fourth group wins are treated as winning hands, and if the second stop is the right reel 32R, the second CB winning second and fourth group wins are treated as winning wins. Further, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the winning combinations of the second group, the third group and the fourth group are treated as winning combinations, and if the second stop is the left reel 32L, the second CB is treated as the winning combination. The third and fourth group winning combinations are treated as winning combinations, and if the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the second winning second and fourth group combinations are treated as winning combinations. In other words, if the third stop is the right reel 32R, the winning combination of the first group and the fourth group winning the second CB is treated as a winning combination, and if the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second winning combination of the second CB is treated as the winning combination. The group combination and the fourth group combination are treated as the winning combination, and if the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the third group combination and the fourth group combination of the second CB winning are handled as the winning combination.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the first group combination of the 2nd CB winning prize is that the left reel 32L has either the "Bell" symbol or the "Cherry" symbol, the middle reel 32M has the "Bell" symbol, and the right reel 32R has the "Bell" symbol. It is either a "watermelon" pattern or a "LUCKY" pattern (see FIG. 5). In this case, the symbols that enable the winning of the first group combination of the 2nd CB winning on each of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are arranged next to one symbol that allows the winning of prizes and the rotational direction of the reel. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. On the other hand, since only four symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R to enable the winning of the first group combination of the second CB winning, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotation position of the right reel 32R, a so-called omission may occur. occurs. As already explained in this configuration, the first group combination of the 2nd CB winning is set as a winning combination when the first stop and the second stop are the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M. In a situation in which winning of the first group combination is prioritized, so-called loss does not occur until the first stop and second stop, and so-called loss may occur at the third stop.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the 2nd group win of the 2nd CB prize is either a "white 7" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. It is either a "cherry" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol (see FIG. 5). In this case, the symbols that enable the establishment of the winning of the second group combination of the 2nd CB winning on each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are arranged next to one winning establishment possible symbol in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. On the other hand, since only three symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L that enable the winning of the second group combination of the second CB winning, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, a so-called omission may occur. occurs. As already explained in this configuration, the second group winning combination of the second CB winning is set as a winning combination when the first stop and the second stopping are the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. In a situation where winning of the second group combination is given priority, so-called loss does not occur until the first stop and second stop, and so-called loss can occur at the third stop.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the 3rd group combination of the 2nd CB prize is that the left reel 32L has either the "Bell" symbol or the "Cherry" symbol, and the middle reel 32M has the "White 7" symbol and the "Replay 2" symbol. Either, and the right reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "replay 1" symbol (see FIG. 5). In this case, the symbol that enables the winning of the third group combination of the 2nd CB winning on each of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R is arranged next to one winning symbol in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. On the other hand, since only two symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M to enable the winning of the third group combination of the second CB prize, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M, a so-called omission may occur. occurs. As already explained in this configuration, the third group combination of the 2nd CB winning is set as a winning combination when the first stop and the second stop are the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R. If the winning of the third group combination is prioritized, the so-called dropout will not occur until the first stop and the second stop, and the so-called dropout can occur at the third stop.

As already explained, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 4th group winning combination of the 2nd CB prize is that the stopped symbols of the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol and " LUCKY" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is any one of "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "replay 2" symbol and "replay 3" symbol, A combination in which the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, and a combination in which the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L on the main line ML1 are "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "LUCKY" symbol. Either, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is any one of a "BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol and a "LUCKY" symbol. , and on the main line ML1, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M are the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol, and the "replay" symbol. 2" symbol or "replay 3" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is any of the "BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol and "LUCKY" symbol (see FIG. 5). ). In this case, the symbol that enables the establishment of the winning of the fourth group combination of the 2nd CB winning on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the one that is arranged next to the symbol that can establish the winning of the reel in the rotational direction of the reel. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Then, if the establishment of the winning of the 4th group combination of the 2nd CB winning prize is given priority, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may be any mode. Also, the winning of the 4th group winning of the 2nd CB winning will be established.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the 2nd CB winning 4th group combination is set as described above, the 2nd CB separately from the 2CB winning 4th group combination is made to correspond to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Even if the 1st to 3rd group winning roles are set, unless there is an event that prevents the 2nd CB winning role from the 4th group winning, the 2nd CB winning role in the 4th group will win. Establishment takes precedence. If the winning of the 4th group winning combination of the 2nd CB winning combination is given priority, if the 2nd CB winning combination is won in the normal state ST1, the winning state of the 2nd CB winning combination is carried over due to the establishment of the 2nd CB winning combination. state will not occur. On the other hand, in the normal state ST1, a configuration is adopted in which the winning of the second CB winning first to third group winnings is prioritized over the winning of the second CB winning of the fourth group winnings.

In this slot machine 10, when winning is won with the index value IV=17 in the normal state ST1, the winning of the 4th group combination of the 1st CB winning prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, priority is given to establishment of any of the first to third group winnings of the first CB winning prize. In addition, when winning is won with the index value IV=18 in the normal state ST1, the 2nd CB is earlier than the winning of the 4th group combination of the 2nd CB winning regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Winning of any one of the first to third winning groups is given priority in the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In this way, the stop control for prioritizing the winning of any one of the first to third group wins is performed using the pull-in bit in the buffer B for judgment information. Before describing the stop control using the pull-in bit, the pull-in bit setting process executed in step S908 of the line determination process (FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the bit attraction setting process, and FIGS. 27(a) to 27(f) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the bit attraction information is derived.

First, a pull-in bit information setting process is executed (step S1401). In the bit attraction information setting process, a preparatory process before expansion of the bit attraction information is first performed. In the bit-in-information pre-expansion preparatory process, the bit-in-information search area 104 provided in a work area 74a for specific control (to be described later) in the main RAM 74 is initialized.

The attraction bit information search area 104 is an area prepared for acquiring the attraction bit information, and as shown in FIG. Each reel area 115, 116, 117 has upper areas 115a, 116a, 117a, middle areas 115b, 116b, 117b, and lower areas 115c, 116c, 117c. That is, the lead-in bit information search area 104 is composed of nine areas 115a to 115c, 116a to 116c, and 117a to 117c. Each of these nine areas 115a-115c, 116a-116c, and 117a-117c has a 2-bit configuration.

When the lead-in bit information search area 104 is initialized, binary numbers "01" are set in the areas 115a to 115c, 116a to 116c, and 117a to 117c as shown in FIG. 27(b). After that, among the areas 115a to 115c, 116a to 116c, and 117a to 117c, areas that do not correspond to the current symbol stop positions on the main lines ML1 to ML3 are cleared to "0". In the situation where the number of bets is "3", as already explained, only the main line ML1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R is set as the line for which a prize is established. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the middle areas 115b, 116b, 117b and the lower areas 115c, 116c, 117c of the reel areas 115, 116, 117 are cleared to "0".

Thereafter, if there are reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has been issued are stopped on the current main lines ML1 to ML3. Pull-in bit information corresponding to the symbol number of the pattern being stopped or stopped is read from the pull-in bit table used for the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command is generated, and each of the read-out pull-in bit information. are set in areas 115a-115c, 116a-116c, 117a-117c corresponding to the positions on the current main lines ML1-ML3 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has already been issued. Also, from the pull-in bit table set corresponding to the current target reel, when the symbol of the current target symbol number stops at the base position, the symbol number that will stop on the current main lines ML1 to ML3. area 115a~115c, 116a~116c, 117a~ corresponding to the position on the current main lines ML1~ML3 on the current target reel. 117c. For the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which no stop command has been issued and other than the current target reel, only the areas corresponding to the current symbol stop positions on the main lines ML1 to ML3 are displayed. is set to "01".

When the attraction bit information is set as described above, if the number of bets is "3", for example, as shown in FIG. are all "01". In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 27(e), two of the upper areas 115a, 116a and 117a on the main line ML1 are "01" and the remaining one area is "00". 27(f), one of the upper areas 115a, 116a and 117a on the main line ML1 becomes "01" and the remaining two areas become "00". case is assumed.

Returning to the description of the pull-in bit setting process (FIG. 26), after executing the process of step S1401, the number of search lines is acquired (step S1402). As already explained, in gaming states other than the CB state ST3, the number of bets in one game is "3", and only one main line ML1 is the winning target line, and in the CB state ST3, the number of bets in one game is "2". , and the two main lines ML2 and ML3 are the winning target lines. Therefore, if the number of bets is "3", the search line is "1", and if the number of bets is "2", the search line is "2". After that, 1 is subtracted from the number of search lines (step S1403). As a result, immediately after the process of step S1402 is executed, if the number of bets is "3", the number of search lines is "0", and if the number of bets is "2", the number of search lines is "1". . When the number of bets is "3" and the number of search lines is "0", the search line is the main line ML1. When the number of bets is "2" and the number of search lines is "1", the search line is the first main line ML2, and when the number of search lines is "0", the search line is the second main line ML3. Become.

After that, the combination processing of the attraction bit information search area 104 is executed (step S1404). In this synthesizing process, AND processing is performed on the lead-in bit information of the areas 115a to 115c, 116a to 116c, and 117a to 117c on the current search line. In the case of FIG. 27(d), the bit-in-in information of the areas 115a, 116a, and 117a corresponding to the position on the main line ML1 are all "01". becomes "01". 27(e) and 27(f), the lead-in bit information is "00" in a part of the areas 115a, 116a, 117a corresponding to the position on the main line ML1. When these are AND-processed, the pull-in bit information composite value becomes "00".

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of search lines is "0" (step S1405). If not "0" (step S1405: NO), the process returns to step S1403. If the number of search lines is "0" (step S1405: YES), the attraction bit information composite value derived in step S1404 is set in the attraction bit of the determination information buffer B (step S1406). This completes the setting of the pull-in bit.

In the configuration in which the pull-in bit is set as described above, in the reel rotation process (FIG. 13) as already described, only the winning data for the first CB combination or the winning data for the second CB combination are set in the main RAM 74 as the winning data. If so (steps S601 and S602: YES), the single CB table is read from the designation table storage area 91 of the main ROM 73 as the offset designation table (step S603). FIGS. 28(a) to 28(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the pull-in bit tables 121 to 123 of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R specified in the single CB table.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the pull-in bit table 121 of the left reel 32L, the first group win of the first CB win, the third group win of the first CB win, the first group win of the second CB win and the second CB win is set to a larger value than the symbol attraction bit information corresponding to the 4th group win of the 1st CB winning prize. In addition, in the withdrawal bit table 121 of the left reel 32L, it corresponds to the first group win of the first CB win, the third group win of the first CB win, the first group win of the second CB win and the third group win of the second CB win. The symbol pull-in bit information constitutes a combination of some of the symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "same value combination on the 2nd CB side") among the symbols corresponding to the 4th group win of the 2nd CB prize ("Bell") Although it has the same value as the attraction-in bit information of the symbol), it is set to a value larger than the attraction-in bit information of the symbols forming other symbol combinations in the 2nd CB winning 4th group combination.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), in the pull-in bit table 122 of the middle reel 32M, the first group win of the first CB, the second group win of the first CB, the first group win of the second CB and the second CB win The drawing bit information of the symbol corresponding to the 2nd group win of the 1st CB is a combination of some of the symbols corresponding to the 4th group win of the 1st CB (hereinafter, also referred to as "same value combination A on the 1st CB side") ) is the same value as the attraction bit information of the symbol ("Bell" symbol) that constitutes the ), but is set to a value larger than the attraction bit information of the symbol that constitutes the combination of other symbols in the 4th group combination of the 1st CB winning prize. It is In addition, in the withdrawal bit table 122 of the middle reel 32M, it corresponds to the first group win of the first CB win, the second group win of the first CB win, the first group win of the second CB win and the second group win of the second CB win. The symbol attraction bit information is set to a larger value than the symbol attraction bit information corresponding to the 2nd CB winning 4th group combination.

As shown in FIG. 28(c), in the pull-in bit table 123 of the right reel 32R, the first CB winning second group winning combination, the first CB winning third group winning combination, the second CB winning second group winning combination, and the second CB winning combination The drawing bit information of the symbol corresponding to the 3rd group win of the 1st CB is a combination of some of the symbols corresponding to the 4th group win of the 1st CB (hereinafter also referred to as "same value combination B on the 1st CB side") ) ("cherry" symbol and "replay 1" symbol), but the same value as the bit information of the symbol that constitutes the combination of other symbols in the 4th group combination of the 1st CB winning prize. set to a value greater than However, the same value combination A on the first CB side and the same value combination B on the first CB side are different. In addition, in the withdrawal bit table 123 of the right reel 32R, it corresponds to the first CB winning second group winning combination, the first CB winning third group winning combination, the second CB winning second group winning combination, and the second CB winning third group winning combination. The symbol attraction bit information is set to a larger value than the symbol attraction bit information corresponding to the 2nd CB winning 4th group combination.

Since the attraction bit tables 121 to 123 are set as described above, when winning is won with the index value IV=17 in the normal state ST1, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the reels 32L and 32L Even if it is the stop operation timing of 32M and 32R, the winning of the first to third group winnings of the first CB winning is prioritized over the winning of the fourth group winning of the first CB winning.

Specifically, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the symbol priority order information corresponding to the first group win of the first CB win and the third group win of the first CB win is set to the fourth win of the first CB win. It can be set to a value greater than the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the group combination. As already described, the symbols corresponding to the first group win of the first CB and the third group win of the first CB are arranged on the left reel 32L so as not to cause a so-called omission. Therefore, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, it is possible to win the first group win of the first CB or the third group win of the first CB win, and the win of the fourth group win of the first CB win is possible. becomes impossible.

When the middle reel 32M is first stopped, the same value combination A on the first CB side is composed of the symbol priority order information corresponding to the first group winning combination of the first CB and the second group winning combination of the first CB. The value can be set higher than the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the 4th group winning combination of the 1st CB prize, except for the symbol that is the winning symbol. Further, after that, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the second time, the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the first group combination of the first CB winning prize is set to the priority of the symbols constituting the same value combination A on the first CB side. It can be a value larger than the order information, and when the right reel 32R is stopped for the second time, the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the second group combination of the first CB winning prize is set to the same value combination on the first CB side. It can be set to a value greater than the priority order information of the symbols forming A. As already explained, the symbols corresponding to the first group winning combination of the first CB and the second group winning combination of the first CB are arranged on the middle reel 32M so as not to cause a so-called omission, and the symbols corresponding to the first group winning combination of the first CB are arranged on the left reel 32L. The symbols corresponding to the 1CB winning first group winning combination are arranged so as not to cause a so-called omission, and the symbols corresponding to the 1CB winning third group winning combination on the right reel 32R are arranged so as not to cause a so-called omission to occur. ing. Therefore, when the middle reel 32M is first stopped and the left reel 32L is secondly stopped, it is possible to win the first group prize of the first CB prize, and win the fourth group prize of the first CB prize. cannot be established. In addition, when the middle reel 32M is first stopped and the right reel 32R is secondly stopped, it is possible to establish a winning of the second group winning of the first CB winning, and a winning of the fourth group winning of the first CB winning. cannot be established.

When the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the same value combination B on the first CB side is composed of the symbol priority order information corresponding to the first CB winning second group winning combination and the first CB winning third group winning combination. The value can be set higher than the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the 4th group winning combination of the 1st CB prize, except for the symbol that is the winning symbol. Further, after that, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the second time, the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the third group combination of the first CB winning prize is set to the priority of the symbols constituting the same value combination B on the first CB side. It can be a value larger than the order information, and when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the second time, the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the second group combination of the first CB winning prize is set to the same value combination on the first CB side. A value greater than the priority order information of the symbols forming B can be set. As already described, the symbols corresponding to the first CB winning second group winning combination and the first CB winning third group winning combination are arranged on the right reel 32R so as not to cause a so-called omission, and the left reel 32L is arranged so as to prevent the occurrence of a so-called omission. The symbols corresponding to the 3rd group win of the 1CB prize are arranged so as not to cause a so-called omission, and the symbols corresponding to the 2nd group win of the 1CB prize are arranged so as to prevent the occurrence of a so-called omission on the middle reel 32M. ing. Therefore, when the right reel 32R is first stopped and the left reel 32L is secondly stopped, it is possible to win the first CB winning third group winning combination, and the first CB winning fourth group winning combination is possible. cannot be established. Further, when the right reel 32R is first stopped and the middle reel 32M is secondly stopped, it is possible to establish a winning of the second group winning of the first CB winning, and a winning of the fourth group winning of the first CB winning. cannot be established.

In addition, since the attraction bit tables 121 to 123 are set as described above, when winning is won with the index value IV=18 in the normal state ST1, the stopping order of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the reel Even if it is the stop operation timing of 32L, 32M and 32R, the winning of the 2nd CB winning 1st to 3rd group winnings is prioritized over the 2nd CB winning of the 4th group winning.

Specifically, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the symbol priority information corresponding to the second CB winning first group winning combination and the second CB winning third group winning combination is transferred to the second CB side. Except for the symbols that make up the value combination, the value can be set higher than the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the 2nd CB winning 4th group combination. Further, after that, when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the second time, the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the first group combination of the second CB winning prize is changed to the priority order of the symbols constituting the same value combination on the second CB side. When the right reel 32R is stopped for the second time, the priority order information of symbols corresponding to the third group combination of the second CB winning prize is set to the same value combination on the second CB side. It can be set to a value greater than the priority order information of the constituent symbols. As already described, the symbols corresponding to the first group winning combination of the second CB and the third group winning combination of the second CB are arranged on the left reel 32L so as not to cause a so-called omission. The symbols corresponding to the first group win of the 2CB prize are arranged so as not to cause a so-called omission, and the symbols corresponding to the third group win of the 2CB prize are arranged so as not to cause a so-called omission on the right reel 32R. ing. Therefore, when the left reel 32L is first stopped and the middle reel 32M is secondly stopped, it is possible to win the second CB prize winning group 1, and the second CB winning prize group 4 win. cannot be established. In addition, when the left reel 32L is first stopped and the right reel 32R is stopped secondly, it is possible to establish a winning of the second CB winning of the third group winning, and a winning of the second CB winning of the fourth group winning. cannot be established.

When the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the priority order information of the symbols corresponding to the second CB winning first group winning combination and the second CB winning second group winning combination corresponds to the second CB winning fourth group winning combination. It can be a value larger than the priority order information of the pattern to be played. As already described, the symbols corresponding to the first group winning combination of the second CB and the second group winning combination of the second CB are arranged on the middle reel 32M so as not to cause a so-called omission. Therefore, when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, it is possible to win the second CB winning first group winning combination or the second CB winning second group winning combination, and the second CB winning fourth group winning combination is possible. cannot be established.

When the right reel 32R is first stopped, the symbol priority order information corresponding to the 2nd CB winning 2nd group winning combination and the 2nd CB winning 3rd group winning combination corresponds to the 2nd CB winning 4th group winning combination. It can be a value larger than the priority order information of the pattern to be played. As already described, the symbols corresponding to the second CB winning second group winning combination and the second CB winning third group winning combination are arranged on the right reel 32R so as not to cause a so-called omission. Therefore, when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, it is possible to win the 2nd group winning combination of the 2nd CB winning combination or the 3rd group combination of the 2nd CB winning combination and the 4th group combination of the 2nd CB winning combination. cannot be established.

As described above, in the normal state ST1, when the index value IV=17 is won and the winning data of the first CB combination is set in the main side RAM 74, it is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in any order. Also, at the stage when the first stop and the second stop have been performed, it is possible to win the 1st CB winning group 1st to 3rd group winnings, but it is impossible to win the 1st CB winning 4th group winnings. state. Then, regardless of which reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the third stop, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be the third stop, the first CB winning may not be established. As a result, when winning data for the first CB combination is set in the main RAM 74 in the normal state ST1, it is possible to create a situation in which the first CB winning is not established. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is carried over until the first CB winning is established, the winning data of the first CB combination is carried over to the main side RAM 74 in subsequent games.

Similarly, in the normal state ST1, when the index value IV=18 is won and the winning data for the second CB combination is set in the main side RAM 74, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in any order. At the stage of the first stop and the second stop, it is possible to win the 1st to 3rd group wins of the 2nd CB prize, but it is impossible to win the 4th group win of the 2nd CB prize. becomes. Then, no matter which reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the third stop, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be the third stop, the second CB winning may not be established. As a result, when the winning data for the second CB combination is set in the main RAM 74 in the normal state ST1, it is possible to create a situation in which the second CB winning is not established. Since the winning state of the second CB combination is carried over until the second CB winning is established, the winning data of the second CB combination is carried over to the main RAM 74 in subsequent games.

As shown in FIG. 22, the winning data of the first CB combination or the winning data of the second CB combination are carried over to the main side RAM 74 in the normal state ST1, so that the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the internal state ST2. do. In the internal state ST2, although the details will be described later, the probability of winning a replay prize is higher than in the normal state ST1. In addition, in the internal state ST2, although the details will be described later, the process (steps S1008 to S1010) for adjusting the given number of bits is not executed in the winning process (FIG. 18). In this case, establishment of the normal bell prize is prioritized over establishment of the compensation bell prize, and the establishment of the normal bell prize makes the number of given game media "9". As a result, in the internal state ST2, the expected acquisition value of the game media per unit number of games is higher than in the normal state ST1. The expected value of game media to be obtained per unit number of games is obtained by subtracting the number of game media required to execute the unit number of games from the expected value of game media to be given when the unit number of games is executed. It's about value.

Furthermore, in the game in which the CB role (first CB role or second CB role) is won, if the winning of the CB role is not established, the ART transition lottery process is executed, and the transition lottery process results in a transition win. , the game state becomes the ART state ST20 of the internal state ST2. In the ART state ST2, the player is notified of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables establishment of a normal bell prize when winning is won with the above-described index value IV=2 to 10. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in accordance with the order of stopping, the normal bell prize is surely established. As a result, in the ART state ST20, the expected value of acquisition of game media per unit number of games is higher than in any other game state.

Since the internal state ST2 has a higher advantage than the normal state ST1, the winning data of the CB combination is carried over to the main side RAM 74 when the game state is the normal state ST1. people will expect. In this case, since both the first CB combination and the second CB combination are set, even if the CB combination is won in the normal state ST1, the player's selection of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is correct. Only in this case, the winning data of the CB combination is carried over to the main side RAM 74 and the transition to the internal state ST2 occurs. A configuration in which the transition to the internal state ST2 occurs only when the player's selection is correct will be described.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the 1st CB prize and the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the 2nd CB prize. is. FIG. 30(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the range in which the winning of the first CB winning second group combination is possible and the range in which the second CB winning combination of the second group can be achieved on the left reel 32L. FIG. 30(b) is an explanation for explaining the range in which the winning of the first CB winning third group role and the range in which the second CB winning third group winning can be established on the middle reel 32M. FIG. 30(c) is a diagram for explaining the range in which the first group winning combination of the first CB winning combination and the winning range of the first group combination of the second CB winning combination are possible on the right reel 32R. It is an explanatory diagram. FIGS. 31(a), 31(c), and 31(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped when the first CB winning is established. 31(b), 31(d), and 31(f) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped when the second CB winning is established.

As shown in FIG. 29, the 1st CB winning first group winning combination and the 2nd CB winning first group winning combination are completely in common with the "bell" and "cherry" symbols for the left reel 32L. The middle reel 32M has the "Bell" symbol in common, while the right reel 32R has the "BAR" symbol for the first group winning combination and the second CB winning combination for the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" pattern and the "LUCKY" pattern are completely different. Further, as already explained, the first group win of the first CB and the first group win of the second CB can be won when the right reel 32R is brought to the third stop.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 30(c), the range in which the symbols corresponding to the first group combination of the first CB winning prize on the right reel 32R can be stopped on the main line ML1, The range in which the symbols corresponding to the 2CB winning first group combination can be stopped on the main line ML1 is completely separated, and each symbol on the right reel 32R is included in one of the ranges. Become. Specifically, when the stop button 44 corresponding to the right reel 32R is operated in a situation where any one of the 18th "BAR" symbol to the 14th "RED 7" symbol exists on the main line ML1. , the "BAR" symbol corresponding to the first group win of the first CB prize is stopped on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. On the other hand, if the stop button 44 corresponding to the right reel 32R is operated in a situation where any of the symbols with other symbol numbers are present on the main line ML1, the second symbol will be placed on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol corresponding to the first group winning combination of 2CB is stopped. It should be noted that the range corresponding to the first group win of the first CB prize is not limited to a configuration narrower than the range corresponding to the first group win of the second CB prize, and the former range is the latter range. It may be configured to have the same number of symbols included in each range if the number of symbols on the right reel 32R is an even number.

With this configuration, when the player stops the right reel 32R at the third stop in the game in which the CB win is won, the player can choose between the first CB win and the second CB win as the winning CB win. It is predicted which one it will be, and the stop operation of the stop button 44 corresponding to the right reel 32R is performed at the timing when the symbols in the range corresponding to the CB combination on the side different from the predicted side exist on the main line ML1. It will be done. If the player's prediction is wrong in the game in which the first CB role is won, for example, as shown in FIG. When the game is stopped and the first CB win is established and the player's prediction is wrong in the game in which the second CB role is won, for example, as shown in FIG. The "bell" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol are stopped, and the second CB winning is established. On the other hand, when the player's prediction is correct, the stop symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are the same "bell" symbol and "bell" symbol as when the first CB prize is established or when the second CB prize is established. , the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are symbols other than the "BAR" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol. In this case, the stop symbols of the right reel 32R are "Watermelon" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Replay 1" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "White 7" symbol if the first CB combination is won. If the second CB combination is won, it will be one of the "Cherry", "Replay 1" and "Red 7" symbols. When such symbols stop on the right reel 32R, a combination of symbols that does not establish any winning including the first CB winning and the second CB winning is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. Such a combination of symbols corresponds to the predetermined outcome described above when the right reel 32R is stopped at the third stop. In other words, the combination of symbols corresponds to the trigger combination for transition to the internal state ST2 when the right reel 32R is stopped for the third time.

As shown in FIG. 29, the second group winning combination of the first CB and the second group winning combination of the second CB have completely common "Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and on the right reel 32R. While the "Cherry" symbol and the "Replay 1" symbol are completely common, the second group winning combination of the 1CB prize for the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, which is the 2nd CB. Since the winning second group combination is the "White 7" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol, they are completely different. In addition, as already explained, the first CB winning second group combination and the second CB winning second group combination can be won when the left reel 32L is brought to the third stop.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 30(a), the range in which the symbols corresponding to the second group combination of the first CB winning prize on the left reel 32L can be stopped on the main line ML1, The range in which the symbols corresponding to the 2CB winning second group combination can be stopped on the main line ML1 is completely separated, and each symbol on the left reel 32L is included in one of the ranges. Become. Specifically, when the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L is operated in a situation where any one of the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 5th "cherry" symbol is present on the main line ML1. , the "red 7" symbol or "BAR" symbol corresponding to the second group winning combination of the first CB prize is stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. On the other hand, if the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L is operated in a situation where any of the symbols with other symbol numbers is present on the main line ML1, the second symbol will be placed on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. The "WHITE 7" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol corresponding to the second group winning combination of 2CB is stopped. The range corresponding to the first CB winning second group winning combination is not limited to a configuration narrower than the range corresponding to the second CB winning second group winning combination, and the former range is greater than the latter range. It may be configured to have the same number of symbols included in each range if the number of symbols on the left reel 32L is an even number.

With this configuration, when the player makes the third stop of the left reel 32L in the game in which the CB win is won, the type of the CB win won by the player is either the first CB win or the second CB win. Predict which one it will be, and stop operation of the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L at the timing when the symbols in the range corresponding to the CB combination on the side different from the predicted side exist on the main line ML1. It will be done. If the player's prediction is wrong in the game in which the first CB role is won, for example, as shown in FIG. is stopped and the 1st CB win is established, and in the game in which the 2nd CB role is won, if the player's prediction is wrong, for example, as shown in FIG. The symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "cherry" symbol are stopped, and the second CB winning is established. On the other hand, when the player's prediction is correct, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are the same "bell" symbol and "cherry" symbol as when the first CB prize is established or when the second CB prize is established. Alternatively, although common to the "replay 1" symbols, the stop symbols on the left reel 32L are symbols other than the "red 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "white 7" symbol and the "LUCKY" symbol. In this case, the symbols to be stopped on the left reel 32L are "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Replay 1" symbol and "Replay 2" symbol if the first CB role is won. If the 2nd CB role is won, "Bell" pattern, "Watermelon" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "Replay 1" pattern, "Replay 2" pattern and "Replay 3" pattern Either. When such symbols stop on the left reel 32L, a combination of symbols that does not establish any winning including the first CB winning and the second CB winning is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. Such a combination of symbols corresponds to the predetermined outcome described above when the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop. In other words, the combination of symbols corresponds to the trigger combination for shifting to the internal state ST2 when the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop.

As shown in FIG. 29, the 1st CB winning third group winning combination and the 2nd CB winning third group winning combination have completely common "Bell" symbols and "Cherry" symbols for the left reel 32L. On the right reel 32R, the "Cherry" symbol and "Replay 1" symbol are completely common, while on the middle reel 32M, the 3rd group winning combination of the 1st CB is "Red 7" symbol and "LUCKY". The symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the third group combination of the 2nd CB winning prize are the "White 7" symbol and the "Replay 2" symbol, so they are completely different. Further, as already explained, the first CB winning third group combination and the second CB winning third group combination can be won when the middle reel 32M is stopped at the third stop.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the range in which the symbols corresponding to the third group combination of the first CB winning prize on the middle reel 32M can be stopped on the main line ML1, and the second position on the middle reel 32M. The range in which the symbols corresponding to the 2CB winning third group combination can be stopped on the main line ML1 is completely separated, and each symbol on the middle reel 32M is included in one of the ranges. Become. Specifically, the stop button 43 corresponding to the middle reel 32M is operated in a situation where any one of the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 2nd "replay 1" symbol is present on the main line ML1. In this case, the "Red 7" symbol, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol corresponding to the 3rd group winning combination of the 1st CB prize is stopped on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. On the other hand, if the stop button 43 corresponding to the middle reel 32M is operated in a situation where any of the symbols with other symbol numbers are present on the main line ML1, the second symbol will be placed on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. The "White 7" symbol or the "Replay 2" symbol corresponding to the 3rd group winning combination of 2CB is stopped. The range corresponding to the first CB winning third group win is not limited to a wider configuration than the range corresponding to the second CB winning third group win, and the former range is greater than the latter range. The range may be narrower than the range, or the number of symbols included in each range may be the same if the number of symbols on the middle reel 32M is an even number.

With this configuration, when the player stops the middle reel 32M at the third stop in the game in which the CB win is won, the player can choose between the first CB win and the second CB win. Predict which one it will be, and stop operation of the stop button 43 corresponding to the middle reel 32M at the timing when the symbols in the range corresponding to the CB combination on the side different from the predicted side exist on the main line ML1. It will be done. In the game in which the first CB role is won, if the player's prediction is wrong, for example, as shown in FIG. is stopped and the 1st CB win is established, and when the player's prediction is wrong in the game in which the 2nd CB role is won, for example, as shown in FIG. , the "white 7" symbol and the "cherry" symbol are stopped, and the second CB winning is established. On the other hand, when the player's prediction is correct, the stop symbols of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are the same "bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol as when the first CB prize is established or when the second CB prize is established. and "Cherry" symbols or "Replay 1" symbols, but the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M are "Red 7" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "Replay 3" symbol, "White 7" symbol and "Replay 2" symbol. ” It becomes a pattern other than the pattern. In this case, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "Bell" symbol or the "Replay 1" symbol in any of the situations in which the 1st CB role is won and the 2nd CB role is won. Become. When such symbols stop on the middle reel 32M, a combination of symbols that does not establish any winning including the first CB winning and the second CB winning is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. Such a combination of symbols corresponds to the above-described predetermined outcome when the middle reel 32M is stopped at the third stop. In other words, the combination of symbols corresponds to the trigger combination for transition to the internal state ST2 when the middle reel 32M is stopped at the third stop.

With the above configuration, even if the player wins the CB role in the normal state ST1, the winning data for the CB role is stored in the main RAM 74 only when the player's selection regarding the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is correct. , and a transition to the internal state ST2 occurs. In this case, as shown in FIG. 23, in the lottery table for the normal state, the point value PV set to the index value IV=17 corresponding to the first CB hand is "600" and The point value PV set to the corresponding index value IV=18 is "600". That is, the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role in the normal state ST1 are approximately 1/109, which is the same. Therefore, the probability that the player's prediction is correct is 1/2. In other words, when the CB combination is won, the transition to the internal state ST2 occurs with a probability of 1/2. Furthermore, the probability that a transition to the internal state ST2 occurs in the normal state ST1 is about 1/109.

It should be noted that the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role in the normal state ST1 are not limited to the same configuration. A configuration in which both probabilities are substantially the same may be adopted so as to be about the same. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=1 in the normal state ST1 is about 1/4.4. Also, the probability of winning with index value IV=2, the probability of winning with index value IV=3, the probability of winning with index value IV=4, the probability of winning with index value IV=5, and the probability of winning with index value IV=5. Probability of winning with 6 Probability of winning with index value IV = 7 Probability of winning with index value IV = 8 Probability of winning with index value IV = 9 Probability of winning with index value IV = 10 are both about 1/80, and the probability of winning with any of the index values IV=2 to 10 is about 1/9.0. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=11 is about 1/73, and the probability of winning with the index value IV=12 is about 1/149. The probability of winning with index value IV=13 is about 1/6554, the probability of winning with index value IV=14 is about 1/16384, and the probability of winning with index value IV=15 is about 1/6554. 1/7.7. In this case, the probability of winning a replay prize is about 1/7.7. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=16 is about 1/218.

<Internal state ST2>
Next, the internal state ST2 will be explained. First, the internal state lottery table to be used in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72 in the case of the internal state ST2 will be described. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the internal state lottery table, and FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established. Note that FIG. 32 is a lottery table for the internal state in the case of "setting 3", and although the point value PV set for each index value IV is different for other setting values, the number of index values IV and The types of wins set for each index value IV are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the types of wins set for index values IV=1 to 14, the winning probabilities for index values IV=1 to 14, and the winning probabilities for index values IV=1 to 14 The correspondence between the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established is the same as in the lottery table for the normal state (FIG. 23).

However, in the internal state ST2, if the index value IV=1 and the lottery is won, the adjustment process (step S1010) of the given number of bits is not executed in the winning process (FIG. 18). In this case, the value of the number of bits provided in the determination information buffer B for the symbols that enable the establishment of the normal bell prize is the number of bits provided in the determination information buffer B for the symbols that enable the establishment of the supplementary bell prize. value is greater than In this case, the priority order information of the symbol enabling establishment of the normal bell prize has a larger value than the symbol enabling establishment of the supplementary bell prize. Also, when winning with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 33, the normal bell combination is treated as the winning combination regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the distance between one winning possible symbol that enables the establishment of a normal bell winning and one winning possible symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. The number of symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, if a win is made with the index value IV=1 in the internal state ST1, the normal bell win is established regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. When the normal bell win is established, the number of given game media is "9", which is larger than the given number of game media "1" when the supplementary bell win is established. Thus, as already described, in the internal state ST2, the expected acquisition value of the game media per unit number of games is higher than in the normal state ST1.

As shown in FIG. 32, the first replay combination is set for the index value IV=15 as in the lottery table for the normal state (FIG. 23). Also, as shown in FIG. 33, when winning is made with the index value IV=15, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in any order, as in the case of the normal state ST1. Only one replay combination is treated as a winning combination. However, as shown in FIG. 32, the point value PV set to index value IV=15 is "41755", and this value is the point value of index value IV=15 in the lottery table for normal state (FIG. 23). is a value greater than As a result, the probability of winning with the index value IV=15 is approximately 1/1.6, which is higher than in the normal state ST1.

As shown in FIG. 32, the index value IV=16 is set with the 4th replay combination, the 5th replay combination and the 6th replay combination. When winning with index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. 33, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the fourth replay combination is treated as the winning combination, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel. If it is 32R, the 5th replay combination and the 6th replay combination are treated as winning combinations.

The symbols that enable the establishment of the fourth replay prize on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are one symbol that allows establishment of a prize and one symbol that enables establishment of a prize, which is arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=16, when the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the fourth replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the fifth replay winning prize and the symbol combination corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize are, as shown in FIG. , and the right reel 32R are common in the "replay 1" symbol. In the medium reel 32M, the number of target symbols, which is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, is between one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so as to be within the range of the maximum sliding number. In the right reel 32R, the maximum number of "replay 1" symbols is the number of symbols between one "replay 1" symbol and one "replay 1" symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. are arranged so as to be within the range of Therefore, when winning with the index value IV=16, if one of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the other is stopped for the second time, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped. Regardless of the timing of the operation, on the main line ML1 of each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, there are symbols that enable establishment of the fifth replay prize and establishment of the sixth replay prize. The design will stop.

On the other hand, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the fifth replay winning prize, the symbol on the left reel 32L is the “watermelon” symbol, whereas the left reel 32L symbol among the symbol combination corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize is the “watermelon” symbol. Bell" pattern. Since only three "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbols do not stop on the main line ML1 on the left reel 32L depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. . On the other hand, for the “bell” symbols on the left reel 32L, the number of symbols between one “bell” symbol and one “bell” symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction is the maximum sliding number. arranged to be within range. In this configuration, in the internal state ST2, when winning is won with the index value IV=16 due to the setting of the pull-in bit, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, regarding the left reel 32L, The priority information for stopping the "watermelon" pattern on the main line ML1 has a larger value than the priority information for stopping the "bell" pattern on the main line ML1. Therefore, in the event that a win is made with the index value IV=16, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first, establishment of the fifth replay prize is given priority, and the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is set to the fifth. If the timing is such that establishment of the replay prize is not allowed, the sixth replay prize is established without fail.

In the lottery table for the internal state (FIG. 32), index values IV=13 to 16 correspond to establishment of a replay prize as described above. In this case, the probability of winning a replay prize in the internal state ST2 is approximately 1/1.6, which is higher than the probability of winning a replay prize in the normal state ST1. Thus, as already described, in the internal state ST2, the expected acquisition value of the game media per unit number of games is higher than in the normal state ST1.

The lottery table for the internal state does not set the SB hand, the first CB hand, and the second CB hand set in the lottery table for the normal state (FIG. 23). Therefore, the SB winning is not established in the internal state ST2. On the other hand, the internal state ST2 is a state in which the winning data of the 1st CB role or the winning data of the 2nd CB role are carried over to the main side RAM 74. Therefore, it is impossible to newly win the 1st CB role or the 2nd CB role in the internal state ST2. However, if the winning data of the first CB role are carried over, the first CB winning can be established, and if the winning data of the second CB role are carried over, the second CB winning can be established. When the first CB winning or the second CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state ST3. Although the details will be described later, the number of game media owned by the player does not increase in the CB state ST3. Also, when the CB state ST3 occurs, even if the CB state ST3 ends, it does not immediately shift to the internal state ST2. Since the state is carried over to the main side RAM 74, the state shifts to the internal state ST2. Therefore, when the game state shifts to the internal state ST2, the player expects that the CB prize will not be established.

A configuration for creating a situation in which CB winning is established in the internal state ST2 will be described below.

In the lottery table for the internal state, the sum of all the point values PV set for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is "65535", and this value is the winning lottery process in the main side MPU 72 (FIG. 12). It matches the maximum value of the free-running counter, which is the source of random numbers when Therefore, in the internal state ST2, a state in which no winning combination is won does not occur in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12).

In the case of winning with the index value IV=1, as already explained, regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the normal bell winning is established, and the winning is achieved with the index value IV=11. If the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop order and stop operation timing, the first cherry winning is established, and if the index value IV=12, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop order. And the second cherry winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing. Then, in the determination information buffer B that determines the priority order information of each symbol, as shown in FIG. If the given number bits (6th to 3rd bits) in which numerical information is set can establish the winning of the winning CB role, the role bit ( 2nd bit). Therefore, irrespective of the number of game media provided at the time of establishment of a prize, the priority order information of the symbols that enable the establishment of the winning of the winning minor combination is the winning of the winning CB combination. The value is greater than the priority order information of symbols that can be established. Therefore, when winning with any of the index values IV=1, 11 and 12, the winning of the winning CB combination is not established because the winning of the winning minor combination is established.

If a win is made with any of the index values IV=13 to 16, the corresponding replay prize is established regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as described above. Then, in the determination information buffer B that determines the priority order information of each symbol, as shown in FIG. is set to the replay bit (6th to 2nd bits) is a role bit (2nd bit) that is set to "1" when it is possible to establish a prize for the winning CB role has higher order bits than Therefore, the priority order information of the symbols that can establish the winning of the winning replay role is higher than the priority information of the symbols that can establish the winning of the winning CB role. a large value. Therefore, if a win is made with any of the index values IV=13 to 16, the winning of the winning CB role will not be established because the replay winning will surely be established.

When winning with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, as already explained, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the order in which the normal bell combination is treated as the winning combination, each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R, the normal bell winning is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation. As already explained, the achievement of the normal bell prize is given priority over the prize of the winning CB role.

On the other hand, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order in which the compensation bell combination is treated as the winning combination when winning is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Depending on the stop operation timing of 32M and 32R, compensation bell winning is not established. Then, if the compensation bell winning is not established, the winning of the winning CB combination is surely established. A configuration for realizing the stop control will be described in detail below.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol combination corresponding to the first CB winning fourth group win and the symbol combination corresponding to the second CB winning fourth group win, and FIG. 35 is an index value IV= It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of compensation bell combinations to be won in each of 2 to 10 and combinations of symbols corresponding to each type of compensation bell combination.

As already explained, there are a plurality of types of combinations of symbols corresponding to the 4th group win of the 1st CB prize. As shown in FIG. It can be classified into a third group. Similarly, there are a plurality of types of combinations of symbols corresponding to the 4th group winning combination of the 2nd CB prize, as already explained. It can be classified into two groups and a third group.

Regarding the left reel 32L, in both the first CB winning fourth group winning combination and the second CB winning fourth group winning combination, the first group and the second group are "Red 7" symbols, "White 7" symbols, and " BAR" symbols and "LUCKY" symbols are set completely in common as stop symbols. On the other hand, the third group for the first CB winning fourth group win has "Replay 1" and "Replay 3" symbols set as stop symbols, and the third group corresponding to the second CB winning fourth group win is A "bell" symbol is set as a stop symbol. The target symbols corresponding to the first group and the second group on the left reel 32L have the maximum number of symbols between one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. They are arranged so that they are within the range of numbers. In addition, the target symbol corresponding to the third group in the first CB winning fourth group combination on the left reel 32L is also one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. In addition, the target symbol corresponding to the third group in the 2nd CB winning 4th group combination on the left reel 32L is also a combination of one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number.

Regarding the middle reel 32M, in both the first CB winning fourth group winning combination and the second CB winning fourth group winning combination, the first group and the third group have the "Red 7" symbol, the "White 7" symbol, and the " LUCKY" symbols, "Replay 2" symbols and "Replay 3" symbols are set completely in common as stop symbols. On the other hand, the second group for the 1st CB winning 4th group role has the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay 1" symbol set as stop symbols, and the 2nd group for the 2nd CB winning 4th group role is "Cherry". A symbol and a "watermelon" symbol are set as stop symbols. The target symbols corresponding to the first group and the third group on the middle reel 32M have the maximum number of symbols between one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. They are arranged so that they are within the range of numbers. In addition, the target symbol corresponding to the second group in the fourth group combination of the first CB winning prize on the middle reel 32M is also one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. In addition, the target symbol corresponding to the second group in the fourth group combination of the second CB winning on the middle reel 32M is also one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number.

Regarding the right reel 32R, in both the first CB winning fourth group winning combination and the second CB winning fourth group winning combination, the second group and the third group have "BAR" symbols, "watermelon" symbols and "LUCKY" symbols. The symbols are set completely in common as the stop symbols. On the other hand, the 1st group for the 1st CB winning 4th group role has the "Cherry" symbol and the "Replay 1" symbol set as stop symbols, and the 1st group for the 2nd CB winning 4th group role is "Bell". The symbol is set as a stop symbol. The target symbols corresponding to the second group and the third group on the right reel 32R have the maximum number of symbols between one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. They are arranged so that they are within the range of numbers. In addition, the target symbol corresponding to the first group in the fourth group combination of the first CB winning prize on the right reel 32R is also one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number. In addition, the target symbol corresponding to the first group in the fourth group combination of the second CB winning on the right reel 32R is also one target symbol and one target symbol arranged next in the reel rotation direction. It is arranged so that the number of symbols in between is within the range of the maximum sliding number.

With the above configuration, the 4th group winning combination of the 1st CB and the 4th group combination of the 2nd CB winning combination are the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, even if any of the groups 1 to 3 are to be stopped. The corresponding combination of symbols will be stopped on the main line ML1 regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing.

Below, the combination of symbols of the 1st group in the 4th group win of the 1st CB prize and the combination of symbols of the 1st group in the 4th group win of the 2nd CB prize, and the index value IV are set to 8 to 10, respectively. The relationship between the combination of the symbols by the supplementary bell combination group and the combination of symbols will be described.

The combination of the symbols of the first group in the fourth group win of the first CB prize and the combination of the symbols of the first group in the fourth group win of the second CB prize, as shown in FIGS. 10 and the stop symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common, and the stop symbols of the right reel 32R are different. As already explained, when winning is achieved with the index value IV=8 to 10, when the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the normal bell combination is excluded from the winning combination and the supplementary bell combination group is the winning combination. treated as In addition, even if the winning data of the first CB winning combination or the winning data of the second CB winning combination is carried over to the main side RAM 74, the first to fourth group winning combinations of the first CB winning combination and the first group winning combination of the second CB winning combination The correspondence between the group wins to the 4th group wins and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is the same as in the case of the index values IV=17 and 18 in the lottery table for the normal state. That is, in the internal state ST2, regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, the first CB winning fourth group combination or the second CB winning fourth group combination is treated as a winning combination. Furthermore, in the judgment information buffer B that determines the priority order information of each symbol, as shown in FIG. The number of bits (6th to 3rd bits) in which the numerical information is set is set to "1" when it is possible to establish the winning of the winning CB role. It is set higher than (second bit).

Then, when the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time under the condition that any one of the index values IV=8 to 10 is won in the internal state ST2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M , The symbols that make it possible to establish the winning of the supplementary bell combination group that has been won and constitute the first group in the 4th group combination of the 1st CB winning combination or the 1st group in the 4th group combination of the 2nd CB winning combination (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as first group common symbols) has a higher value than the priority information of the other symbols. As already explained, symbols common to the first group are arranged on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M so as not to cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time in a situation where one of the index values IV=8 to 10 is won, the stopped symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M on the main line ML1 are It becomes the 1st group common pattern certainly. In this case, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M do not stop the symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of the first CB prize and the symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of the second CB prize. .

On the other hand, as already described, the "BAR" symbol, which is the symbol on the right reel 32R that enables the establishment of the winning of the compensation bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=8, is placed on the right reel 32R so that a so-called dropout can occur. A "watermelon" symbol, which is a symbol on the right reel 32R that enables establishment of a prize in the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=9, is arranged on the right reel 32R so that a so-called dropout can occur. The "LUCKY" symbol, which is the symbol on the right reel 32R that enables the establishment of the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=10, is arranged on the right reel 32R so that a so-called omission may occur. ing.

FIG. 36(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the range in which the compensation bell combination group corresponding to each of the index values IV=8 to 10 can be won on the right reel 32R. As shown in FIG. 36(c), the range in which symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=8 on the right reel 32R can be stopped on the main line ML1 and the index value IV on the right reel 32R are shown in FIG. =9 in the range in which the symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=9 can be stopped on the main line ML1, and the symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=10 on the right reel 32R are displayed on the main line ML1. The range in which it can be stopped is completely separated, and each symbol on the right reel 32R is included in one of the ranges. Specifically, when the stop button 44 corresponding to the right reel 32R is operated in a situation where any one of the 18th "BAR" symbol to the 14th "RED 7" symbol exists on the main line ML1. , the symbol "BAR", which is the symbol of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=8, stops on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. Further, when the stop button 44 corresponding to the right reel 32R is operated in a situation where any one of the 13th "watermelon" symbol to the 9th "white 7" symbol is present on the main line ML1, A "watermelon" symbol, which is a symbol of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=9, stops on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. In addition, in a situation where any one of the 8th "LUCKY" symbol to the 0th "Replay 1" symbol and the 20th "Cherry" symbol to the 19th "Replay 1" symbol exists on the main line ML1. When the stop button 44 corresponding to the right reel 32R is operated, the "LUCKY" symbol, which is the symbol of the compensating bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=10, stops on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. The range corresponding to index value IV=8 and the range corresponding to index value IV=9 have the same number of symbols, and the range corresponding to index value IV=10 has index value IV=8. and the range corresponding to index value IV = 9, and the number of symbols included in each range of index value IV = 8 to 10 is the same. good too.

With this configuration, when winning with any of the index values IV = 8 to 10 in the internal state ST2 and the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the stop button 44 with respect to the rotation position of the right reel 32R If the timing of the stop operation is the correct timing that enables the winning of the compensation bell combination group corresponding to the winning index value IV among the index values IV=8 to 10, the compensation bell winning is established. Establishment of CB winning is avoided. On the other hand, when the timing of the stop operation is not the correct timing, the CB prize is established without the supplementary bell prize being established.

In the internal state lottery table, the probability of winning with index value IV=8, the probability of winning with index value IV=9, and the probability of winning with index value IV=10 are all the same. Therefore, for example, in the case of winning with any of the index values IV = 8 to 10 in the internal state ST2, when the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the compensation bell winning is established and the CB winning is established. The probability that the player's prediction of the stop operation timing of the right reel 32R for avoiding the establishment of is correct is 1/3.

In the internal state ST2 in which the 1st CB combination is in a winning state, winning is made with the index value IV=8 will be taken as an example. How the establishment mode changes will be described with reference to FIGS. 37(a) to 37(h). It is basically the same when the second CB combination is won, and when the index value IV=9 or 10 is won, it is basically the same.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, when the right reel 32R, which is the target of the normal bell winning, is stopped first, the right reel 32R is stopped. Regardless of the stop operation timing, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the "bell" symbol corresponding to the normal bell winning is stopped on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. In this case, the winning that can be established on the main line ML1 is only the normal bell winning, and the normal bell winning is finally established as shown in FIGS. 37(c) and 37(d).

On the other hand, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating as shown in FIG. 37(a), when the left reel 32L, which is not the target of the normal bell winning correct answer, is stopped for the first time, the left reel Regardless of the stop operation timing of 32L, as shown in FIG. ” symbols stop on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. After that, even when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the second time, regardless of the stop operation timing of the middle reel 32M, as shown in FIG. A "red 7" symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the first group in the fourth group combination, stops on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M.

After that, if the stop operation timing of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotation position of the right reel 32R is the correct timing that enables the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=8, the timing is shown in FIG. 37(g). As shown, the "BAR" symbol corresponding to the compensation bell combination group is stopped on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. In this case, establishment of the first CB prize due to establishment of the supplementary bell prize is avoided.

On the other hand, if the stop operation timing of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotation position of the right reel 32R is not the correct timing that enables the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=8, FIG. As shown in (h), the "Cherry" symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the first group in the 4th group win of the 1st CB, stops on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. In this case, the game state shifts from the internal state ST2 to the CB state ST3 by establishing the first CB winning.

Next, the combination of the symbols of the second group in the fourth group role of the first CB prize and the combination of the symbols of the second group in the fourth group role of the second CB prize are set to the index values IV=5 to 7, respectively. The relationship with the combination of the symbols by the supplementary bell combination group will be described.

The combination of symbols of the second group in the fourth group win of the first CB prize and the combination of symbols of the second group in the fourth group win of the second CB prize, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 7, and the stop symbols of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are common, and the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M are different. As already explained, when winning is achieved with the index value IV=5 to 7, when the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the normal bell combination is excluded from the winning combination and the supplementary bell combination group is the winning combination. treated as As already explained, in the internal state ST2, the first CB winning fourth group combination or the second CB winning fourth group combination is treated as a winning combination regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. Furthermore, in the judgment information buffer B that determines the priority order information of each symbol, as shown in FIG. The number of bits (6th to 3rd bits) in which the numerical information is set is set to "1" when it is possible to establish the winning of the winning CB role. It is set higher than (second bit).

Then, when the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time under the condition that any one of the index values IV=5 to 7 is won in the internal state ST2, the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R , a pattern that makes it possible to establish the winning of the supplementary bell combination that has been won, and constitutes the second group in the 4th group combination that wins the 1st CB or the 2nd group in the 4th group combination that wins the 2nd CB (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as second group common symbols) has a higher value than the priority information of the other symbols. Further, as already explained, the symbols common to the second group are arranged on each of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R so as not to cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time in a situation where one of the index values IV=5 to 7 is won, the stopped symbols of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R on the main line ML1 are It will surely become the second group common pattern. In this case, on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, the symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the 1st CB prize and the symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the 2nd CB prize do not stop. .

On the other hand, as already explained, the middle reel 32M, which is a symbol of "red 7" which is a symbol of the middle reel 32M that enables establishment of the winning of the compensation bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=5, is set so that a so-called omission may occur. , and the "white 7" symbol and the "replay 2" symbol, which are the symbols on the middle reel 32M that enable establishment of the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=6, are so-called omissions. The "LUCKY" symbol and the "Replay 3" symbol, which are the symbols of the middle reel 32M which are arranged on the middle reel 32M so as to obtain a winning combination and which enable establishment of a winning of the supplementary bell combination corresponding to the index value IV=7, are It is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that a so-called dropout can occur.

FIG. 36(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the range in which the compensation bell combination group corresponding to each of the index values IV=5 to 7 can be won on the middle reel 32M. As shown in FIG. 36(b), the range in which symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=5 on the middle reel 32M can be stopped on the main line ML1, and the index value IV on the middle reel 32M. =6 in the range in which the symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=6 can be stopped on the main line ML1, and the symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=7 on the middle reel 32M are displayed on the main line ML1. The range that can be stopped is completely separated, and each symbol on the middle reel 32M is included in one of the ranges. Specifically, the stop button 43 corresponding to the middle reel 32M is operated in a situation where any one of the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 10th "replay 1" symbol is present on the main line ML1. In this case, the "red 7" symbol, which is the symbol of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=5, stops on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. In addition, in a situation where any of the 1st "White 7" symbol to the 0th "Bell" symbol and the 20th "Cherry" symbol to the 15th "Replay 1" symbol exists on the main line ML1. When the stop button 43 corresponding to the middle reel 32M is operated, either the "white 7" symbol or the "replay 2" symbol, which is the symbol of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=6, appears on the middle reel 32M. stop on the main line ML1 of Further, when the stop button 43 corresponding to the middle reel 32M is operated in a situation where any one of the 9th "LUCKY" symbol to the 2nd "Replay 1" symbol exists on the main line ML1, Either the "LUCKY" symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, which is the symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=7, stops on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. The range corresponding to index value IV=6 and the range corresponding to index value IV=7 have the same number of symbols, and the range corresponding to index value IV=5 has index value IV=6. and the range corresponding to index value IV = 7, and the number of symbols included in each range of index value IV = 5 to 7 is the same. good too.

With this configuration, in the internal state ST2, when a win is made with any of the index values IV=5 to 7 and the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the position of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M. If the stop operation timing is the correct timing that enables the winning of the compensation bell combination group corresponding to the winning index value IV among the index values IV=5 to 7, the compensation bell winning is established. Establishment of CB winning is avoided. On the other hand, when the stop operation timing is not the correct timing, the CB prize is established without the supplementary bell prize being established.

In the internal state lottery table, the probability of winning with index value IV=5, the probability of winning with index value IV=6, and the probability of winning with index value IV=7 are all the same. Therefore, for example, in the case of winning with any of the index values IV=5 to 7 in the internal state ST2, when the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the compensating bell prize is established and the CB prize is won. The probability that the player's prediction about the stop operation timing of the middle reel 32M for avoiding the establishment of is correct is 1/3.

In the internal state ST2 in which the 1st CB combination is in a winning state, the prize is won with the index value IV=5 as an example. How the establishment mode changes will be described with reference to FIGS. 38(a) to 38(h). It is basically the same when the second CB combination is won, and when the index value IV=6 or 7 is won, it is basically the same.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, when the middle reel 32M, which is the target of the normal bell winning, is stopped first, the middle reel 32M is stopped. Regardless of the stop operation timing, the "bell" symbol corresponding to the normal bell winning is stopped on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M as shown in FIG. 38(b). In this case, the winning that can be established on the main line ML1 is only the normal bell winning, and the normal bell winning is finally established as shown in FIGS. 38(c) and 38(d).

On the other hand, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating as shown in FIG. 38(a), when the left reel 32L, which is not the target of the normal bell winning correct answer, is stopped for the first time, the left reel Regardless of the stop operation timing of 32L, as shown in FIG. ” symbols stop on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. After that, even when the right reel 32R is stopped for the second time, regardless of the stop operation timing of the right reel 32R, as shown in FIG. A "BAR" symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the second group in the fourth group combination, stops on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R.

After that, if the stop operation timing of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M is the correct timing that enables the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=5, it is shown in FIG. 38(g). As shown, the "red 7" symbol corresponding to the supplementary bell combination group is stopped on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. In this case, establishment of the first CB prize due to establishment of the supplementary bell prize is avoided.

On the other hand, if the stop operation timing of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M is not the correct timing that enables the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=5, FIG. As shown in (h), the "bell" symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the second group in the fourth group combination of the first CB winning, stops on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. In this case, the game state shifts from the internal state ST2 to the CB state ST3 by establishing the first CB winning.

Next, the combination of the symbols of the third group in the fourth group win of the first CB prize and the combination of the symbols of the third group in the fourth group win of the second CB prize are set to the index values IV=2 to 4, respectively. The relationship with the combination of the symbols by the supplementary bell combination group will be described.

The combination of the symbols of the third group in the fourth group win of the first CB prize and the combination of the symbols of the third group in the fourth group win of the second CB prize, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 4 and the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are common, and the stop symbols of the left reel 32L are different. As already explained, if the index value IV=2 to 4 is won, and if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the normal bell combination is excluded from the winning combination, and the supplementary bell combination group is the winning combination. treated as As already explained, in the internal state ST2, the first CB winning fourth group combination or the second CB winning fourth group combination is treated as a winning combination regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. Furthermore, in the judgment information buffer B that determines the priority order information of each symbol, as shown in FIG. The number of bits (6th to 3rd bits) in which the numerical information is set is set to "1" when it is possible to establish the winning of the winning CB role. It is set higher than (second bit).

Then, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped in a situation where any of the index values IV=2 to 4 is won in the internal state ST2, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R , The pattern that enables the establishment of the winning of the supplementary bell combination group that has been won and constitutes the third group in the fourth group combination of the first CB winning combination or the third group in the fourth group combination of the second CB winning combination (hereinafter referred to as , third group common symbols) has a higher value than the priority information of the other symbols. Further, as already explained, symbols common to the third group are arranged on each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R so as not to cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time in a situation where one of the index values IV=2 to 4 is won, the stopped symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R on the main line ML1 are It will certainly be a common pattern for the third group. In this case, on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the 1st CB prize and the symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the 2nd CB prize do not stop. .

On the other hand, as already described, the left reel 32L is designed so that a so-called "red 7" symbol, which is a symbol on the left reel 32L that enables the establishment of a winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=2, may be missed. , and the symbol "white 7" and the symbol "LUCKY", which are symbols on the left reel 32L that enable establishment of winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=3, may cause a so-called omission. The "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, which is arranged on the left reel 32L as shown in FIG. are arranged on the left reel 32L.

FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the range in which the compensation bell combination group corresponding to each of the index values IV=2 to 4 can be won on the left reel 32L. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the range in which symbols of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=2 on the left reel 32L can be stopped on the main line ML1, and the index value IV on the left reel 32L. =3, and the symbol of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=4 on the main line ML1 on the left reel 32L. The range that can be stopped is completely separated, and each symbol on the left reel 32L is included in one of the ranges. Specifically, when the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L is operated in a situation where any one of the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 10th "cherry" symbol is present on the main line ML1. 2, the symbol "Red 7", which is the symbol of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=2, stops on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. In addition, any one of the 4th "White 7" symbol to the 0th "Bell" symbol and the 20th "Replay 1" symbol to the 15th "Replay 1" symbol is present on the main line ML1. When the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L is operated at , either the symbol "WHITE 7" or "LUCKY", which is the symbol of the compensating bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=3, is displayed on the left reel 32L. stop on the main line ML1 of Further, when the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L is operated in a situation where any one of the 9th "BAR" symbol to the 5th "cherry" symbol exists on the main line ML1, the index The "BAR" symbol, which is the symbol of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the value IV=4, stops on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. The range corresponding to index value IV=2 and the range corresponding to index value IV=4 have the same number of symbols, and the range corresponding to index value IV=3 has index value IV=2. and the range corresponding to index value IV = 4, and the number of symbols included in each range of index value IV = 2 to 4 is the same. good too.

With this configuration, when a win is made with any of the index values IV = 2 to 4 in the internal state ST2 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L If the timing of the stop operation is the correct timing that enables the winning of the compensation bell combination group corresponding to the winning index value IV among index values IV=2 to 4, the compensation bell winning is established. Establishment of CB winning is avoided. On the other hand, when the stop operation timing is not the correct timing, the CB prize is established without the supplementary bell prize being established.

In the internal state lottery table, the probability of winning with index value IV=2, the probability of winning with index value IV=3, and the probability of winning with index value IV=4 are all the same. Therefore, for example, in the case of winning with any of the index values IV = 2 to 4 in the internal state ST2, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the supplementary bell winning is established and the CB winning is established. The probability that the player's prediction about the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L for avoiding the establishment of is correct is 1/3.

In the internal state ST2 in which the 1st CB combination is in a winning state, the winning is made with the index value IV=2. How the establishment mode changes will be described with reference to FIGS. 39(a) to 39(h). It is basically the same when the second CB combination is won, and when the index value IV=3 or 4 is won, it is basically the same.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, when the left reel 32L, which is the target of the normal bell winning, is stopped first, the left reel 32L is stopped. Regardless of the stop operation timing, the "bell" symbol corresponding to the normal bell winning is stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L as shown in FIG. 39(b). In this case, the winning that can be established on the main line ML1 is only the normal bell winning, and the normal bell winning is finally established as shown in FIGS. 39(c) and 39(d).

On the other hand, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating as shown in FIG. Regardless of the stop operation timing of 32M, as shown in FIG. ” symbols stop on the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. After that, even when the right reel 32R is stopped for the second time, regardless of the stop operation timing of the right reel 32R, as shown in FIG. A "BAR" symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the third group in the fourth group combination, stops on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R.

After that, if the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L is the correct timing that enables the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=2, it is shown in FIG. 39(g). Thus, the "red 7" symbol corresponding to the supplementary bell combination group is stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. In this case, establishment of the first CB prize due to establishment of the compensation bell prize is avoided.

On the other hand, if the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L is not the correct timing that enables the winning of the supplementary bell combination group corresponding to the index value IV=2, FIG. As shown in (h), the "replay 1" symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the third group in the 4th group win of the 1st CB, stops on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. In this case, the game state shifts from the internal state ST2 to the CB state ST3 when the first CB winning is established.

In the internal state ST2, there is no situation where only the first CB or the second CB is won. Therefore, in the reel rotation process (FIG. 13), an affirmative determination is made in step S601 and a negative determination is made in step S602, and in step S604, the overlapping CB table is read as the offset designation table. As a result, it becomes possible to set the pull-in bit in a manner corresponding to the internal state ST2, and to preferentially cause the stop manner corresponding to the internal state ST2 to appear.

Next, a plurality of game states ST10 and ST20 included in the internal state ST2 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 22, the internal state ST2 includes a disconnected RT state ST10 and an ART state ST20. As already explained, if one of the CB roles is won in the normal state ST1 and the winning of the CB role is not established in the winning game, the game will shift to the internal state ST2. In the game, the main MPU 72 executes ART transition lottery processing. If the ART transition lottery process does not win the ART transition lottery process, the internal state ST2 becomes a lost RT state ST10, and if the ART transition lottery process wins the ART transition lottery process, the internal state ST2 becomes the ART state ST20. .

Incidentally, a plurality of types of ART transition lottery modes are set as lottery modes for determining the execution mode of the ART transition lottery process. Specifically, as the ART transition lottery mode, three types of a first ART transition lottery mode, a second ART transition lottery mode, and a third ART transition lottery mode are set. The first ART transition lottery mode has the lowest probability of winning an ART transition, specifically 50%, and the second ART transition lottery mode has the next highest probability of winning an ART transition, specifically 70%. The third ART transition lottery mode has the highest probability of winning the ART transition, specifically 90%. Promotion of the ART transition lottery mode executed by winning with any of the index values IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for normal state (Fig. 23) in the lottery process (Fig. 12) of the combination in the normal state ST1 The ART shift lottery mode, which is one step higher, is set by winning the promotion in the lottery process. Further, the promotion lottery process of the ART transition lottery mode is executed also in each game in the CB state ST3, and the ART transition lottery mode, which is one step higher, is set by winning the promotion lottery in the promotion lottery process. In addition, by winning the demotion lottery process of the ART transition lottery mode, which is executed by winning with the index value IV = 15 in the lottery table for normal state (Fig. 23), the ART transition one step lower. Lottery mode is set.

In the lost RT state ST10, the player is notified of the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a normal bell prize or a supplementary bell prize even if a win is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 10. not. In this case, the player cannot comprehend the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding establishment of CB winning. When winning with any of index values IV=2 to 10 in the out-of-order RT state ST10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the correct answer corresponding to the winning index value IV can be first stopped. Furthermore, in the second stop or the third stop, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the correct answer cannot be stopped at the correct timing corresponding to the establishment of the compensation bell winning, as already explained. Winning corresponding to the winning CB combination is established. Then, when the winning corresponding to the CB combination in the winning state is established, the internal state ST2 is ended and the state shifts to the CB state ST3. As a result, even if the winning data for any of the CB combinations is carried over to the main side RAM 74, if the ART transition lottery process executed at that time does not result in an ART transition lottery, the internal state It is possible to create an opportunity for establishing a winning of the CB role, which is an opportunity for the end of ST2.

On the other hand, even if a winner is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 10 in the out-of-RT state ST10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for the correct answer corresponding to the index value IV won If the prediction is correct, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped for the first time, and the normal bell winning can be established. In addition, even if the player's prediction for the correct target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is incorrect, the correct target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved at the correct target timing at the second stop or the third stop. If the stop operation can be performed, the compensation bell winning can be established. In other words, even if the player is in the lost RT state ST10, if the player's prediction of the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the above correct target timing is correct, the winning of the CB role that is in the winning state is possible. It is possible to avoid it and continue the disconnected RT state ST10. Even in the lost RT state ST10, the winning lottery process (FIG. 12) is executed using the lottery table for the internal state, so the probability of winning a replay becomes higher than in the normal state ST1, and the index value IV = 1, regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the normal bell prize is established and the game medium of "9" is awarded, so RT is lost. The state ST10 is more advantageous for the player than the normal state ST1. Therefore, if the lost RT state ST10 can be continued, the state advantageous to the player can be continued for a long time.

In the out-of-RT state ST10, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the same effects as those executed when a chance state ST21 described later in the ART state ST20 is started. Since the chance state ST21 is a game state that can occur when the ART state ST20 is started, immediately after the internal state ST2 is started, it is determined whether the game state has shifted to either the lost RT state ST10 or the chance state ST21. cannot be understood by the player from the execution contents of the presentation. Also, even in the out-of-RT state ST10, the probability of winning a replay prize is as high as in the ART state ST20, as already explained, and if the player wins with the index value IV=1, the normal bell prize is established. It is difficult for the player to grasp which of the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 is out of these winning modes. As a result, in the normal state ST1, when one of the CB roles is won and the winning of the won CB role is not established, and the predetermined number appears as a result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Even so, the player will play the game expecting that the transition to the ART state ST20 will occur in the subsequent game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

A situation in which the player expects whether or not the transition to the ART state ST20 has occurred occurs even in a situation in which the transition to the internal state ST2 has not occurred. This situation occurs when the SB winning combination is won in the normal state ST1 and the SB prize is not established. When the SB combination is won and the SB prize is not established, the game state shifts to the short RT state ST4. The short RT state ST4 is a game state in which the game returns to the normal state ST1 when three games are completed.

In the short RT state ST4, the lottery table for the short RT state is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12). The lottery table for the short RT state is set with index values IV=1 to 18, and the reels 32L at the types of wins set to the index values IV=1 to 18 and the index values IV=1 to 18. , 32M, and 32R and the corresponding relationship between the winning combination to be established is the same as in the case of the normal state lottery table (FIG. 23). The winning probabilities of index values IV=1 to 14 and 16 to 18 are also the same as those of the lottery table for the normal state (FIG. 23). Since the index value IV=17 is set to the first CB hand and the index value IV=18 is set to the second CB hand, a transition from the short RT state ST4 to the internal state ST2 may occur. Along with this, a transition from the short RT state ST4 to the CB state ST3 may occur.

However, the pointer value of index value IV=15 is set to "40000" instead of "8538". In this case, the replay winning probability is about 1/1.6, which is higher than in the normal state ST1 and the same or substantially the same as in the internal state ST2. Furthermore, when winning is achieved with the index value IV=1, the normal bell winning is established regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as in the case of the internal state ST2. A game medium of “9” is awarded. When the replay winning probability is set in this way, and furthermore the winning is made with the index value IV=1, the normal bell winning is established. The expected value will be higher than in the normal state ST1. However, in the short RT state ST4, the stopping mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a normal bell prize or a supplementary bell prize when winning is won with an index value IV=2 to 10 is not notified.

In the short RT state ST4, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the same effect as the effect executed when the chance state ST21 described later in the ART state ST20 is started. Also, even in the short RT state ST4, the probability of winning a replay prize is as high as in the ART state ST20, as already explained, and furthermore, if a prize is won with the index value IV=1, a normal bell prize is established. It is difficult for the player to grasp whether it is the short RT state ST4 or the chance state ST21 from these winning modes. Furthermore, in the game in which the SB role was won in the normal state ST1 but the SB prize was not established, and in the game in which the CB role was won in the normal state ST1 but the CB prize was not established, the reels 32L, The stop rolls for 32M and 32R stop results are similar. Specifically, the combination of symbols that stop on a straight predetermined line in the former stop eye and the combination of symbols that stop on a straight line different from the above-mentioned predetermined line in the latter stop eye are common. obtain. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the player expects that the transition to the ART state ST20 has occurred even in a situation in which the transition to the internal state ST2 has not occurred, thereby making the game interesting. Improvement can be achieved.

Incidentally, when the SB combination is won in the normal state ST1 and the SB prize is established, the game shifts to the SB state ST5. Also, when the SB winning combination is won in the short RT state ST4 and the SB prize is established, the state is shifted to the SB state ST5. As already explained, the SB state ST5 is a gaming state in which only one game is continued, and in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12), the lottery table for the SB state is referred to, so that the 1st to 27th compensation bell winnings are simultaneously won. state, and the supplementary bell prize is established with certainty. When a shift to the SB state ST5 occurs in the normal state ST1, the SB state ST5 ends, thereby returning to the normal state ST1. Further, when a shift to the SB state ST5 occurs in the short RT state ST4, the ST state ST5 ends, thereby returning to the short RT state ST4. When a shift to the ST state ST5 occurs in the short RT state ST4, the number of games played in the ST state ST5 is also treated as the number of games played in the short RT state ST4. In addition, even if the SB role is won in the short RT state ST4 and the SB prize is not established, the remaining number of games played in the short RT state ST4 is not set to "3" again. is decremented by 1, but it is not limited to this, and the number of games played may be reset.

Returning to the description of the internal state ST2, in the situation where the continuation condition of the ART state ST20 is satisfied in the ART state ST20, as already explained, if the winning is made with any of the index values IV = 2 to 10, The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the correct answer are reported to the player. Then, when the notified correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped for the first time, the normal bell prize is established, and the game medium of "9" is provided to the player. As a result, in the ART state ST20, it is possible to increase the expected value of winning game media per unit number of games, and CB winning is established when a winning is made with any of the index values IV = 2 to 10. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the correct answer cannot be brought to the first stop due to an operation error, the reels 32L, 32M targeted for the correct answer cannot be stopped at the timing before the timing at which the second stop becomes possible. , 32R on the main line ML1 so that the player can recognize the timing of the correct answer target for stopping the symbols corresponding to the compensation bell winning. Then, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the correct answer can be stopped at the timing targeted for the correct answer, the compensation bell prize is established. As a result, it is possible to prevent the establishment of a CB prize when a prize is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 10.

The ART state ST20 includes a chance state ST21, a base state ST22, a first special state ST23, and a second special state ST24. The chance state ST21 is a game state that occurs when a transition to the chance state ST21 is selected in the ART transition lottery process executed when the transition from the normal state ST1 to the internal state ST2 occurs. That is, the chance state ST21 is a game state that can occur when the ART state ST2 is started. Further, when the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22 becomes "0", the game also shifts to the chance state ST21.

When a new transition to the chance state ST21 occurs in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, 20 games are set as the number of games that can be continued. The number of games that can be continued is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed in the chance state ST21. If the number of games that can be continued in the chance state ST21 becomes "0", the conditions for continuing the ART state ST20 are not satisfied, and if the winning is made with any of the index values IV = 2 to 10, the correct answer is obtained. Both the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the correct target timing are not reported. In this situation, when winning is achieved with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, there is a high possibility that the CB winning will be established without establishing both the normal bell winning and the supplementary bell winning. Then, when the CB prize is established, the ART state ST20 ends and shifts to the CB state ST3.

In the chance state ST21, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 indicate the short RT state ST4 and the disconnection for five games after the new transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs. A common effect is executed in the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21. As a result, it is possible to play the game while making the player expect that the chance state ST21 will occur when the common effect is executed. After that, when the 5 games have been completed, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect corresponding to the chance state ST21, and the image display device 63 indicates that the chance state ST21. is displayed to the player. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the chance state ST21. Further, the image display device 63 displays the number of games that can be continued at that point in the chance state ST21. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the end condition of the chance state ST21.

In the chance state ST21, by winning with any of the index values IV=11 to 14, 16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 32) in the role lottery process (FIG. 12), the transition to the base state ST22 is made. Lottery processing is executed. Then, the game state shifts from the chance state ST21 to the base state ST22 by winning the transition in the transition lottery process.

The base state ST22 is a gaming state that occurs when a transition lottery process results in a winning transition in the chance state ST21 as described above. In addition, it is a game state that occurs when a transition to the base state ST22 is selected in the ART transition lottery process executed when a transition from the normal state ST1 to the internal state ST2 occurs. That is, the base state ST22 is a game state that can occur when the ART state ST2 is started. Also, when the number of games that can be continued in the first special state ST23 becomes "0", the base state ST22 is entered, and when the number of games that can be continued in the second special state ST24 becomes "0", the base It shifts to state ST22.

When a new transition to the base state ST22 occurs, 50 games are set as the number of games that can be continued. The number of games that can be continued is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed in the base state ST22. When the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22 becomes "0", the game shifts to the chance state ST21, and 20 games are set as the number of games that can be continued in the chance state ST21.

In the base state ST22, an effect corresponding to the base state ST22 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, and the image display device 63 enables the player to recognize that the base state ST22 is set. image is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that it is in the base state ST22. Further, the image display device 63 displays the number of games that can be continued at that time in the base state ST22. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the termination condition of the base state ST22.

In the base state ST22, by winning with any of the index values IV=11 to 14 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 32) in the role lottery process (FIG. 12), the transition to the second special state ST24 is made. Lottery processing is executed. Then, the game state shifts from the base state ST22 to the second special state ST24 by winning the special transition in the transition lottery process. Also, in the base state ST22, the special notification lottery process is executed by winning with the index value IV=16 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 32) in the combination lottery process (FIG. 12). The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the fifth replay winning prize or the sixth replay winning prize by special notification winning in the special notification lottery processing is executed. Then, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the notified stop order and the fifth replay winning prize or the sixth replay winning prize is established, the game state shifts from the base state ST22 to the second special state ST24.

A plurality of types of special transition lottery modes are set in the base state ST22. Specifically, as the special transition lottery mode, three types of a first special transition lottery mode, a second special transition lottery mode, and a third special transition lottery mode are set. The first special transition lottery mode has the lowest probability of special transition winning and special notification winning, the second special transition lottery mode has the next highest probability of special transition winning and special notification winning, The 3 special transition lottery mode has the highest probability of special transition winning and special notification winning. In the situation of the base state ST22, if the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22 is 40 games or more, the index value IV= in the lottery table for the internal state (FIG. 32) in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12). Promotion lottery processing of the special shift lottery mode is executed by winning any one of 11 to 14. Then, the special transition lottery mode, which is one step higher, is set by winning promotion in the promotion lottery process of the special transition lottery mode that is executed. Also, in each game in the second special state ST24, the promotion lottery process of the special transition lottery mode is executed, and the special transition lottery mode, which is one level higher, is set by winning the promotion lottery in the promotion lottery process. When transitioning from the normal state ST1 to the ART state ST20 results in the chance state ST21 and then the base state ST22, and when transitioning from the normal state ST1 to the ART state ST20 results in the base state ST22, the first special It is set to transition lottery mode. The first special transition lottery mode is also set when shifting from the base state ST22 to the second special state ST24.

The first special state ST23 occurs when a transition to the first special state ST23 is selected in the ART transition lottery process executed when transitioning from the normal state ST1 to the internal state ST2. Further, there is no condition for transition to the first special state ST23 other than the condition that the transition to the first special state ST23 is won in the ART transition lottery process. In other words, the first special state ST23 is a game state that is shifted to only when any winning CB combination is not established in the game in which any CB combination is won in the normal state ST1.

When a new transition to the first special state ST23 occurs, 300 games are set as the number of games that can be continued. The number of games that can be continued is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed in the first special state ST23. When the number of games that can be continued in the first special state ST23 becomes "0", the state returns to the base state ST22. In this case, 50 games are reset as the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22. Further, when the first special state ST23 ends, the third special transition lottery mode is set as the special transition lottery mode.

In the first special state ST23, an effect corresponding to the first special state ST23 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, and the image display device 63 indicates that the first special state ST23. An image is displayed that allows the player to recognize it. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the game is in the first special state ST23. Further, the image display device 63 displays the number of games that can be continued at that time in the first special state ST23. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the termination condition of the first special state ST23.

The second special state ST24 is a gaming state that occurs when a special transition win is won in the transition lottery process executed in the base state ST22, or when a fifth replay prize or a sixth replay prize is established in the base state ST22. be. When a new transition to the second special state ST24 occurs, 50 games are set as the number of games that can be continued. The number of games that can be continued is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed in the second special state ST24. When the number of games that can be continued in the second special state ST24 becomes "0", the state returns to the base state ST22. In this case, 50 games are reset as the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22. Further, when the second special state ST24 is newly started, the first special transition lottery mode is set as the special transition lottery mode, and the special transition lottery mode is promoted in each game in the second special state ST24 as already explained. Lottery processing is executed. Then, when the second special state ST24 ends and returns to the base state ST22, the special transition lottery mode set at that timing is set as it is in the base state ST22.

In the second special state ST24, an effect corresponding to the second special state ST24 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, and the image display device 63 indicates that the second special state ST24. An image is displayed that allows the player to recognize it. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the game is in the second special state ST24. Further, the image display device 63 displays the number of games that can be continued at that time in the second special state ST24. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the conditions for ending the second special state ST24.

<CB state ST3>
Next, the CB state ST3 will be explained. The CB state ST3 occurs when one of the CB roles is won in the normal state ST1 or the short RT state ST4 and the winning of the CB role in the winning state is established in the winning game. Also, when a winning of a CB combination is established in which winning data is carried over to the main side RAM 74 in the internal state ST2, the CB state ST3 also occurs. As already explained, the first CB win and the second CB win are set as the CB win, and the first CB win corresponding to the first CB win and the second CB win corresponding to the second CB win are set. The same CB state ST3 occurs regardless of whether the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established.

The CB state ST3 is a game state in which 5 games are continued as already explained. Also, in the CB state ST3, as already explained, unlike other gaming states, both the number of game media required to start one game and the number of game media that can be betted to start one game are "2". , and in each game, the first main line ML2 and the second main line ML3 are the winning target lines. In addition, in the CB state ST3, the lottery table for the CB state is referred to in the combination lottery process (FIG. 12), so that the normal bell combination, the 1st to 27th supplementary bell combinations, the 1st cherry combination and the 2nd cherry combination are obtained. are all elected at the same time. In each game, one of the minor wins is surely established, and the number of given game media is "2" even if any of the minor wins is established. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not increase or decrease in each game in the CB state ST3.

In the CB state ST3, an effect corresponding to the CB state ST3 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, and the image display device 63 enables the player to recognize that the CB state ST3 is reached. image is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that he is in the CB state ST3. Further, the image display device 63 displays the number of games that can be continued at that time in the CB state ST3. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the end condition of the CB state ST3.

In each game in the CB state ST3, promotion lottery processing in the ART transition lottery mode is executed as already described. As a result, in each game in the CB state ST3, the player plays the game in anticipation of winning a promotion in the promotion lottery process, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

<RT state ST6 after CB>
Next, the post-CB RT state ST6 will be described. Post-CB RT state ST6 is guaranteed to occur when CB state ST3 ends. In the post-CB RT state ST6, the lottery table for post-CB RT is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72 . FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for RT after CB, and FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established. . Note that FIG. 40 is a lottery table for post-CB RT in the case of "setting 3". And the types of wins set for each index value IV are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the types of hands set for index values IV=1 to 12, the winning probabilities for index values IV=1 to 12, and the winning probabilities for index values IV=1 to 12 The correspondence between the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established is the same as in the lottery table for the normal state (FIG. 23). However, in the post-CB RT state ST6, when winning with the index value IV=1, as in the internal state ST2, regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the normal Bell Award is established. When the normal bell win is established, the number of given game media is "9", which is larger than the given number of game media "1" when the supplementary bell win is established. As a result, in the post-CB RT state ST6, it is possible to increase the expected acquisition value of game media per unit number of games more than in the normal state ST1.

As shown in FIG. 40, the first relief replay combination and the first replay combination are set for the index value IV=13. When winning with index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 41, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first relief replay combination and the first replay combination are treated as winning combinations, and the first stop is treated as the winning combination. If it is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first replay combination is treated as the winning combination.

The stop symbol on the left reel 32L that enables establishment of the first relief replay winning prize is only the "Red 7" symbol. Since only one "red 7" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L, a so-called dropout occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. In addition, the "bell" symbol that enables the establishment of the first relief replay winning on each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R consists of one symbol that can establish a winning and one symbol that is arranged next to the rotating direction of the reel. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, if the establishment of the first remedial replay winning prize is prioritized, regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M, the main line ML1 of the middle reel 32M. The symbol enabling establishment of the first relief replay prize is stopped, and the stop operation timing of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotation position of the right reel 32R is any timing on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R. The symbol that enables establishment of the first relief replay prize is stopped.

On the other hand, on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the symbols that enable the establishment of the first replay prize are, as already explained, one symbol that can establish a prize and one symbol that is arranged next in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, if establishment of the first replay prize is prioritized, the first replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the above configuration, in the RT state ST6 after CB, when the winning bit is set with the index value IV=13 and the left reel 32L is first stopped, the main line The priority order information for stopping the "red 7" pattern on the ML1 has a larger value than the priority order information for stopping the pattern corresponding to the first replay winning prize on the main line ML1. Therefore, when the win is made with the index value IV=13 and the left reel 32L is first stopped, establishment of the first relief replay prize is given priority, and the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is on the main line ML1. When the timing is such that the symbol corresponding to the first relief replay winning is not allowed to be stopped, the first replay winning is surely established. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the first replay win is established without fail.

As shown in FIG. 40, the second relief replay combination and the first replay combination are set for the index value IV=14. In the case of winning with the index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 41, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second relief replay combination and the first replay combination are treated as winning combinations, and the first stop is treated as the winning combination. If it is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first replay combination is treated as the winning combination.

The stop symbol on the left reel 32L that enables establishment of the second relief replay winning prize is only the "White 7" symbol. Since only one "white 7" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L, a so-called dropout occurs depending on the stop operation timing of the stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L. In addition, the "bell" symbol that enables the establishment of the second relief replay winning on each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R consists of one winning establishment possible symbol and one placed next in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, if the establishment of the second relief replay winning a prize is prioritized, regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the stop button 43 with respect to the rotation position of the middle reel 32M, the The symbol enabling establishment of the second relief replay prize is stopped, and the stop button 44 is stopped on the main line ML1 of the right reel 32R regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the stop button 44 with respect to the rotation position of the right reel 32R. The symbols enabling establishment of the second relief replay prize are stopped.

On the other hand, on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, the symbols that enable the establishment of the first replay prize are, as already explained, one symbol that can establish the prize and one symbol that is arranged next in the reel rotation direction. The symbols are arranged so that the number of symbols between the winning symbols is within the range of the maximum sliding number. Therefore, if establishment of the first replay prize is given priority, the first replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stopping order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the above configuration, in the post-CB RT state ST6, if the winning bit is set with the index value IV=14 and the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the main line The priority order information for stopping the "white 7" pattern on the ML1 has a larger value than the priority order information for stopping the pattern corresponding to the first replay winning prize on the main line ML1. Therefore, when the win is won with the index value IV=14, if the left reel 32L is first stopped, establishment of the second relief replay prize is given priority, and the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is on the main line ML1. When the timing is such that the symbol corresponding to the second relief replay winning is not allowed to be stopped, the first replay winning is surely established. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the first replay win is surely established.

In the lottery table for RT after CB, index values IV=13 to 14 correspond to establishment of a replay winning prize. In this case, the probability of winning a replay prize in the post-CB RT state ST6 is about 1/7.7, which is the same as in the normal state ST1. It should be noted that the probability of winning a replay prize in the post-CB RT state ST6 is not limited to the same configuration as in the normal state ST1. Both probabilities may be substantially the same.

As shown in FIG. 40, the index value IV=15 is set for the first CB hand, and the index value IV=16 is set for the second CB hand. The correspondence relationship between the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning combination at index value IV=15 is the same as in the case of index value IV=17 in the lottery table for normal state (FIG. 23). The correspondence relationship between the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established at IV=16 is the same as in the case of index value IV=18 in the lottery table for normal state (FIG. 23). Also, the winning probability of index value IV=15 in RT state ST6 after CB and the winning probability of index value IV=17 in normal state ST1 are the same, and the winning probability of index value IV=16 in RT state ST6 after CB is the same. It is the same as the winning probability of the index value IV=18 in the normal state ST1. When the first CB or second CB win is won in the post-CB RT state ST6, the same stop control as when the first CB or second CB win is won in the normal state ST1 is executed. Therefore, if the first CB combination or the second CB combination is won in the post-CB RT state ST6, a situation may arise in which the winning of the CB combination that is in the winning state is not established. In this case, when the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established, the game shifts to the CB state ST3. On the other hand, when the winning of the winning CB combination is not established, the game state shifts from the post-CB RT state ST6 to the internal state ST2.

Here, even in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied in the ART state ST20, as already explained, any one of the index values IV=2 to 10 in the lottery table for the internal state (FIG. 32) is won and the normal level is won. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in such a manner that neither the prize winning nor the compensation bell winning can be established, the CB prize is established, and the ART state ST20 ends in the middle. It shifts to the CB state ST3. In this case, if the profit that should have been originally obtained in the ART state ST20 is not given to the player as it is, it would be cruel to the player.

Therefore, in any of the base state ST22, the first special state ST23, and the second special state ST24, or in the state where the number of games that can be continued in the chance state ST21 is 1 or more, the transition from the ART state ST20 to the CB state ST3 is made. In the case of the halfway end state of the ART generated, when any CB combination is won in the post-CB RT state ST6, a notification is made to urge avoidance of winning of the winning CB combination. For example, when the first CB combination is won, a notification saying "Aim for LUCKY by pushing backwards!" is executed. In this case, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop, and the 4th "white 7" symbol to the 0th "cherry" symbol and the 20th "replay 1" symbol to the 15th "replay 1" symbol on the left reel 32L. By operating the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L when the symbol exists on the main line ML1, the first CB winning can be avoided. Also, for example, when the second CB combination is won, a notification saying "Aim for BAR with reverse push!!" is executed. In this case, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop, and the left reel 32L corresponds to the situation where the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 5th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are present on the main line ML1. By operating the stop button 42, it is possible to avoid establishment of the second CB winning.

If any CB role is won in RT state ST6 after CB in the halfway end state of ART and the winning of the CB role is not established, and the game shifts to ART state ST20, the gaming situation of the previous ART state ST20. will return to In other words, when the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the middle of the chance state ST21 in the previous ART state ST20, the number of games that can be continued is returned in the middle of the chance state ST21, and in the previous ART state ST20, the base state ST22. When the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the middle of , the game returns from the number of games that can be continued in the middle in the base state ST22, and in the immediately preceding ART state ST20, the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the middle of the first special state ST23. occurs, the game returns from the number of games that can be continued in the middle in the first special state ST23. In the 2 special state ST24, the game is returned from the number of games that can be continued. As a result, it is possible to return to the ART state ST20, which has ended in the middle.

On the other hand, in the state where the ART is not in the mid-term end state, in the post-CB RT state ST6, if any CB combination is won and the winning of the CB combination is not established, the state shifts to the ART state ST20, the normal state ST1 ART transition lottery processing is executed in the same manner as in the case of transition from to internal state ST2. Then, in the ART transition lottery process, when any of the transition winning to the chance state ST21, the base state ST22, or the first special state ST23 is won, the game state corresponding to the transition winning in the ART state ST20 is entered. Transition. When the ART transition lottery process fails to transition to the ART state ST20, the state shifts to the lost RT state ST10.

As described above, in the post-CB RT state ST6, if a win is made with an index value of IV=13, the first relief replay combination and the first replay combination will be the winning combination, and if a win is made with an index value of IV=14. , the winning combination is the second relief replay combination and the first replay combination. In this case, if the index value IV=13 or 14 is won in the state where the ART is in the middle end state and the RT state ST6 after CB, the establishment of the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established. Prompting notification is executed. For example, when the index value IV=13 and the winning is won, the image display device 63 issues a notification saying "Aim for red 7 by pressing forward!". In this case, the left reel 32L is first stopped, and the left reel 32L corresponds to the situation where the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 10th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are present on the main line ML1. By operating the stop button 42, the first relief replay winning can be established. Further, for example, when the index value IV=14 and the winning is won, the image display device 63 issues a notification saying "Aim for White 7 by pressing forward!". In this case, the left reel 32L is first stopped, and the left reel 32L corresponds to the situation where the 4th "white 7" symbol to the 0th "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L are present on the main line ML1. By operating the stop button 42, the second relief replay winning can be established.

On the other hand, if the index value IV = 13 or 14 is won in the state where the ART is not in the middle end state and the RT state ST6 after CB, the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established. is not executed. Instead, a notification is made to the effect that the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize can be established. For example, the notification "Chance to win a relief replay prize!!" is executed. In this case, the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, and if the left reel 32L is stopped at the stop operation timing that enables the winning of the winning remedy replay combination, the first relief replay win or the first relief replay win. 2 Remedial replay winning can be established. Incidentally, since the probability of winning with index value IV=13 and the probability of winning with index value IV=14 in the lottery table for RT after CB (FIG. 40) are the same, The probability that the player's prediction for the formation of a relief replay win is correct is 1/2.

When the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established in the post-CB RT state ST6, the game state shifts to the relief RT state ST7 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the first replay winning is established in the post-CB RT state ST6, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1 as shown in FIG. That is, in the post-CB RT state ST6, if the winning is made with the index value IV=13 or 14, the first replay winning prize is established without fail if the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize cannot be established. Thus, when the first replay winning is established, the game state surely shifts to the normal state ST1. It should be noted that even if the ART is in the mid-term end state, when the transition to the normal state ST1 occurs, the various counters of the main side RAM 74 used in the ART state ST20 are cleared, so that the ART is in the mid-term end state. There is no state.

<Relief RT state ST7>
Next, the relief RT state ST7 will be described. The relief RT state ST7 occurs when the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established in the post-CB RT state ST6 as described above. In the case of the relief RT state ST7, the lottery table for relief RT is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72 . FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for relief RT, and FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established. Note that FIG. 42 is a lottery table for relief RT in the case of "Setting 3", and although the point value PV set for each index value IV is different for other setting values, the number of index values IV and The types of wins set for each index value IV are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the types of wins set for the index values IV=1 to 16, the winning probabilities for the index values IV=1 to 14 and 16, and the index values IV=1 to The relationship between the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in 16 and the combination to be established is the same as in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 32). Further, in the rescue RT state ST7, when winning with the index value IV=1, as in the internal state ST2, regardless of the stop order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the normal level is determined. Award is established. When the normal bell win is established, the number of given game media is "9", which is larger than the given number of game media "1" when the supplementary bell win is established. As a result, in the relief RT state ST7, it is possible to increase the expected value of acquisition of game media per unit number of games more than in the normal state ST1.

As shown in FIG. 42, the first replay combination is set for the index value IV=15 as in the lottery table for the internal state (FIG. 32). Also, as shown in FIG. 43, when the winning is made with the index value IV=15, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in any order as in the case of the internal state ST2. Only one replay combination is treated as a winning combination. However, as shown in FIG. 42, the point value PV set to index value IV=15 is "40555", and this value is the point value of index value IV=15 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 32). It is a slightly smaller value than (“41755”). In the rescue RT lottery table (FIG. 42), index values IV=13 to 16 correspond to establishment of a replay prize in the same way as in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 32). It is about 1/1.6, which is substantially the same as the internal state ST2. That is, in the rescue RT state ST7, the probability of winning a replay prize is higher than in the post-CB RT state ST6, and the expected value of acquisition of game media per unit game number is higher than in the post-CB RT state ST6.

Here, when the rescue RT state ST7 is reached in the halfway end state of the ART, the state is changed to the ART state ST20 even if it is not the internal state ST2, and the game state of the previous ART state ST20 is restored. That is, the ART state ST20 is set not only in the internal state ST2 but also in the relief RT state ST7, and the content of the ART state ST20 is the same in both the internal state ST2 and the relief RT state ST7. Then, in the state in which the ART is halfway finished, it becomes the relief RT state ST7, and when the game state of the immediately preceding ART state ST20 is restored, and in the case of the transition to the CB state ST3 in the middle of the chance state ST21 in the immediately preceding ART state ST20. In the chance state ST21, it returns from the number of games that can be continued in the middle, and if the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the middle of the base state ST22 in the previous ART state ST20, the number of games that can be continued in the middle is in the base state ST22. If a transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the middle of the first special state ST23 in the previous ART state ST20, the game returns from the number of games that can be continued in the middle in the first special state ST23, and returns to the previous ART. In the state ST20, if the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the middle of the second special state ST24, the game returns from the number of games that can be continued in the middle of the second special state ST24. As a result, it is possible to return to the ART state ST20, which has ended in the middle. Therefore, even if a CB prize is established due to an operation error or the like in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, and the ART state ST20 ends in the middle of the state and shifts to the CB state ST3, it is possible to proceed to the CB state ST3. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to obtain a profit from the ART state ST20 of the state of . In addition, even if the winning data of the CB combination are not carried over, the game situation of the previous ART state ST20 is restored by returning to the game situation of the previous ART state ST20 by entering the relief RT state ST7, so that the game situation of the previous ART state ST20 can be reached early. can be restored.

On the other hand, if the ART is not in the half-finished state and the state is shifted to the relief RT state ST7, the state becomes the chance state ST21. However, in this chance state ST21, the number of games that can be continued is set to "0". Therefore, in the chance state ST21, if a win is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 10 in the lottery table for relief RT (FIG. 42), the reel enables establishment of a normal bell prize or a supplementary bell prize. The stop mode of 32L, 32M and 32R is not reported to the player. In this case, if the player cannot establish the normal bell winning or the supplementary bell winning by himself/herself, the combination of symbols when the bell comes off is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of falling off the bell is stopped and displayed, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1, and various counters of the main side RAM 74 used in the ART state ST20 are cleared, thereby ART. is not in the half-finished state.

However, even in the chance state ST21 in which the number of games that can be continued is set to "0", the conditions for shifting to the base state ST22 are established before the combination of symbols when the bell comes off is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. As a result, a transition to the base state ST22 occurs, and "50" is set as the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22. In this case, the continuation condition of the ART state ST20 is satisfied, and when the chance state ST21 is entered after the base state ST22 is ended, "20" is set as the number of games that can be continued in the chance state ST21. As a result, even if a transition to the ART state ST20 occurs in the relief RT state ST7 in a state that is not the half-finished state of the ART, the ART state ST20 can be continued for a long number of games thereafter. becomes.

In the case of the relief RT state ST7 and the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, if the index value IV is any of 2 to 10 and the prize is won, it is possible to establish a normal bell prize. The order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is notified to the player. Even in this case, if neither the normal bell winning nor the supplementary bell winning can be realized due to an operation error or the like, the combination of symbols at the time of the bell coming off is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1. Then, when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the bell comes off, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1, and the various counters of the main side RAM 74 used in the ART state ST20 are cleared, so that the ART is activated. It will be in a state that is not in the halfway end state.

As shown in FIG. 42, the index value IV=17 is set for the first CB hand, and the index value IV=18 is set for the second CB hand. The correspondence between the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning combination at index value IV=17 is the same as in the case of index value IV=17 in the lottery table for normal state (FIG. 23). The correspondence between the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination to be established at IV=18 is the same as in the case of index value IV=18 in the lottery table for normal state (FIG. 23). The winning probability of index value IV=17 in rescue RT state ST7 and the winning probability of index value IV=17 in normal state ST1 are the same, and the winning probability of index value IV=18 in rescue RT state ST7 and the normal state are the same. It is the same as the winning probability of the index value IV=18 in ST1. Then, when the first CB or second CB combination is won in the relief RT state ST7, the same stop control as when the first CB or second CB combination is won in the normal state ST1 is executed. Therefore, when the first CB combination or the second CB combination is won in the relief RT state ST7, a situation may occur in which the winning of the CB combination in the winning state is not established. In this case, when the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established, the game shifts to the CB state ST3. On the other hand, if the winning of the winning CB combination is not established, the game state shifts from the relief RT state ST7 to the internal state ST2 to the ART state ST20.

In this case, the ART state ST20 (the base state ST22, the first special state ST23, or the second special state ST24) in which the continuation condition is established in the relief RT state ST7, or when the value of the chance continuation counter is 1 or more), the gaming situation in the ART state ST20 in the relief RT state ST7 is taken over as it is in the ART state ST20 in the internal state ST2. On the other hand, the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied in the relief RT state ST7 (neither of the base state ST22, the first special state ST23, nor the second special state ST24, and the value of the chance continuation counter is "0") If there is), the ART transition lottery process is executed in the same manner as in the case of transition from the normal state ST1 to the internal state ST2. Then, in the ART transition lottery process, when any of the transition winning to the chance state ST21, the base state ST22, or the first special state ST23 is won, the game state corresponding to the transition winning is the ART state ST20. Transition. If the ART transition lottery process fails to transition to the ART state ST20, the state shifts to the lost RT state ST10.

If any CB combination is won in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied in the relief RT state ST7, a notification is made to urge the avoidance of winning of the winning CB combination. . For example, when the first CB combination is won, a notification saying "Aim for LUCKY by pushing backwards!" is executed. In this case, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop, and the 4th "white 7" symbol to the 0th "cherry" symbol and the 20th "replay 1" symbol to the 15th "replay 1" symbol on the left reel 32L. By operating the stop button 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L when the symbol exists on the main line ML1, the first CB winning can be avoided. Also, for example, when the second CB combination is won, a notification saying "Aim for BAR with reverse push!!" is executed. In this case, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop, and the left reel 32L corresponds to the situation where the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 5th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are present on the main line ML1. By operating the stop button 42, it is possible to avoid establishment of the second CB winning. Even if one of the CB wins is won in the ART state ST20 in which the condition for continuation is not established in the relief RT state ST7, the above-mentioned notification prompting the avoidance of winning of the CB win is executed. Only the notification indicating that the CB win has been won is carried out in a manner that does not specify the type of the CB win that has been won.

Incidentally, in the relief RT state ST7, the number of games that can be continued is set to "1000". In the rescue RT state ST7, when 1000 games are completed without transition to the normal state ST1, internal state ST2 and CB state ST3, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1.

<Processing configuration for controlling the progress of each game state>
Next, the processing configuration executed by the main MPU 72 for controlling the progress of each game state will be described. First, the handling process at the end of the game executed in step S311 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

If the current game is in the SB state ST5 (step S1501: YES), SB end processing is executed (step S1502). In the SB termination process, the SB state flag provided in the state flag storage area 105 (see FIG. 7) of the work area 74a for specific control (to be described later) in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". The state flag storage area 105 is provided with state flags corresponding to game states on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, a normal state flag corresponding to the normal state ST1, an internal state flag corresponding to the internal state ST2, a CB state flag corresponding to the CB state ST3, and a short RT state flag corresponding to the short RT state ST4. , an SB state flag corresponding to the SB state ST5, a post-CB RT state flag corresponding to the post-CB RT state ST6, and a relief RT state flag corresponding to the relief RT state ST7. When a transition to a predetermined game state occurs among the game states ST1 to ST7, the flag corresponding to the predetermined game state among the state flags provided in the state flag storage area 105 is set to "1". When the predetermined game state ends, among the state flags provided in the state flag storage area 105, the flag corresponding to the predetermined game state is cleared to "0". The main side MPU 72 grasps the current game states ST1 to ST7 by confirming each state flag in the state flag storage area 105 . In addition, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12), based on the setting state of the data in the state flag storage area 105, the lottery table corresponding to the current game states ST1 to ST7 is read out from the main side ROM73. Incidentally, a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is provided with an ART state counter 106 (see FIG. 7). Based on the value of the ART state counter 106, if it is in the internal state ST2, the main MPU 72 specifies which of the out RT state ST10 and the ART state ST20 it stays in, and the ART state ST20. , the main MPU 72 specifies which one of the chance state ST21, the base state ST22, the first special state ST23, and the second special state ST24.

In the above configuration, the SB state ST5 is ended by clearing the SB state flag to "0" in the SB end processing. Further, when the SB state ST5 ends, the player returns to the game state in which the player stayed before the transition to the ST state ST5, out of the normal state ST1 and the short RT state ST4, but returns to the ST state ST5. Since the state flag corresponding to the game state staying at that time is maintained as it is at the time of transition to , the SB state flag is cleared to "0" in the SB end processing, and the transition to the ST state ST5 occurs. It will return to the game state in which it stayed before.

When the SB role is won in the current game and the SB prize is established (steps S1503 and S1504: YES), SB setting processing is executed (step S1505). In the SB setting process, the SB state flag in the state flag storage area 105 is set to "1". As a result, the game state becomes the SB state ST5.

On the other hand, if the SB role is won in the current game and the SB prize is not established (step S1503: YES, step S1504: NO), the current gaming state is not the short RT state ST4. (Step S1506: NO), short RT setting processing is executed (step S1507). In the short RT setting process, the normal state flag in the state flag storage area 105 is cleared to "0" and the short RT state flag is set to "1". In addition, in the short RT setting process, the initial continuation of the short RT state ST4 is set in the short RT counter of the number of continuable games area 107 (see FIG. 7) provided in the later-described work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74. Set "3" corresponding to the number of games. As a result, the gaming state becomes the short RT state ST4.

If the current game is in the short RT state ST4 (step S1508: YES), short RT processing is executed (step S1509). In the process for short RT, the progress of the short RT state ST4 is managed, and when the conditions for terminating the short RT state ST4 are satisfied, a process for terminating the short RT state ST4 is executed, the details of which will be described later. .

If the current game is in the CB state ST3 (step S1510: YES), CB processing is executed (step S1511). In the CB processing, the progress of the CB state ST3 is managed, and processing for terminating the CB state ST3 is executed when the conditions for terminating the CB state ST3 are satisfied, although the details will be described later.

If the current game is in the ART state ST20 and no CB winning has been established in the current game (step S1512: YES), ART state processing is executed (step S1513). In the ART state processing, although details will be described later, processing for managing the progress of the ART state ST20 is executed.

If one of the CB roles is won in the game this time and the winning of the winning CB role is not established (step S1514: YES, step S1515: NO, step S1516: YES), shift to ART Determination processing is executed (step S1517). In the ART shift determination process, a process for shifting the game state to the internal state ST2 is executed, the details of which will be described later.

When the first CB winning or the second CB winning is established in the current game (step S1514 and step S1515: YES), CB setting processing is executed (step S1518). In the CB setting process, a process for shifting the gaming state to the CB state ST3 is executed, the details of which will be described later.

If the winning data for the CB combination is not set in the main RAM 74 (step S1514: NO), CB post-processing is executed (step S1519). In the CB post-processing, the progress of the post-CB RT state ST6 and the relief RT state ST7 is managed, and if the termination condition of the post-CB RT state ST6 or the relief RT state ST7 is satisfied, the details will be described later. A process for ending the game state for which the end condition is satisfied is executed.

In the corresponding processing at the end of the game, other processing is executed in step S1520. In the other processing, for example, in the normal state ST1, if any of the index values IV=11 to 14 in the normal state lottery table (FIG. 23) is won in the winning lottery processing (FIG. 12), , the promotion lottery process of the ART transition lottery mode is executed. Then, when winning the promotion in the promotion lottery process, the ART shift lottery mode, which is one step higher, is set. Further, in other processing, when the index value IV=15 in the normal state lottery table (FIG. 23) is won, the demotion lottery process of the ART shift lottery mode is executed. Then, when the demotion lottery process results in a demotion lottery, the ART shift lottery mode, which is one step lower, is set.

In the corresponding processing at the end of the game, in step S1521, a game end command is set as an object to be transmitted to the effect side MPU82. The game end command is a command for making the effect side MPU 82 recognize that one game has ended. When the transition of the game state occurs, information for grasping the game state of the shift destination by the effect side MPU 82 is set in the game end command. The game end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). When the effect-side MPU 82 receives the game end command, the effect execution mode in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is changed to the mode corresponding to the end of one game. Also, from the received game end command, the effect-side MPU 82 grasps the presence or absence of transition of the game state and the contents of the game state of the transition destination. Then, a process for switching the mode of execution of the effects in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to a mode corresponding to the game state of the transition destination is executed.

Next, the processing for short RT executed at step S1509 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the short RT counter in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued (step S1601). Then, if the value of the short RT counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1602: YES), end processing of the short RT state ST4 is executed (step S1603). In the end processing of the short RT state ST4, the short RT state flag in the state flag storage area 105 is cleared to "0" and the normal state flag in the state flag storage area 105 is set to "1". As a result, the gaming state shifts from the short RT state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

Next, the ART transition determination process executed at step S1517 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether the state is either the post-CB RT state ST6 and the ART half-terminated state, or the relief RT state ST7 and the ART state ST20 where the continuation condition is satisfied. (step S1701). Specifically, when either of the post-CB RT status flag and the relief RT status flag in the status flag storage area 105 is set to "1", the ART halfway terminated state or the ART in which the continuation condition is satisfied It is determined whether or not the state is ST20. Specifically, a chance continuation counter provided for counting the number of games that can be continued in the chance state ST21 in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued, and the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22 in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued. A base continuation counter provided for counting, a first special continuation counter provided for measuring the number of games that can be continued in the first special state ST23 in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued, and an area for the number of games that can be continued At 107, it is determined whether or not the value of any one of the second special continuation counters provided for counting the number of games that can be continued in the second special state ST24 is 1 or more. The situation in which the post-CB RT state ST6 or the relief RT state ST7 and the value of any one of these continuation counters is 1 or more indicates an operation error or the like in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied. CB winning is erroneously established due to this, and a shift to the CB state ST3 occurs, and the state remains in the post-CB RT state ST6 or the relief RT state ST7.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the ART transition lottery table corresponding to the current ART transition lottery mode is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1702). Then, the ART transition lottery process is executed using the read ART transition lottery table (step S1703). In the ART transition lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for the ART transition lottery that is periodically updated in a work area 74a for specific control (to be described later) in the main RAM 74 is acquired, and the acquired value is read out in step S1702. Match against the ART transition lottery table. In this case, if the ART transition lottery table corresponds to the first ART transition lottery mode, the transition to the first special state ST23 is won with a probability of 5%, and the transition to the base state ST22 is won with a probability of 10%. 100% probability that the transition to the chance state ST21 is won, and 50% probability that the transition to the ART state ST20 is lost. If the ART transition lottery table corresponds to the second ART transition lottery mode, the transition to the first special state ST23 is won with a probability of 10%, the transition to the base state ST22 is won with a probability of 20%, and the transition to the base state ST22 is won with a probability of 40%. , and with a probability of 30%, the transition to the ART state ST20 is lost. If the ART transition lottery table corresponds to the third ART transition lottery mode, the transition to the first special state ST23 will be won with a probability of 15%, and the transition to the base state ST22 will be won with a probability of 25%, and 50%. With a probability of 10%, the transition to the chance state ST21 is won, and the transition to the ART state ST20 is lost with a probability of 10%.

When the transition to the first special state ST23 is won in the ART transition lottery process (step S1704: YES), the setting process for the first special state is executed (step S1705). In the setting process for the first special state, the state flags other than the internal state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the internal state flag is set to "1". As a result, the game state shifts to the internal state ST2. Also, in the setting process for the first special state, the ART state counter 106 is set to "3", which is information corresponding to the first special state ST23. As a result, the game state is the ART state ST20 and shifts to the first special state ST23. In the setting process for the first special state, the first special continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "300", which is the initial number of continuable games in the first special state ST23.

Thereafter, an ART signal output start flag provided in a work area 74a for specific control (to be described later) in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1706). The ART signal output start flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the output of the ART signal from the ART signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 should be started. Although the details will be described later, the output of the ART signal is started when the output start flag of the ART signal is set to "1".

Thereafter, internal state notification start processing is executed (step S1707). In the start process, the internal state notification unit 68 is switched to the lighting state. As a result, the internal state notification unit 68 is notified that the internal state is ST2. Further, this lighting state is continued until a CB prize is established and the game state shifts to the CB state ST3. When the process of step S1707 is executed, the output start flag of the ART signal is set to "1" in step S1706 as already described. When the ART signal output start flag is set to "1", the output of the ART signal from the ART signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 is started. This is the timing after the timing when the unit 68 is switched to the lighting state. However, these timings are substantially the same. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and these timings may be the same, or may be significantly different in terms of time.

After that, addition processing of the number of transitions is executed (step S1708). In the process of adding the number of transitions, 1 is added to the value of a transition number counter 108 (see FIG. 7) provided in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 . The number of times of transition counter 108 counts the period from when the ART state ST20 is newly started until the condition for continuing the ART state ST20 is not satisfied and the ART state ST20 ends or the ART halfway end state ends. This is a counter for counting the total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24. Although the details will be described later, the value of the total number of occurrences set in the transition number counter 108 is notified to the player each time the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 ends. In addition, the value of the transition number counter 108 is the normal state in the post-CB RT state ST6 and the state in which the ART is terminated halfway when the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. It is cleared to "0" when transition to ST1 occurs or when transition to normal state ST1 occurs in relief RT state ST7.

If a transition to the base state ST22 is won in the ART transition lottery process (step S1709: YES), a setting process for the base state is executed (step S1710). In the setting processing for the base state, the state flags other than the internal state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the internal state flag is set to "1". As a result, the game state shifts to the internal state ST2. In the base state setting process, the ART state counter 106 is set to "2", which is information corresponding to the base state ST22. As a result, the game state shifts from the ART state ST20 to the base state ST22. Further, in the base state setting process, the base continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "50", which is the initial number of continuable games in the base state ST22.

After that, as in step S1706, the ART signal output start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1711). After that, similarly to step S1707, internal state notification start processing is executed (step S1712).

In the ART transition lottery process, when the transition to the chance state ST21 is won (step S1713: YES), the setting process for the chance state is executed (step S1714). In the chance state setting process, the state flags other than the internal state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the internal state flag is set to "1". As a result, the game state shifts to the internal state ST2. In the chance state setting process, the ART state counter 106 is set to "1" as information corresponding to the chance state ST21. As a result, the game state shifts from the ART state ST20 to the chance state ST21. In the setting process for the chance state, the chance continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "20", which is the initial number of continuable games in the chance state ST21.

After that, the output delay flag 109 provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1715), and in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 A value "5" corresponding to the number of output delay games is set in the provided output delay counter 110 (step S1716). The output delay flag 109 is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the start of output of the chance signal from the chance signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 is delayed. The output delay counter 110 is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the timing of canceling the output delay when the start of output of the chance signal is delayed. Although the details will be described later, in the case where the chance state ST21 is entered while the ART is not halfway finished, the output of the chance signal is not started immediately, but the games corresponding to the number of output delay games are completed. Output of the chance signal is started at . Further, the output delay flag 109 is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the timing of switching the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state is being delayed. The output delay counter 110 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the timing to cancel the switching delay in the situation where the timing to switch the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state is delayed. Although the details will be described later, when the winning data of any CB combination is carried over to the main side RAM 74 in a situation where the ART is not halfway finished, and the state shifts to the chance state ST21, the internal state is The internal state notification unit 68 does not turn on immediately, but when the games corresponding to the number of output delay games are completed.

In the ART transition lottery process, when the transition to the ART state ST20 is lost (step S1713: NO), setting processing for the lost RT state is executed (step S1717). In the out-of-RT state setting process, the state flags other than the internal state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the internal state flag is set to "1". As a result, the game state shifts to the internal state ST2. On the other hand, in the setting process for the disconnected RT state, information setting to the ART state counter 106 is not performed. As a result, the value of the ART state counter 106 is maintained at "0" and the transition to the ART state ST20 does not occur.

Thereafter, the display delay flag 111 provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1718), and the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 A value "5" corresponding to the number of display delay games is set in the provided display delay counter 112 (step S1719). The display delay flag 111 is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the timing of switching the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state is being delayed. The display delay counter 112 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the timing to cancel the switching delay in the situation where the timing to switch the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state is delayed. Although the details will be described later, in the case that any winning data of the CB combination is carried over to the main side RAM 74 and the state shifts to the lost RT state ST10, the internal state notification section 68 immediately lights up. Instead, the internal state notification unit 68 is turned on when the games corresponding to the number of display delay games have been completed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the state is the post-CB RT state ST6 and the ART is in the middle end state, or the relief RT state ST7 is the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied. In a certain situation, it means that one of the CB roles was won and the winning of the winning CB role was not established. In this case, return processing is executed (step S1720). In the return process, when the current gaming state is the post-CB RT state ST6, the post-CB RT state flag in the state flag storage area 105 is cleared to "0" and the internal state flag is set to "1". As a result, the game state shifts to the internal state ST2. Further, the game states ST21 to ST24 corresponding to the counter set to a value of 1 or more among the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first special continuation counter and the second special continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of continuable games. Numerical information is set in the ART state counter 106 . For example, if the value of the chance continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART state counter 106 is set to "1" to shift to the chance state ST21, and if the value of the base continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART is set to shift to the base state ST22. The state counter 106 is set to "2", and if the value of the first special continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART state counter 106 is set to "3" to shift to the first special state ST23, and the second special continuation counter is set to "3". is greater than or equal to 1, the ART state counter 106 is set to "4" to shift to the second special state ST24. As a result, the player returns to the game state in which the player stayed in the previous ART state ST20.

On the other hand, in the return process, when the current gaming state is the relief RT state ST7, the relief RT state flag in the state flag storage area 105 is cleared to "0" and the internal state flag is set to "1". As a result, the game state shifts to the internal state ST2. However, in the recovery process when the current game state is the relief RT state ST7, the numerical information of the ART state counter 106 is maintained as it is. As already explained, when the ART transitions to the relief RT state ST7 in the mid-term termination state, the return to the ART state ST20 has already been performed at the time of transition to the relief RT state ST7. By maintaining the numerical information of 106 as it is, the ART state ST20 is maintained as it is.

After that, similarly to step S1707, internal state notification start processing is executed (step S1721). As a result, the internal state notification unit 68 is turned on.

Thereafter, an output start flag setting process is executed (step S1722). In the output start flag setting process, under the condition that the current game state is the post-CB RT state ST6, the chance signal output start flag and the ART A process of setting "1" to one of the signal output start flags is executed. Specifically, if the game state to return from the ART state ST20 this time is the chance state ST21, the output start flag of the chance signal is set to "1". The chance signal output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the output of the chance signal from the chance signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 should be started. Although the details will be described later, the output of the chance signal is started by setting the output start flag of the chance signal to "1". On the other hand, if the game state to return from in the ART state ST20 is any one of the base state ST22, the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24, the output start flag of the ART signal is set to "1".

Next, the outer edge management process executed in step S313 in the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the ART signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), ART signal output start processing is executed (step S1802). In the ART signal output start processing, the output of the output signal to the ART signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 is started. As a result, an ART signal is started to be output from the ART signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall. By receiving the ART signal, the management computer of the game hall changes the state of the slot machine 10 to the ART state ST20, which is higher than the chance state ST21 (the base state ST22, the first special state ST23, and the second special state ST24). ). Also, the management computer of the game hall adds 1 to the value displayed in the number of ART display section of the information display device provided corresponding to the slot machine 10 in the game hall, for example. The number-of-arts display unit indicates the number of unit executions of the higher-level state until the ART state ST20 becomes a higher-level state than the chance state ST21 and then the state of the higher-level ends. This is a display unit for notifying the operator. Thereafter, the ART signal output start flag is cleared to "0" (step S1803).

In the outer end management process, it is determined whether or not an ART signal output stop flag provided in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1804). The ART signal output stop flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the output of the ART signal from the ART signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 should be stopped. Although the details will be described later, when a transition from the base state ST22 to the chance state ST21 occurs, or when the ART state ST20 ends and the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs, the output stop flag of the ART signal is set to "1". be done. If the ART signal output stop flag is set to "1" (step S1804: YES), ART signal output stop processing is executed (step S1805). In the ART signal output stop processing, the output of the output signal to the ART signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 is stopped. As a result, the output of the ART signal from the ART signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. Thereafter, the ART signal output stop flag is cleared to "0" (step S1806).

In the outer end management process, when the chance signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1807: YES), the chance signal output start process is executed (step S1808). In the chance signal output start process, the output of the output signal to the chance signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 is started. As a result, output of a chance signal from the chance signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall is started. By receiving the chance signal, the management computer of the gaming hall can recognize that the slot machine 10 is in the chance state ST21. Also, the management computer of the game hall adds 1 to the value displayed in the number-of-chance display section of the information display device provided corresponding to the slot machine 10 in the game hall, for example. The chance number display section is a display section for notifying the player of the number of times the transition to the chance state ST21 has occurred. Thereafter, the chance signal output start flag is cleared to "0" (step S1809).

In the outer end management process, it is determined whether or not a chance signal output stop flag provided in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1810). The chance signal output stop flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the output of the chance signal from the chance signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 should be stopped. Although the details will be described later, when a transition from the chance state ST21 to the base state ST22 occurs, or when the ART state ST20 ends and the transition to the CB state ST3 occurs, the chance signal output stop flag is set to "1". be done. If the output stop flag of the chance signal is set to "1" (step S1810: YES), output stop processing of the chance signal is executed (step S1811). In the chance signal output stop processing, the output of the output signal to the chance signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 is stopped. As a result, output of the chance signal from the chance signal terminal to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. After that, the output stop flag of the chance signal is cleared to "0" (step S1812).

In the outer end management process, if the output delay flag 109 is set to "1" (step S1813: YES), the value of the output delay counter 110 is decremented by 1 (step S1814). Then, if the value of the output delay counter 110 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1815: YES), output start processing of the chance signal is executed in the same manner as in step S1808 (step S1816). As a result, output of the chance signal from the chance signal terminal of the external output terminal board 69 is started. In addition, internal state notification start processing is executed (step S1817). As a result, the internal state notification unit 68 is turned on. After that, the output delay flag 109 is cleared to "0" (step S1818).

In the outer edge management process, if the display delay flag 111 is set to "1" (step S1819: YES), the value of the display delay counter 112 is subtracted by 1 (step S1820). Then, if the value of the display delay counter 112 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1821: YES), internal state notification start processing is executed (step S1822). As a result, the internal state notification unit 68 is turned on. After that, the display delay flag 111 is cleared to "0" (step S1823).

Next, a description will be given of effects obtained by executing the processing of steps S1813 to S1823 in the outer edge management processing (FIG. 47). FIGS. 48(a1) to 48(e1) are time charts showing the output mode of the chance signal and the display state of the internal state notification unit 68 when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21, and FIG. 48(a2). 48(e2) are time charts showing the output mode of the chance signal and the display state of the internal state notification unit 68 when the normal state ST1 shifts to the short RT state ST4. e3) is a time chart showing the output mode of the chance signal and the display state of the internal state notification unit 68 when the normal state ST1 is shifted to the RT state ST10. Also, FIGS. 48(a1) to 48(a3) show the execution period of one game, FIGS. 48(b1) to 48(b3) show the execution period of the normal state ST1, and FIG. 48(c1) shows the chance FIG. 48(c2) shows the execution period of the state ST21, FIG. 48(c2) shows the execution period of the short RT state ST4, FIG. 48(c3) shows the execution period of the disconnected RT state ST10, and FIGS. ) indicates the output period of the chance signal, and FIGS.

First, the case of shifting from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 will be described. As shown in FIG. 48(a1), when the conditions for shifting to the chance state ST21 are established in the normal state ST1 at the timing t1, the normal state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. 48(b1), and FIG. A chance state ST21 is started as shown in c1). However, the output of the chance signal is not started at the timing t1, and the internal state notification unit 68 is maintained in the off state.

After that, one game ends at timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, and timing t6, as shown in FIG. 48(a1). In this case, at timing t6, the number of games corresponding to the number of output delay games has been completed after the game state has shifted from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21. Therefore, at timing t6, output of the chance signal is started as shown in FIG. 48(d1), and the internal state notification unit 68 is turned on as shown in FIG. 48(e1). As a result, for example, in a configuration in which an information display device is provided corresponding to the slot machine 10 in a game hall, the value displayed on the chance number display section of the information display device is incremented by 1, It is possible to make the player recognize that the destination of the current game state is the chance state ST21. Further, for example, by confirming that the internal state notification unit 68 has turned on, the administrator of the game hall can visually confirm that the current game state is shifted to the internal state ST2. Become.

Next, the case of transition from the normal state ST1 to the short RT state ST4 will be described. As shown in FIG. 48(a2), when the condition for shifting to the short RT state ST4 is established in the normal state ST1 at the timing t11, the normal state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. The short RT state ST4 is started as shown in (c2).

After that, one game ends at timing t12, timing t13, and timing t14, respectively, as shown in FIG. 48(b1). In this case, at the timing of t14, three games have been completed since the start of the short RT state ST4, so the number of games that can be continued in the short RT state ST4 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t14, the short RT state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 48(c2), and the normal state ST1 starts as shown in FIG. 48(b2). In the short RT state ST4, the chance signal is not output as shown in FIG. 48(d2), and the internal state notification section 68 is maintained in the off state as shown in FIG. 48(e2).

In such a configuration that the short RT state ST4 ends when three games are played, as already explained, when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21, the output of the chance signal is delayed for five games. At the same time, the switching of the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state is delayed for five games.

As already explained, when a new transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 will continue to operate in the short RT state ST4 over the next five games. A common effect common to the case is executed. As a result, for five games after the start of the chance state ST21, the player can grasp which game state is the short RT state ST4 or the chance state ST21 from the performance mode. Can not.

Also, the probability of winning a replay prize in the short RT state ST4 and the chance state ST21 is higher than that in the normal state ST1, and the probabilities of winning a replay prize are substantially the same. In addition, in either the short RT state ST4 or the chance state ST21, if a win is made with the index value IV=1, the normal bell prize is established. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the short RT state ST4 and the chance state ST21 is based on these winning modes.

Furthermore, in the game in which the SB role was won in the normal state ST1 but the SB prize was not established, and in the game in which the CB role was won in the normal state ST1 but the CB prize was not established, the reels 32L, The stop rolls for 32M and 32R stop results are similar. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the short RT state ST4 and the chance state ST21 is based on the stop numbers resulting from the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In such a configuration, assuming that the output of the chance signal is started at the timing when the transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs, the chance number display section of the information display device provided in the game hall Depending on the display mode of (1), the player may be able to grasp which of the short RT state ST4 and the chance state ST21 the game state transition destination is at the timing when the game state transition occurs. Similarly, assuming that the internal state notification unit 68 is switched to the lighting state at the timing when the transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs, the display state of the internal state notification unit 68 changes the game state. There is a possibility that the player can grasp whether the transition destination of the game state is the short RT state ST4 or not at the timing when is generated.

On the other hand, when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21 as described above, the output of the chance signal is delayed for five games, and the internal state notification unit 68 is switched to the lighting state five times. Delayed between games. As a result, even if the display mode of the number-of-chance display section of the information display device provided in the game hall and the display state of the internal state notification section 68 are confirmed at the timing when the game state transition occurs, the game state transition destination is confirmed. The player cannot grasp whether is in the short RT state ST4 or the chance state ST21.

Furthermore, the number of games in which the output of the chance signal is delayed and the number of games in which the switching of the lighting state of the internal state notification unit 68 is delayed when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21 is the continuation of the short RT state ST4. The number of games is more than the number of possible games. As a result, when the shift to the short RT state ST4 occurs, the player's expectation that the shift to the chance state ST21 has occurred can be maintained until the short RT state ST4 ends. .

The number of games in which the output of the chance signal is delayed and the number of games in which switching to the lighting state of the internal state notification unit 68 is delayed when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21 is limited to 5 games. It may be 3 games, 4 games, or 6 games or more. Even in this case, it is possible to make the number of delayed games greater than or equal to the number of games that can be continued in the short RT state ST4. Also, the number of delayed games may be one game or two games, which is smaller than the number of games that can be continued in the short RT state ST4. Even in this case, it is possible for the player to expect that the game state has shifted to the chance state ST21. Also, the number of games in which the output of the chance signal is delayed when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21 is limited to the same number of games in which switching to the lighting state of the internal state notification unit 68 is delayed. The former number of games may be larger than the latter number of games, or the number of games may be smaller.

Next, the case of shifting from the normal state ST1 to the RT state ST10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 48(a3), the normal state ST1 ends as shown in FIG. As shown in (c3), the deviated RT state ST10 is started. However, at the timing of t21, the internal state notification unit 68 is maintained in the off state.

After that, one game ends at timing t22, timing t23, timing t24, timing t25, and timing t26, as shown in FIG. 48(a3). In this case, at the timing of t26, the number of games corresponding to the number of display delay games has been completed after the gaming state has shifted from the normal state ST1 to the RT state ST10. Therefore, at the timing of t26, the internal state notification unit 68 is turned on as shown in FIG. 48(e3). As a result, for example, the manager of the game hall can visually confirm that the current game state is shifted to the internal state ST2 by confirming that the internal state notification unit 68 has turned on. becomes. In the off-RT state ST10, no chance signal is output as shown in FIG. 48(d3).

As already described, when a new transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 will continue to display the out-of-RT state ST10 over the next five games. A common effect common to the case is executed. As a result, for five games after the start of the chance state ST21, the player can grasp which of the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 the player is in, out of the performance mode. Can not.

Also, the probability of winning a replay prize in the lost RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 is higher than that in the normal state ST1, and the probability of winning a replay prize is the same. In addition, if a win is made with the index value IV=1 in either the lost RT state ST10 or the chance state ST21, the normal bell prize is established. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 is out of these winning modes.

Furthermore, both the shift to the lost RT state ST10 and the shift to the chance state ST21 are triggered by winning the CB role in the normal state ST1 and not establishing the CB prize. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 is out of the stop numbers resulting from the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In such a configuration, assuming that the output of the chance signal is started at the timing when the transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs, the chance number display section of the information display device provided in the game hall Due to this display mode, the player can grasp which of the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 the destination of the game state transition is off at the timing when the game state transition occurs. On the other hand, when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21 as described above, the output of the chance signal is delayed for five games. As a result, even if the display mode of the number-of-chance display section of the information display device provided in the game hall and the display state of the internal state notification section 68 are confirmed at the timing when the game state transition occurs, the game state transition destination is confirmed. is off, and the player cannot grasp whether it is the RT state ST10 or the chance state ST21.

Further, the number of games in which the output of the chance signal is delayed when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21 is the number of plural games. As a result, when the transition to the lost RT state ST10 occurs, the player's sense of expectation that the transition to the chance state ST21 has occurred can be maintained over a plurality of games.

As already described, when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state S21, the switching of the internal state notification section 68 to the lighting state is delayed for five games. In this case, assuming that the internal state notification unit 68 is switched to the lighting state at the timing when the transition from the normal state ST1 to the RT state ST10 occurs, depending on the display mode of the internal state notification unit 68, the gaming state At the timing when the transition occurs, the player can grasp which of the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 the transition destination of the game state is. On the other hand, when the normal state ST1 is shifted to the RT state ST10 as described above, the internal state notification unit 68 is switched to the lighting state in the same manner as when the normal state ST1 is shifted to the chance state ST21. Delayed for 5 games. As a result, when the normal state ST1 is shifted to the RT state ST10, the number of games required until the internal state notification unit 68 is switched to the lighting state is the same as when the normal state ST1 is shifted to the chance state ST21. It becomes possible to Therefore, even if the player confirms the display state of the internal state notification unit 68 at the timing when the game state transition occurs, the player can grasp which of the RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21 the game state transition destination is. you can't.

It should be noted that the number of games in which switching to the lighting state of the internal state notification unit 68 is delayed when the normal state ST1 is shifted to the RT state ST10 is not limited to five games, but three games, four games, or six games. or more. Even in this case, it is possible to make the number of delayed games greater than or equal to the number of games that can be continued in the short RT state ST4. Also, the number of delayed games may be one game or two games, which is smaller than the number of games that can be continued in the short RT state ST4. Even in this case, it is possible for the player to expect that the game state has shifted to the chance state ST21. Also, the number of games in which switching to the lighting state of the internal state notification unit 68 is delayed when the normal state ST1 shifts to the chance state ST21, and the internal state notification unit 68 when the normal state ST1 shifts to the RT state ST10. It is not limited to a configuration in which the number of games for which the switching to the lighting state of is delayed is the same, and the number of games in the former is more than the number of games in the latter. It is good also as a structure which is a number.

<Processing configuration in ART state ST20>
Next, the processing configuration in the ART state ST20 will be explained. When the continuation condition is satisfied in the ART state ST20, if any of the index values IV = 2 to 10 is won as already explained, the correct answer reel 32L that enables the achievement of the normal bell winning. , 32M, and 32R, and the stop operation timing of the correct answer target that enables establishment of the compensating bell winning is executed. In addition to this, there are cases where the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. Therefore, the configuration for executing the notification will be described first.

As processing for executing the notification, the main MPU 72 executes notification control processing in step S512 in the lottery processing (FIG. 12), and notification processing at the time of stop in step S1108 in the reel stop processing (FIG. 19). to run. In the notification control process and the notification process at the time of stopping, a command setting process for causing various notifications to be performed by the image display device 63 is executed. A setting process is executed to cause the special display section 67 to display information corresponding to the content of the notification. Prior to the description of specific processing contents of the notification control processing and the notification processing at the time of stop, the special display section 67 will be described in detail.

FIG. 49(a) is a front view of the special display portion 67. FIG. The special display portion 67 is provided with seven display segments 131-137. Each of the display segments 131 to 137 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment 131 to 137. and any combination of display segments 131-137 can be illuminated. Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments 131 to 137 all display the same color, but are not limited to this. Alternatively, each of the display segments 131 to 137 may display a different color, or each of the display segments 131 to 137 may display a plurality of colors. The first to seventh display segments 131 to 137 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 131 to 137 are arranged so as to form a so-called 7-segment display. Thus, in the special display portion 67, it is possible to display a plurality of types such as numbers "1" to "7" and the alphabet "H". Note that the special display unit 67 is not limited to the segment display device as described above, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device as long as it is possible to display a plurality of types of symbols, numbers, or characters. Other types of display devices, such as hard drive, CRT, dot matrix, etc., may also be used.

In the present slot machine 10, as already explained, when any of the index values IV=2 to 10 is won, the normal bell win is established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the correct answer are stopped first. In addition, when winning is won with the index value IV=16 in the lottery table for the internal state (FIG. 32), if the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the fourth replay prize is established and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is won. If the first stop is made, the fifth replay winning prize or the sixth replay winning prize is established. Also, in the post-CB RT state ST6, although not in the ART state ST20, if the index value IV=13 is won, if the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the first relief replay winning prize or the first replay winning prize is established. If the reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first, the first replay win is established, and if the index value IV=14 is won, if the left reel 32L is stopped first, the second relief replay win or the first replay win is established. If one replay win is established and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the first replay win is established.

Thus, in the configuration in which the establishment of a prize differs according to the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped that can be notified by the image display device 63 is the first stop. The stop order in which the left reel 32L is the second stop and the third stop is arbitrary, the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary, and the first There is a stop order in which the stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop types are arbitrary. There are a total of three types of these stop orders. Then, in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, if any of the index values IV=2 to 10 is won, the correct target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of the normal bell prize are announced. At the same time, when the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped at the first stop, the correct target stop operation timing that enables establishment of the compensatory bell winning is notified.

In addition, as already explained, in either the case of the ART halfway end state and the post-CB RT state ST6, or the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied and the relief RT state ST7. In the case where a CB winning combination is won, a notification of a stop mode is executed in order to avoid the winning of the CB winning combination. In this case, there are a total of two types of notification modes, ie, when the first CB winning combination is won and when the second CB winning combination is won.

Also, as already explained, in the case where the ART is in the middle end state and in the post-CB RT state ST6, if the index value IV=13 or 14 is won, the relief replay prize corresponding to the win is awarded. Notification of the stop mode for establishing is executed. In this case, there are a total of two notification modes, one for winning with index value IV=13 and the other for winning with index value IV=14.

On the other hand, in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, if any of the index values IV=2 to 10 is won, it is notified that there is a possibility that the CB prize will be established and the transition to the CB state ST3 will occur. However, the notification of the correct target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling establishment of the normal bell prize and the notification of the correct target stop operation timing enabling establishment of the supplementary bell prize are not executed. In addition, the CB role is won in either the case where the ART is not in the middle end state and the RT state ST6 after CB, or the ART state ST20 where the continuation condition is not satisfied and the relief RT state is ST7. In this case, although it is notified that there is a possibility that the CB winning will be established and the transition to the CB state ST3 will occur, there will be a stop mode for avoiding the establishment of the winning of the winning CB role. No notification is performed. Also, in the case where the ART is not in the middle end state but in the post-CB RT state ST6, if the index value IV = 13 or 14 in the lottery table for the post-CB RT state (Fig. 40) is won, either Although it is notified that there is a possibility that the relief replay winning will be established and the transition to the relief RT state ST7 will occur, the stop mode notification for establishing the relief replay winning is not executed.

In the above configuration, the special display section 67 displays a display corresponding to the content notified by the image display device 63 in relation to the winning combination. The display contents of the special display portion 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 49(b).

The display contents of the special display section 67 are set in such a way as to correspond one-to-one with the notification contents of the above-described seven types of stop modes on the image display device 63, and the stop modes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not reported. It is set so as to correspond to the notification that there is a possibility that the game state will change. Specifically, the number "1" corresponds to the fact that the image display device 63 notifies that the first stop is the left reel 32L and the type of the second and third stops is arbitrary. is set as the display content. In addition, the display content of the number "2" corresponds to the fact that the image display device 63 notifies that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the type of the second and third stops is arbitrary. is set as The number "3" is displayed in correspondence with the fact that the image display device 63 notifies that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the type of the second and third stops is arbitrary. is set as In addition, the number "4" is set as the display content so as to correspond to the fact that the image display device 63 notifies of a stop mode for avoiding establishment of the first CB prize in the game in which the first CB role is won. there is In addition, the number "5" is set as the display content corresponding to the fact that the image display device 63 notifies the stop mode for avoiding establishment of the second CB prize in the game in which the second CB role is won. there is Also, in the game in which the index value IV=13 in the post-CB RT state lottery table (FIG. 40) is won, the image display device 63 notifies the stop mode for establishing the first relief replay winning prize. Correspondingly, the number "6" is set as the display content. In addition, in the game in which the index value IV=14 in the lottery table for the post-CB RT state (FIG. 40) is won, the image display device 63 notifies the stop mode for establishing the second relief replay winning prize. Correspondingly, the number "7" is set as the display content. In addition, the character "H" is displayed in association with the fact that the image display device 63 notifies the player that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped but that there is a possibility that the game state may change. It is set as display content.

Since the display contents of the special display portion 67 are set as described above, the display contents of the special display portion 67 do not overlap between different types of notification contents on the image display device 63 . This makes it possible to associate the display content of the special display portion 67 with the notification content on the image display device 63 .

It should be noted that the display content of the special display section 67 is not limited to the configuration in which the display content of the special display section 67 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the image display device 63. A plurality of types of display contents of the special display section 67 may be set to correspond to all of them. Even in this case, it is possible to associate the display contents of the special display section 67 with the notification contents on the image display device 63 by preventing the display contents of the special display section 67 from overlapping between different types of notification contents. becomes.

FIGS. 50(a) and 50(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content on the image display device 63 and the display content on the special display section 67. FIG.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for the correct answer are announced on the image display device 63 by winning with any of the index values IV=5 to 7, the image display device 63 displays a game reel as shown in FIG. 50(a1). The same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of times of stop operations required to end the game are displayed, and the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the correct target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed to indicate that the first stop should be made. The image shown is displayed. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 50(a1) is a situation in which it is notified that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the types of the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary, so the first stop should be made only to the middle unit display image G2. An image of "1" is displayed as an image indicating that.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R themselves as targets of the correct answer as described above, the special display unit 67 displays the correct answer as shown in FIG. 50(a2). A display of "2" corresponding to the notification of the target reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. That is, on the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed. While an image indicating that one stop should be made is added, the special display portion 67 provides a display that is irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, even if the special display portion 67 displays a display corresponding to the notification content of the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63. FIG.

In the case where the image display device 63 does not notify the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the stop state but notifies that there is a possibility that the game state will change, as shown in FIG. 50(b1), the image display device 63 , the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stop operations required to end the game are displayed, but in each of the unit display images G1 to G3, an image corresponding to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. No display is performed. Specifically, the image "?" is displayed as the same image in each of the left unit display image G1, the middle unit display image G2, and the right unit display image G3. In addition to the unit display images G1 to G3, a character image G4 saying "Aim!!" is displayed as an image indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will change.

While the image display device 63 displays an image indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will change as described above, the special display unit 67 displays the game state as shown in FIG. 50(b2). An indication of an "H" is provided corresponding to a state transition that may occur. This display of "H" does not correspond to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Thus, when the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not reported on the image display device 63, the special display section 67 also displays a display indicating that the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be specified. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display content of the special display portion 67 from disappearing the game content of making the player predict the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1 , the display range of the special display section 67 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . This makes it possible to reduce the degree of player's attention to the special display section 67 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the special display section 67 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 across the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the special display portion 67 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display portion 67. FIG.

Next, the notification control process executed in step S511 in the lottery process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the notification control process is executed before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in each game.

In the notification control process, if any of the index values IV = 2 to 10 is won in the ART state ST20 (steps S1901 and S1902: YES), and the continuation condition of the ART state ST20 is satisfied, (Step S1903: YES), the process of grasping the correct answer object is executed (step S1904). In the process of grasping the correct answer, if any of the index values IV=2 to 4 is won, the left reel 32L is grasped as the correct answer, and any of the index values IV=5 to 7 is won. If so, the middle reel 32M is determined as the correct answer, and if any of the index values IV=8 to 10 is won, the right reel 32R is determined as the correct answer mode.

After that, the first display data setting process is executed (step S1905). In the setting process of the first display data, the data of the display contents corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R which are the targets of the correct answer ascertained in step S1904 are read out from an area in the main ROM 73 in which the data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored. , the display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the special display section 67 starts to display the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are targets of correct answers that enable establishment of a normal bell prize.

Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop mode command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S1906). The notification execution command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 82 recognize that notification related to the winning combination should be executed in the current game. This is a command for making the production side MPU 82 recognize the stop mode of 32R. Only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set as a transmission target regardless of the content of notification on the image display device 63 . The stop mode command is set in one-to-one correspondence with the type of stop mode to be notified by the image display device 63, and in step S1906, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a normal bell prize are stopped. A stop mode command corresponding to the mode is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored, and is set as a transmission target. Various commands set in step S1906 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in command output processing (step S211) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

If any of the index values IV = 2 to 10 is won in the ART state ST20 (step S1901 and step S1902: YES), and if the continuation condition of the ART state ST20 is not satisfied (step S1903: NO ), the second display data setting process is executed (step S1907). If any of the index values IV=2 to 10 is won in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not established, the stop mode that enables establishment of the normal bell winning is not reported as already explained. Therefore, in the process of setting the second display data, the data of the display contents corresponding to the notification indicating that the game state may change, although the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified is stored in the main ROM 73. is read out from an area in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored, and display control of the special display portion 67 is executed according to the read display content data. As a result, the special display portion 67 starts to display a notification indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will change, although the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified.

After that, the notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S1908). As already explained, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification on the image display device 63 . This set notification execution command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the notification control process, when the index value IV=16 is won in the ART state ST20 (steps S1901 and S1909: YES), and when the gaming state is the base state ST22 (step S1910: YES), the current state A special notification lottery table corresponding to the special shift lottery mode is read out from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored (step S1911). Then, the special notification lottery process is executed using the read special notification lottery table (step S1912). In the special notification lottery process, the value of the special notification lottery lottery counter that is periodically updated in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 is obtained, and the obtained value is read out in step S1911. Match against the special notification lottery table. In this case, the special notification lottery table corresponding to the first special transition lottery mode has a probability of 50%, and the special notification lottery table corresponding to the second special transition lottery mode has a probability of 70%. If the special notification lottery table corresponding to the third special transition lottery mode is selected, the special notification lottery table will win the special notification with a probability of 90%.

If the special notification win is won (step S1913: YES), the stopping mode for the first stop of the right reel 32R is grasped (step S1914). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the base state ST22 (step S1910: NO), or if the special notification win is not achieved (step S1913: NO), the stop mode for the first stop of the left reel 32L is grasped ( step S1915).

If the process of step S1914 or step S1915 has been executed, the setting process of the first display data is executed (step S1916). In the setting process of the first display data, the data of the display contents corresponding to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ascertained in step S1914 or S1915 is stored in the main ROM 73 as data for specific control, which will be described later. The data is read out from the area, and the display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the display content read out. As a result, when step S1914 is executed, a display indicating that the first stop is the right reel 32R is started in the special display portion 67, and when step S1915 is executed, the first stop is the left reel. The special display portion 67 starts to display that it is 32L.

Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop mode command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S1917). In this case, when step S1914 is executed, a stop mode command corresponding to the fact that the first stop is the right reel 32R is read out from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored, and is transmitted. , and when step S1915 is executed, a stop mode command corresponding to the fact that the first stop is the left reel 32L is read from an area in the main-side ROM 73 in which data for specific control to be described later is stored, and is transmitted. Set as target. Various commands set in step S1917 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the notification control process, CB winning notification processing is executed in step S1918, and replay winning notification processing is executed in step S1919, regardless of whether or not the player is in the ART state ST20. The contents of the CB winning notification process and the replay winning notification process will be described later.

Next, the stop notification process executed in step S1108 in the reel stop process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the stop notification process is executed when the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped.

In the notification process at the time of stop, if any of the index values IV = 2 to 10 is won in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied (step S2001 to step S2003: YES), the current reel stop process (FIG. 19), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are first stopped (step S2004: YES), and if the first stop is not performed for the correct target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S2005 : NO), and a notification setting process is executed to enable establishment of compensation bell winning (step S2006). Specifically, when the index value IV=2 is won, the information corresponding to the notification indicating that the symbol "red 7" should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the left reel 32L is mainly displayed. It is set in the register of the side MPU 72 . Further, when the index value IV=3 is won, information corresponding to the notification indicating that the "LUCKY" symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the left reel 32L is transferred to the register of the main side MPU 72. set to Also, when the index value IV=4 is won, the register of the main side MPU 72 stores information corresponding to the notification indicating that the symbol "BAR" should be stopped on the main line ML1 when the left reel 32L is stopped. set to Further, when the index value IV=5 is won, the main side MPU 72 transmits information corresponding to the notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the middle reel 32M. Set in a register. Further, when the index value IV=6 is won, the main side MPU 72 transmits information corresponding to the notification indicating that the "white 7" symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the middle reel 32M. Set in a register. Further, when the index value IV=7 is won, information corresponding to the notification indicating that the "BAR" symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the middle reel 32M is transferred to the register of the main side MPU 72. set to Further, when the index value IV=8 is won, information corresponding to the notification indicating that the "BAR" symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the right reel 32R is stored in the register of the main side MPU 72. set to Further, when the index value IV=9 is won, the register of the main side MPU 72 stores information corresponding to the notification indicating that the "watermelon" symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the right reel 32R. set to Further, when the index value IV=10 is won, information corresponding to the notification indicating that the "LUCKY" symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 when stopping the right reel 32R is transferred to the register of the main side MPU 72. set to Stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be notified so that the symbols to be notified on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be notified are stopped on the main line ML1. is operated, regardless of the stop operation timing of the other reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the compensation bell winning is established.

Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop mode command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2007). In this case, in step S2007, the stop mode command corresponding to the information set in the register of the main MPU 72 is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored, and set as a transmission target. In other words, a stop mode command is set to enable the performance side MPU 82 to notify the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the compensation bell winning. Various commands set in step S2007 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in command output processing (step S211) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

Incidentally, in the stop notification process, neither the first display data setting process nor the second display data setting process is executed. In other words, the display contents of the special display portion 67 set at the start of the current game start to notify that a compensation bell winning can be established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped for the first time. is maintained as it is. However, it is not limited to this, and in a configuration in which the display content corresponding to each execution mode of the notification that enables establishment of the compensation bell winning is set as the display content of the special display section 67, the reel 32L , 32M, and 32R are stopped and the notification that the supplementary bell winning is possible is started, the display contents of the special display section 67 correspond to the notification that the normal bell winning is possible. The display content may be changed from the display content to the display content corresponding to the notification that the compensation bell winning can be established. As a result, when the content of the notification being executed on the image display device 63 is changed within the range of one game, it is possible to change the display content of the special display section 67 accordingly. , and the display contents of the special display portion 67 can be strictly associated with each other.

Next, the operation notification processing executed by the effect-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The operation notification process is executed, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec.

When both the notification execution command and the stop mode command have been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2101: YES), the stop mode images of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop mode command are displayed on the image display device 63. Data necessary for display are set (step S2102). However, at this timing, the image display device 63 does not display the stop mode image of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop mode command. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set to the counter for measurement provided in the effect side RAM 84 (step S2103). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating and reach a constant speed rotation, and is set to 0.5 msec, for example. The value set in the measurement counter is decremented each time the notification process is started.

In the notification processing, if only the notification execution command of the notification execution command and the stop mode command is received from the main MPU 72, and the stop mode command is not received during the monitoring period before and after the timing of receiving the notification execution command ( Step S2104: YES), setting of data necessary for displaying on the image display device 63 an image indicating that the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported, but that there is a possibility that the game state will change. (step S2105). However, at this timing, the image display device 63 does not display an image indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will be changed. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 84 (step S2106). The value corresponding to this notification delay period is the same as in step S2103.

In the notification processing, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect-side RAM 84 has elapsed (step S2107: YES), notification start processing is executed (step S2108). In the notification start process, if the notification delay period set in step S2103 has passed, the image display device 63 displays an image based on the data set in step S2102. In this case, if the current notification corresponds to the stop mode command set in step S1906 in the notification control process (FIG. 51), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that normally enable the establishment of the bell prize are stopped. An image for notifying the mode is displayed. Also, if the current notification corresponds to the stop mode command set in step S1917 in the notification control process (FIG. 51), the stop mode command corresponds to the contents grasped in step S1914. If so, an image for notifying that the right reel 32R is to be stopped first is displayed, and if the stop mode command corresponds to the content grasped in step S1915, the left reel 32L is first stopped. An image is displayed to notify the user of the stoppage. Further, when the current notification corresponds to the stop mode command set in step S2006 in the notification processing at the time of stop (FIG. 52), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable establishment of the compensation bell winning. An image for notifying the stop mode of the is displayed.

On the other hand, in the notification start process, if the notification delay period set in step S2106 has elapsed, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S2105. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(b1), the image display device 63 displays an image indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will change, although the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported. be done.

Note that the notification image displayed on the image display device 63 is displayed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R all stop rotating in one game and the game end command transmitted from the main side MPU 72 is received by the effect side MPU 82. is terminated at

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 54, how the special display section 67 and the image display device 63 respectively notify the winning combination will be described. FIG. 54(a) shows the rotation period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, FIG. 54(b) shows the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and FIG. FIG. 54(d) shows the execution period of the notification regarding the winning combination on the image display device 63. FIG.

At the timing t1, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started as shown in FIG. 54(a), and an acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started as shown in FIG. 54(b). Also, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the special display section 67 starts to notify the relationship with the winning combination based on direct display control by the main MPU 72. FIG.

After that, at the timing t2, which is the timing in the middle of the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. is started. In other words, in a configuration in which not only the image display device 63 but also the special display section 67 notifies the winning combination, the special display section 67 whose display is directly controlled by the main MPU 72 starts the notification regarding the winning combination. Afterwards, the image display device 63 whose display is directly controlled by the effect-side MPU 82 starts to inform about the winning combination.

After that, at timing t3, the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends as shown in FIG. 54(b), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at a constant speed. After that, at timing t4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating as shown in FIG. 54(a). In this case, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 54(d), the notification regarding the winning combination on the image display device 63 ends. After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the notification regarding the winning combination on the special display section 67 is terminated. At the subsequent timing t6, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate again as shown in FIG. 54(a). However, in the game, the information regarding the winning combination is not executed.

In the case of the above configuration, the image display device 63 whose display is directly controlled by the production side MPU 82 is displayed after the timing when the special display section 67 whose display is directly controlled by the main side MPU 72 starts notifying the winning combination. , the notification of the winning combination is started, and after the timing when the notification of the winning combination on the image display device 63 directly controlled by the effect side MPU 82 ends, the special display section 67 whose display is directly controlled by the main side MPU 72 , the notification regarding the winning combination ends. In other words, the entire period during which the image display device 63 notifies the winning combination is included in the period during which the special display portion 67 notifies the winning combination. As a result, when the image display device 63 is performing the notification regarding the winning combination, the special display section 67 will surely perform the notification regarding the winning combination. In the case of confirming whether or not the notification regarding the winning combination is due to a fraudulent act by using the display contents of the special display section 67, it is possible to perform the confirmation at an arbitrary timing.

Next, the ART state processing executed in step S1513 in the processing for dealing with the end of the game (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the ART state processing is executed after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is stopped in one game.

In the ART state processing, first, the value of the ART state counter 106 is grasped. The ART state counter 106 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the game state in which the player stays in the ART state ST20, as already explained. As processing executed by the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST20, chance state processing (step S2202) for controlling execution of the chance state ST21 and base state processing (step S2203) for controlling execution of the base state ST22 are performed. ), a first special state process (step S2204) for controlling the execution of the first special state ST23, and a second special state process (step S2205) for controlling the execution of the second special state ST24. is set.

In such a processing configuration, the main MPU 72 specifies from the value of the ART state counter 106 which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. For such identification, reference is made to an ART address table provided in an area storing data for specific control, which will be described later, in the main-side ROM 73 . In the ART address table, start addresses of programs for executing the above-described multiple types of processing are set in association with the numerical information of the ART state counter 106 . Each process of steps S2202 to S2205 will be described in detail below.

First, the chance state processing executed in step S2202 of the ART state processing (FIG. 55) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the chance state process, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 14, 16 in the lottery table for the internal state (Fig. 32) is won (step S2301: YES), lottery processing for shifting to the base state ST22 is executed. (Step S2302). In the shift lottery process, first, the base shift lottery table corresponding to the index value IV that was won this time is read. A plurality of base transition lottery tables are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the index value IV, and the base transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=11 has a 50% probability of winning the transition to the base state ST22. In the base transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=12, the probability of winning the transition to the base state ST22 is set to 60%, and in the base transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=16 The probability of winning the transition to the base state ST22 is set to 70%, and the probability of winning the transition to the base state ST22 is set to 80% in the base transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=13. , the base transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=14 sets the probability of winning the transition to the base state ST22 to 90%. In the transition lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for the base transition lottery, which is periodically updated in a work area 74a for specific control (to be described later) in the main RAM 74, is acquired, and the acquired value is used for the current winning combination. Match against the corresponding base transition draw table.

If a transition to the base state ST22 is won in the transition lottery process (step S2303: YES), a setting process for the base state is executed (step S2304). In the base state setting process, the ART state counter 106 is set to "2", which is information corresponding to the base state ST22. As a result, the game state shifts to the base state ST22. Further, in the base state setting process, the base continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "50", which is the initial number of continuable games in the base state ST22.

After that, the value of the chance continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is cleared to "0" (step S2305). The ART signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2306), and the chance signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2307). As a result, the output of the chance signal from the external output terminal board 69 is stopped, and the output of the ART signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started.

In the chance state process, if a negative determination is made in step S2301 or a negative determination is made in step S2303, 1 is subtracted from the value of the chance continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of continuable games (step S2308). As a result, the number of games that can be continued in the chance state ST21 is decremented by one. When the value of the chance continuation counter becomes "0", the conditions for continuation of the ART state ST20 are not satisfied. The notification of the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the bell prize is not executed. Then, when the CB prize is established when any one of the index values IV=2 to 10 is won, the ART state ST20 is terminated and the state shifts to the CB state ST3.

Next, the base state processing executed in step S2203 of the ART state processing (FIG. 55) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the base state process, if one of the index values IV=11 to 14 in the internal state lottery table (FIG. 32) is won (step S2401: YES), the base continuation provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games If the value of the counter is 40 or more (step S2402: YES), promotion lottery processing in the special transition lottery mode is executed (step S2403). In the promotion lottery process, first, the promotion lottery table for special transition corresponding to the index value IV that was won this time is read. A plurality of promotion lottery tables for special transition are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the index value IV, and the promotion lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=11 has a probability of 50 to win promotion in the special transition lottery mode. %, and in the promotion lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=12, the probability of winning promotion in the special transition lottery mode is set to 60%, and in the promotion lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=13 A promotion winning probability in the special transition lottery mode is set to 70%, and a promotion lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=14 sets a promotion winning probability in the special transition lottery mode to 80%. In the promotion lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for the special transition promotion lottery that is periodically updated in a work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is acquired, and the acquired value is used as the winning combination of this time. match against the promotion lottery table corresponding to

If the special transition lottery mode promotion is won in the promotion lottery process (step S2404: YES), the special transition lottery mode one level higher is set (step S2405). That is, if it is the first special transition lottery mode, it is set to the second special transition lottery mode, if it is the second special transition lottery mode, it is set to the third special transition lottery mode, and if it is the third special transition lottery mode, it is set to the second special transition lottery mode. Stay in lottery mode.

In the base state process, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 14 in the internal state lottery table (Fig. 32) is won (step S2401: YES), the current special transition lottery mode and the current lottery are won. The special transfer lottery table corresponding to the index value IV is read (step S2406), and the special transfer lottery process is executed using the special transfer lottery table (step S2407). In this case, the special transition lottery table corresponding to the first special transition lottery mode and index value IV=11 has a special transition winning probability of 50%, corresponding to the first special transition lottery mode and index value IV=12. In the special transition lottery table, the probability of special transition winning is 60%, and in the special transition lottery table corresponding to the first special transition lottery mode and index value IV=13, the probability of special transition winning is 70%. In the special transition lottery table corresponding to the 1 special transition lottery mode and the index value IV=14, the probability of winning the special transition lottery is 80%. In the special transition lottery table corresponding to the second special transition lottery mode and index value IV=11, the probability of winning the special transition lottery is 60%. In the transition lottery table, the probability of special transition winning is 70%, and in the special transition lottery table corresponding to the second special transition lottery mode and index value IV=13, the probability of special transition winning is 80%. In the special transition lottery mode and the special transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=14, the probability of winning the special transition lottery is 90%. In the special transition lottery table corresponding to the third special transition lottery mode and index value IV=11, the probability of winning the special transition lottery is 70%, and the special transition lottery table corresponding to the third special transition lottery mode and index value IV=12 is 70%. In the transition lottery table, the probability of special transition winning is 80%, and in the special transition lottery table corresponding to the third special transition lottery mode and index value IV=13, the probability of special transition winning is 90%. In the special transition lottery mode and the special transition lottery table corresponding to the index value IV=14, the probability of winning the special transition lottery is 100%.

If the special transition lottery process wins the special transition lottery process (step S2408: YES), the setting process for the second special state is executed (step S2409). In the second special state setting process, the ART state counter 106 is set to "4", which is information corresponding to the second special state ST24. As a result, the game state shifts to the second special state ST24. In the setting process for the second special state, the second special continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "50", which is the initial number of continuable games in the second special state ST24. Also, the value of the base continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued is cleared to "0".

After that, the number of transitions is added (step S2410). In the process of adding the number of transitions, 1 is added to the value of a transition number counter 108 (see FIG. 7) provided in a later-described specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74 . As already explained, the number of transitions counter 108 continues from the start of the ART state ST20 to the end of the ART state ST20 when the continuation condition for the ART state ST20 is not satisfied, or the ART halfway end state ends. This is a counter for counting the total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24. Although the details will be described later, the value of the total number of occurrences set in the transition number counter 108 is notified to the player each time the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 ends.

In the base state process, if the fifth replay win or the sixth replay win has been established in the current game (step S2410: YES), setting processing for the second special state is executed as in step S2409 ( step S2412). As a result, the game state shifts to the second special state ST24, "50" is set as the number of games that can be continued in the second special state ST24, and the value of the base continuation counter is cleared to "0". Also, similarly to step S2410, the number of transitions is added (step S2413).

In the base state process, if the special transition lottery process does not win the special transition lottery process (step S2408: NO), or if both the 5th replay winning prize and the 6th replay winning prize are not established (step S2411: NO ), the value of the base continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is subtracted by 1 (step S2414). As a result, the number of games that can be continued in the base state ST22 is decremented by one. When the value of the base continuation counter becomes "0" (step S2415: YES), setting processing for the chance state is executed (step S2416). In the chance state setting process, the ART state counter 106 is set to "1" as information corresponding to the chance state ST21. As a result, the game state shifts to the chance state ST21. In the setting process for the chance state, the chance continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "20", which is the initial number of continuable games in the chance state ST21.

Thereafter, the ART signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2417), and the chance signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2418). As a result, the output of the ART signal from the external output terminal board 69 is stopped, and the output of the chance signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started.

Next, the first special state processing executed in step S2204 of the ART state processing (FIG. 55) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58(a).

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued (step S2501). As a result, the number of games that can be continued in the first special state ST23 is decremented by one. When the value of the first special continuation counter becomes "0" (step S2502: YES), a setting process for the base state is executed (step S2503). In the base state setting process, the ART state counter 106 is set to "2", which is information corresponding to the base state ST22. As a result, the game state shifts to the base state ST22. Further, in the base state setting process, the base continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "50", which is the initial number of continuable games in the base state ST22.

Thereafter, wait timer setting processing is executed (step S2504). In the wait timer setting process, a value corresponding to the wait time at the end of the special state is set in a wait timer provided in a specific control work area 74a in the main RAM 74, which will be described later. The wait time at the end of the special state is set to, for example, 30 seconds, but the specific time is arbitrary. Also, the value set in the wait timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is executed. If the value of the wait timer is 1 or more, the affirmative determination is made in step S312 in the normal processing (FIG. 10) as already described, forcing the start of the next game to wait. As a result, when the first special state ST23 ends, it is possible to forcibly wait the start of the next game until the wait time at the end of the special state elapses.

After that, by reading the value of the transition count counter 108, the sum of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 from when the continuation condition for the current ART state ST20 is satisfied until the ART state ST20 ends is calculated. The number of occurrences is grasped (step S2505). Also, by reading the value of the first total acquisition number counter 102, the total number of game media awarded to the player in the current first special state ST23 is grasped (step S2506). Also, by reading the value of the second total acquisition number counter 103, the total number of game media already awarded to the player in the current ART state ST20 is grasped (step S2507). Also, the special transition lottery mode is set to the third special transition lottery mode (step S2508). Also, in order to display the special ending base image as the ending base image displayed on the image display device 63 when the first special state ST23 ends, the information corresponding to the special ending base image is transmitted to the main MPU 72. register (step S2509). Then, a special state end command is read out from an area in which data for specific control to be described later is stored in the main ROM 73, and the value grasped in each of steps S2505 to S2507 is set in the special state end command. Information corresponding to the special ending base image is set in the special end command, and the special state end command in which the setting of the information is completed is set as an output target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2510).

The special state end command set in step S2510 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). When the effect-side MPU 82 receives the special state end command, the special ending base image is displayed as the ending image to be displayed on the image display device 63 when the current first special state ST23 ends, although the details will be described later. In this state, the images corresponding to the values grasped in steps S2505 to S2507 are displayed.

Next, the second special state processing executed in step S2205 of the ART state processing (FIG. 55) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58(b).

First, promotion lottery processing in the special shift lottery mode is executed (step S2601). In the promotion lottery process, a promotion lottery table for special transition corresponding to the second special state ST24 is read from an area in the main-side ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored. In the promotion lottery table, the probability of winning promotion in the special shift lottery mode is set to 60%. In the promotion lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for the special transfer promotion lottery that is periodically updated in a work area 74a for specific control (to be described later) in the main RAM 74 is acquired, and the acquired value is stored in the second special state ST24. match against the promotion lottery table for special transition corresponding to . When promotion is won in promotion lottery processing, a special transition lottery mode one level higher is set. That is, if it is the first special transition lottery mode, it is set to the second special transition lottery mode, if it is the second special transition lottery mode, it is set to the third special transition lottery mode, and if it is the third special transition lottery mode, it is set to the second special transition lottery mode. Stay in lottery mode.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued (step S2602). As a result, the number of games that can be continued in the second special state ST24 is decremented by one. When the value of the second special continuation counter becomes "0" (step S2603: YES), a setting process for the base state is executed (step S2503). In the base state setting process, the ART state counter 106 is set to "2", which is information corresponding to the base state ST22. As a result, the game state shifts to the base state ST22. Further, in the base state setting process, the base continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "50", which is the initial number of continuable games in the base state ST22.

After that, similarly to step S2504 in the first special state process (FIG. 58(a)), wait timer setting processing is executed (step S2605). As a result, when the second special state ST24 ends, the start of the next game is forced to wait until the wait time at the end of the special state elapses in the same way as when the first special state ST23 ends. becomes possible.

After that, as in step S2505 in the first special state process (FIG. 58(a)), by reading the value of the transition number counter 108, the ART state ST20 will continue after the continuation condition of the current ART state ST20 is met. The total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 is grasped until the end (step S2606). Also, as in step S2506 in the first special state process (Fig. 58(a)), by reading out the value of the first total win counter 102, the game given to the player in this second special state ST24 The total number of media is grasped (step S2607). Also, similar to step S2507 in the first special state process (FIG. 58(a)), by reading the value of the second total acquisition number counter 103, the game media already given to the player in the current ART state ST20 is grasped (step S2608).

After that, a lottery process is executed to select an ending base image to be displayed on the image display device 63 when the second special state ST24 ends (step S2609). In the lottery process, an image selection lottery table corresponding to the current special transition lottery mode is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored. Although the details will be described later, the ending base images include a first ending base image, a second ending base image, and a special ending base image. In this case, the image selection lottery table corresponding to the first special transition lottery mode has the highest selection rate of the first ending base image set at 80%, and the selection rate of the second ending base image is set at 20%. , and the selection rate of the special ending base image is set to 0%. That is, no special ending base image is selected in the first special transition lottery mode. In addition, in the image selection lottery table corresponding to the second special transition lottery mode, the selection rate of the second ending base image is set at 60%, which is the highest, and the selection rate of the first ending base image is set at 40%. , and the selection rate of the special ending base image is set to 0%. That is, no special ending base image is selected in the second special transition lottery mode. In the image selection lottery table corresponding to the third special transition lottery mode, the selection rate of the special ending base image is set to 70%, which is the highest, and the selection rate of the first ending base image is set to 15%. , the selection rate of the second ending base image is set to 15%. In the lottery process for the ending base image, the value of the lottery counter for the ending base image that is periodically updated in a later-described work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74 is acquired, and the acquired value is used as the current special The current ending base image is selected by checking against the image selection lottery table corresponding to the shift lottery mode.

After that, a special state end command is read from an area in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored in the main-side ROM 73, and the values grasped in steps S2606 to S2608 are set in the special state end command. Information corresponding to the ending base image selected in step S2609 is set in the special end command, and the special state end command in which the setting of the information is completed is set as an output target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2610).

The special state end command set in step S2610 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). When the effect-side MPU 82 receives the special state end command, details will be described later. In the state where the ending base image is displayed, images corresponding to the values grasped in steps S2606 to S2608 are displayed.

<Processing configuration when transition to CB state ST3 occurs>
Next, a processing configuration when a shift to the CB state ST3 occurs will be described. As already explained, when the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established, the game shifts to the CB state ST3. In the game in which the first CB winning or the second CB winning has been established, the CB setting process is executed at step S1518 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing CB setting processing.

First, end processing of internal state notification is executed (step S2701). In the termination process, the internal state notification unit 68 is switched to the off state. As a result, the internal state notification unit 68 notifies that the internal state ST2 is not established. After that, setting processing for the CB state is executed (step S2702). In the CB state setting process, the state flags other than the CB state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the CB state flag is set to "1". As a result, the gaming state shifts to the CB state ST3. In the CB state ST3, the lottery table for the CB state is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12). In the CB state setting process, the CB continuation counter provided in the continuable number of games area 107 is set to "5", which is the initial number of continuable games in the CB state ST3. Further, in the CB state setting process, the number of game media required to start one game and the number of game media that can be betted to start one game are both set to "2". Set the registers of the MPU 72 .

After that, on condition that the value of the ART state counter 106 is 1 or more (step S2703: YES), the processing for ending the ART state ST20 shown in steps S2704 to S2710 is executed. Specifically, first, the value of the ART state counter 106 is cleared to "0" (step S2704). As a result, the ART state processing (step S1513) is not executed in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 44) from the next game. However, the values of the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first continuation counter, and the second continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued are not cleared to "0". As a result, when the ART state ST20 ends and the CB state ST3 is entered while the continuation condition is satisfied, the The number of games that can be continued in the game state in which the player is currently staying is held without being erased. When the ART state ST20 ends and the CB state ST3 is entered while the continuation condition is satisfied, the corresponding flag in the main RAM 74 may be set to "1".

Thereafter, wait timer setting processing is executed (step S2705). In the wait timer setting process, a value corresponding to the wait time at the end of the ART state is set in a wait timer provided in a later-described specific control work area 74 a in the main RAM 74 . The wait time at the end of the ART state is set to, for example, 20 seconds, but the specific time is arbitrary. Also, the value set in the wait timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is executed. If the value of the wait timer is 1 or more, the affirmative determination is made in step S312 in the normal processing (FIG. 10) as already described, forcing the start of the next game to wait. As a result, when the ART state ST20 ends, the start of the next game can be forced to wait until the wait time at the end of the ART state elapses.

After that, by determining whether any one of the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first continuation counter, and the second continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued is 1 or more, It is determined whether or not a transition to the CB state ST3 has occurred in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied (step S2706). If the continuation condition is satisfied (step S2706: YES), the first ART end command is read out from the area in which the data for the specific control described later in the main side ROM 73 is stored, and is set as an output target to the effect side MPU 82. (step S2707).

The first ART end command set in step S2707 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in command output processing (step S211) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). When receiving the first ART end command, the effect-side MPU 82 causes the image display device 63 to display an image indicating that the ART state ST20 has ended. In this case, as already explained, when the ART state ST20 ends and the state shifts to the CB state ST3, the start of the next game is forced to wait until the wait time at the end of the ART state elapses. It is possible for the player to reliably view the image indicating that the state ST20 has ended.

In addition, when receiving the first ART end command, the effect-side MPU 82 displays an image "The ART state has just ended due to an error in the pressing order" so that the player can recognize that the ART is in the middle end state. In order to save the player, the player wins the CB role and returns to the ART state when the winning is avoided." In this scroll display, when a transition from the post-CB RT state ST6 to the internal state ST2 occurs and the ART state ST20 is resumed, a transition from the post-CB RT state ST6 to the relief RT state ST7 occurs and the ART state ST20 is displayed. is resumed, or when a transition from the post-CB RT state ST6 to the normal state ST1 occurs and the benefits of the ART halfway end state are lost. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ART is in the mid-term end state, and to prevent the game from being stopped in spite of the ART being in the mid-term end state.

In addition, in a situation where any of the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first continuation counter, and the second continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued is 1 or more, the CB When the transition to the state ST3 causes the ART to end in the middle, even if the game is completed in the state of the ART to end in the middle, the ART state processing (step S1513) is performed in a situation other than the ART state ST20. is not executed, the value of the counter to be terminated prematurely is not decremented.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied (step S2706: NO), the second ART end command is read out from the area in which the data for the specific control described later in the main ROM 73 is stored, and is output to the effect side MPU 82. (step S2708). The second ART end command set in step S2708 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in command output processing (step S211) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). When receiving the second ART end command, the effect-side MPU 82 causes the image display device 63 to display an image indicating that the ART state ST20 has ended. In this case, as already explained, when the ART state ST20 ends and the state shifts to the CB state ST3, the start of the next game is forced to wait until the wait time at the end of the ART state elapses. It is possible for the player to reliably view the image indicating that the state ST20 has ended. In step S2708, the values of the second total acquisition number counter 103 and the transition number counter 108 are cleared to "0". As a result, the measured value of the total number of acquired game media in the ART state ST20 is cleared to "0", and the measured value of the total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 in the ART state ST20 becomes "0". ” is cleared.

When the process of step S2707 or step S2708 is executed, the ART signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2709), and the chance signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". set (step S2710). As a result, even if either the ART signal or the chance signal is being output from the external output terminal board 69, the output of the signal to be output is stopped.

When the processes of steps S2709 and S2710 are executed, the ART signal output start flag, the chance signal output start flag, the output delay flag 109, and the display delay flag 111 in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". As a result, when a transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the output standby state of the ART signal or the output standby state of the chance signal, the output standby state is terminated without outputting the signal that is the target of the output standby. be released. Further, when a shift to the CB state ST3 occurs in the standby state for switching to the lighting state of the internal state notification unit 68, the switching standby state is released without switching the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state.

Next, the CB process executed at step S1511 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the promotion lottery process of the ART shift lottery mode is executed (step S2801). In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table for the CB state is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored. In the promotion lottery table, the probability of winning promotion in the ART shift lottery mode is set to 20%. In the promotion lottery process, the value of the lottery counter for the ART transition lottery mode promotion lottery that is periodically updated in a work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is acquired, and the acquired value is used in the CB state. match against promotion lottery tables.

When promotion lottery processing in the ART transition lottery mode promotes winning (step S2802: YES), ART transition lottery mode setting processing is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, the ART transition lottery mode, which is one step higher, is set. That is, if it is the 1st ART transition lottery mode, it is set to the 2nd ART transition lottery mode, if it is the 2nd ART transition lottery mode, it is set to the 3rd ART transition lottery mode, and if it is the 3rd ART transition lottery mode, the lottery mode is maintained. .

When a negative determination is made in step S2802, or when the process of step S2803 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the CB continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games (step S2804). As a result, the number of games that can be continued in the CB state ST3 is decremented by one. When the value of the CB continuation counter becomes "0" (step S2805: YES), setting processing for post-CB RT state is executed (step S2806). In the post-CB RT state setting process, the state flags other than the post-CB RT state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the post-CB RT state flag is set to "1". As a result, the gaming state shifts to the post-CB RT state ST6. In the RT state after CB ST6, the lottery table for RT after CB (FIG. 40) is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12). In addition, in the post-CB RT state setting process, both the number of game media required to start one game and the number of game media that can be betted to start one game are set to "3". The registers of the main side MPU 72 are set.

Next, the processing configuration executed in the post-CB RT state ST6 and the relief RT state ST7 will be described.

In the post-CB RT state ST6, as already explained, if the index value IV=13 or 14 in the post-CB RT lottery table (FIG. 40) is won and the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established, the game state is reached. shifts to the relief RT state ST7. In this case, when the index value IV=13 or 14 is won in the halfway end state of the ART, the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is reported. If the index value IV=13 or 14 is won in a state where the ART is not in the middle end state, there is a possibility that the game state shifts although the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are not notified of the stop mode. A notification indicating that is executed.

Processing for executing the notification will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the replay winning informing process executed in step S1919 in the informing control process (FIG. 51). Note that the replay winning notification process is executed before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in each game.

If the lottery table for RT after CB (FIG. 40) wins the index value IV=13 or 14 (step S2901: YES), the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, and the second By determining whether one of the 1 continuation counter and the 2nd continuation counter is equal to or greater than 1, it is determined whether or not the ART is in the midway termination state (step S2902). If the ART is in the halfway finished state (step S2902: YES), a notification content grasping process for enabling establishment of the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is executed (step S2903). Specifically, when the index value IV=13 is won, the left reel 32L should be stopped for the first time and the symbol "red 7" should be stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. Corresponding information is set in the register of the main MPU 72 . Further, when the index value IV=14 is won, the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, and information corresponding to the notification indicating that the symbol "WHITE 7" should be stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. is set in the register of the main MPU 72 .

After that, the first display data setting process is executed (step S2904). In the first display data setting process, the data of the display contents corresponding to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R grasped in step S2903 is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored. , the display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, when the index value IV=13 is won, the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time and the symbol "red 7" should be stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L as a special display. It is started at the part 67, and indicates that the left reel 32L should be stopped for the first time and the symbol "WHITE 7" should be stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L when the index value IV=14 is won. Display is started in the special display portion 67 .

Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop mode command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2905). In this case, when the index value IV=13 is won, the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time and the "red 7" symbol is stopped on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L. is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored and set as a transmission target. Further, when the index value IV=14 is won, the stop mode command corresponding to the first stop of the left reel 32L and the stop of the "WHITE 7" symbol on the main line ML1 of the left reel 32L is issued. Data for specific control, which will be described later, is read out from the main-side ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. Various commands set in step S2905 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in command output processing (step S211) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

When the production-side MPU 82 receives these commands, it executes the processing of steps S2102 and S2108 in the already-described operation notification processing (FIG. 53), thereby establishing the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize. The image display device 63 is caused to display an image for notification that enables Specifically, when the stop mode command corresponding to the fact that the index value IV=13 is won is received, the image display device 63 displays an image for notification of "Aim for red 7 by pressing forward!" display. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the notification image, the first relief replay prize is established and the game state shifts to the relief RT state ST7. Further, when the stop mode command corresponding to the fact that the index value IV=14 is won is received, the image display device 63 displays an image for notification "Aim for white 7 by pressing forward!". By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the notification image, the second relief replay prize is established and the game state shifts to the relief RT state ST7.

On the other hand, if the ART is not halfway finished (step S2902: NO), the second display data setting process is executed (step S2906). In the setting process of the second display data, the data of the display contents corresponding to the notification indicating that there is a possibility that the game state is changed although the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified is stored in the main side ROM 73, which will be described later. The data for specific control is read out from the area where the data for specific control is stored, and the display control of the special display portion 67 is executed according to the data of the read display content. As a result, the special display portion 67 starts to display a notification indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will change, although the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified.

Thereafter, the notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2907). As already explained, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification on the image display device 63 . This set notification execution command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). When the effect-side MPU 82 receives only the notification execution command, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state occurs by executing the processing of steps S2105 and S2108 in the operation notification processing (FIG. 53) already described. An image indicating that is displayed on the image display device 63 . In this case, when the first replay win is established without both the first relief replay win and the second relief replay win being established, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1.

Next, the processing for executing notification corresponding to the winning of any CB combination in the post-CB RT state ST6 or the relief RT state ST7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the CB-winning informing process executed in step S1918 in the informing control process (FIG. 51). Note that the CB winning notification process is executed before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in each game.

In the post-CB RT state ST6 or the relief RT state ST7, if the first CB hand or the second CB hand is won (step S3001: YES), the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, and the first By determining whether or not any of the continuation counter and the second continuation counter is 1 or more, if the current state is the post-CB RT state ST6, it is determined whether or not the ART is in the middle end state. is the relief RT state ST7, it is determined whether or not the state is the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied (step S3002).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, processing for grasping notification contents corresponding to the type of CB is executed (step S3003). Specifically, when the first CB combination is won, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop, and the 4th “white 7” symbol to the 0th “cherry” symbol and the 20th “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L are displayed. Information corresponding to the notification indicating that the “replay 1” symbol to the 15th “replay 1” symbol should be stopped on the main line ML1 is set in the register of the main side MPU 72 . Further, when the second CB combination is won, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third position, and the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 5th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are placed on the main line ML1. Information corresponding to the notification indicating that the operation should be stopped is set in the register of the main MPU 72 .

After that, the first display data setting process is executed (step S3004). In the first display data setting process, the data of the display contents corresponding to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R grasped in step S3003 is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which the data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored. , the display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, when the first CB combination is won, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop, and the 4th "white 7" symbol to the 0th "cherry" symbol and the 20th "replay 1" symbol on the left reel 32L are displayed. ” symbol to 15th “replay 1” symbols are to be stopped on the main line ML1. 3 stops, the special display portion 67 starts to display that the 14th “red 7” symbol to the 5th “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L should be stopped on the main line ML1.

Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop mode command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S3005). In this case, when the first CB combination is won, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop, and the 4th "white 7" symbol to the 0th "cherry" symbol and the 20th "replay 1" on the left reel 32L. A stop mode command corresponding to stopping the "Replay 1" symbols of symbols to No. 15 on the main line ML1 is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored, and is transmitted. set. When the second CB combination is won, the left reel 32L is stopped at the third position, and the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 5th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are stopped on the main line ML1. A stop mode command corresponding to what should be done is read from an area in the main ROM 73 in which data for specific control, which will be described later, is stored, and is set as a transmission target. Various commands set in step S3005 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in command output processing (step S211) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

When the production-side MPU 82 receives these commands, it can avoid the establishment of the first CB prize and the second CB prize by executing the processing of steps S2102 and S2108 in the already-described operation notification processing (FIG. 53). The image display device 63 is caused to display an image for notification to be performed. Specifically, when the stop mode command corresponding to winning the first CB combination is received, the image display device 63 is caused to display an image for notification of "Aim for LUCKY by pushing backwards!". By stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in accordance with the notification image, establishment of the first CB prize is avoided and the game state shifts to the internal state ST2. Further, when a stop mode command corresponding to winning the second CB combination is received, the image display device 63 is caused to display an image for notification of "Aim for the BAR by pushing backwards!". By stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in accordance with the notification image, establishment of the second CB prize is avoided and the game state shifts to the internal state ST2.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3002, second display data setting processing is executed (step S3006). In the setting process of the second display data, the data of the display contents corresponding to the notification indicating that there is a possibility that the game state is changed although the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified is stored in the main side ROM 73, which will be described later. The data for specific control is read out from the area where the data for specific control is stored, and the display control of the special display portion 67 is executed according to the data of the read display content. As a result, the special display portion 67 starts to display a notification indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will change, although the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified.

After that, the notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S3007). As already explained, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the content of notification on the image display device 63 . This set notification execution command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). When the effect-side MPU 82 receives only the notification execution command, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state occurs by executing the processing of steps S2105 and S2108 in the operation notification processing (FIG. 53) already described. An image indicating that is displayed on the image display device 63 . In this case, when the first CB winning or the second CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state ST3.

Next, the CB post-processing executed in step S1519 of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the CB post-processing is executed after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in one game.

In the CB post-processing, in the post-CB RT state ST6 (step S3101: YES), if the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established (step S3102: YES), the setting processing for the relief RT state is executed. (step S3103). In the setting process for the rescue RT state, the state flags other than the rescue RT state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the rescue RT state flag is set to "1". As a result, the gaming state shifts to the relief RT state ST7. In the rescue RT state ST7, the lottery table for rescue RT (FIG. 42) is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12). In the relief RT state setting process, the relief RT continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "1000", which is the initial number of games that can be continued in the relief RT state ST7.

After that, by determining whether or not any of the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first continuation counter, and the second continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued is 1 or more, the ART It is determined whether or not it is in a halfway terminated state (step S3104). If ART is halfway terminated (step S3104: YES), ART return setting processing is executed (step S3105). In the ART return setting process, the game state corresponding to the counter set to a value of 1 or more among the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first special continuation counter, and the second special continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of continuable games. Numerical information of ST21 to ST24 is set in the ART state counter 106. For example, if the value of the chance continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART state counter 106 is set to "1" to shift to the chance state ST21, and if the value of the base continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART is set to shift to the base state ST22. The state counter 106 is set to "2", and if the value of the first special continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART state counter 106 is set to "3" to shift to the first special state ST23, and the second special continuation counter is set to "3". is greater than or equal to 1, the ART state counter 106 is set to "4" to shift to the second special state ST24. As a result, the player returns to the game state in which the player stayed in the previous ART state ST20.

Thereafter, an output start flag setting process is executed (step S3106). In the output start flag setting process, one of the chance signal output start flag and the ART signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Specifically, if the game state to return from the ART state ST20 this time is the chance state ST21, the output start flag of the chance signal is set to "1". As a result, output of the chance signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started. On the other hand, if the game state to return from in the ART state ST20 is any one of the base state ST22, the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24, the output start flag of the ART signal is set to "1". As a result, the output of the ART signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started.

If the ART state is not halfway finished (step S3104: NO), the ART state counter 106 is set to "1" (step S3107). As a result, the gaming state shifts to a rescue RT state ST7 and a chance state ST21. However, in this case, the chance continuation counter in the continuable number of games area 107 is not set to the value corresponding to the initial number of continuable games in the chance state ST21, and the value of the chance continuation counter is maintained at "0". be. That is, the state is ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. Thereafter, the chance signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3108). As a result, output of the chance signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started.

In the CB post-processing, in the post-CB RT state ST6, when the first replay winning corresponding to the falling replay winning is established (step S3109: YES), processing for clearing various counters for ART is executed (step S3110). Specifically, all of the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first continuation counter, and the second continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games are cleared to "0". As a result, even if the ART is in the middle end state, the index value IV=13 or 14 cannot be won in the post-CB RT state ST6, and the first relief replay winning prize and the second relief replay winning prize cannot be established. If one replay prize is established, the ART halfway ending state ends. In step S3110, the values of the second total acquisition number counter 103 and the transition number counter 108 are cleared to "0". As a result, the measured value of the total number of acquired game media in the ART state ST20 is cleared to "0", and the measured value of the total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 in the ART state ST20 becomes "0". ” is cleared.

Thereafter, setting processing for the normal state is executed (step S3111). In the normal state setting process, the state flags other than the normal state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the normal state flag is set to "1". As a result, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1. In the normal state ST1, the normal state lottery table (FIG. 23) is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12).

In the CB post-processing, in the rescue RT state ST7 (step S3112: YES), it is determined whether or not a dropout has occurred (step S3113). The falling number is a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main line ML1 when neither the normal bell winning nor the supplementary bell winning is established when winning with any of the index values IV = 2 to 10. That is. If a falling number has occurred (step S3113: YES), various counters for ART are cleared (step S3114) as in step S3110. As a result, even in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is established in the rescue RT state S7, the game state is changed to the normal state ST1 without entering the ART mid-term end state when a falling eye occurs. will be transferred. Also, as in step S3111, setting processing for the normal state is executed (step S3115). As a result, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1. In the normal state ST1, the normal state lottery table (FIG. 23) is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12). In step S3114, the values of the second total acquisition number counter 103 and the transition number counter 108 are cleared to "0". As a result, the measured value of the total number of acquired game media in the ART state ST20 is cleared to "0", and the measured value of the total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 in the ART state ST20 becomes "0". ” is cleared.

Thereafter, the ART signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3116), and the chance signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3117). As a result, even if either the ART signal or the chance signal is being output from the external output terminal board 69, the output of the signal to be output is stopped.

In the CB post-processing, if no falling number occurs in the relief RT state ST7 (step S3113: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the relief RT continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games (step S3118). ). As a result, the number of games that can be continued in the relief RT state ST7 is decremented by one. When the value of the relief RT continuation counter becomes "0" (step S3119: YES), the game state is shifted to the normal state ST1 by executing the processing of steps S3115 to S3117 already described.

Here, how the game state changes will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 64(a) shows the period of stay in the normal state ST1, FIG. 64(b) shows the period of stay in the ART state ST20, and FIG. 64(c) shows the stay in the CB state ST3. FIG. 64(d) shows the period of staying in RT state ST6 after CB, FIG. 64(e) shows the period of staying in relief RT state ST7, and FIG. FIG. 64(g) shows the timing of winning a combination that enables establishment of the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize.

First, the case where the first replay win is established in the post-CB RT state ST6 and the game state shifts to the normal state ST1 will be described. 64(a), 64(b), and 64(f) when any of the CB wins are won in the normal state ST1 at the timing of t1 and the winning of the won CB win is not established. As shown, the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the internal state ST2 and the ART state ST20. After that, at the timing of t2, the winning of the CB combination with the winning data carried over at the timing of t1 is established, and as shown in FIG. 64(b), FIG. 64(c) and FIG. The state changes from the internal state ST2 and the ART state ST20 to the CB state ST3. After that, at the timing of t3, the number of games that can be continued in the CB state ST3 becomes "0", so that the gaming state changes from the CB state ST3 to the RT after CB as shown in FIGS. It shifts to state ST7.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 64(g), a winning combination that enables establishment of the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is won. However, the first replay winning prize is established because the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in such a manner that the first relief replay winning prize and the second relief replay winning prize cannot be established. In this case, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(d), the game state shifts from the post-CB RT state ST6 to the normal state ST1.

Next, the case where the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established in the post-CB RT state ST6 and the game state shifts to the relief RT state ST7 will be described. 64(a), 64(b) and 64(f) because any winning of the CB role is not established in the normal state ST1 at the timing of t5. As shown, the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the internal state ST2 and the ART state ST20. After that, at the timing of t6, the winning of the CB combination with the winning data carried over at the timing of t5 is established, and as shown in FIG. 64(b), FIG. The state changes from the internal state ST2 and the ART state ST20 to the CB state ST3. After that, at the timing of t7, the number of games that can be continued in the CB state ST3 becomes "0", so that the gaming state changes from the CB state ST3 to the RT after CB as shown in FIGS. It shifts to state ST7.

After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 64(g), a winning combination that enables establishment of the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is won. The stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is a mode enabling establishment of the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize, whereby the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established. . In this case, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIGS. 64(b), 64(d) and 64(e), the game state changes from post-CB RT state ST6 to relief RT state ST7 and ART state ST20. transition to a state where After that, at the timing of t9, one of the CB roles is won and the winning of the won CB role is not established, as shown in FIG. 64(b), FIG. 64(e) and FIG. Then, the state of the relief RT state ST7 and the ART state ST20 is changed to the state of the internal state ST2 and the ART state ST20. In this case, the state of ART state ST20 in relief RT state ST7 is inherited as it is in ART state ST20 in internal state ST2.

<Display contents of the ending image>
Next, the ending image displayed on the image display device 63 when the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 ends will be described. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the ending image displayed on the image display device 63. FIG.

When the ending image is displayed as shown in FIG. 65, the image display device 63 displays the ending base images 141a to 141c and various character images 142, 143, 144, 145. FIG. In the ending base images 141a to 141c, an image is displayed in which an individual image representing an animal or non-animal object such as a person, cat, fish, or dog exists in front of a predetermined background image. For example, in the ending base images 141a to 141c, a character image of a girl is displayed as an individual image that appears to exist in front of a predetermined background image. As image data for displaying the ending base images 141a to 141c, the character ROM 151 provided on the effect control board 81 stores the first ending base image 141a for displaying the first ending base image 141a as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 1 ending base image data 152, second ending base image data 153 for displaying the second ending base image 141b, and special ending base image data 154 for displaying the special ending base image 141c are provided. .

By using the first ending base image data 152 to display the ending base images 141a to 141c, the first ending base image 141a as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 67(a) is displayed. Also, by using the second ending base image data 153 to display the ending base images 141a to 141c, the second ending base image 141b as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 67(b) is displayed. Also, by using the special ending base image data 154 to display the ending base images 141a to 141c, the special ending base image 141c is displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 67(c). The first ending base image 141a, the second ending base image 141b, and the special ending base image 141c have different types of background images as shown in FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c). The types of individual images that are displayed as if they exist in front of a predetermined background image are different. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish which of the first ending base image 141a, the second ending base image 141b, and the special ending base image 141c is being displayed.

Here, as already explained, in the first special state processing (FIG. 58(a)) of the main MPU 72, only the special ending base image 141c is selected as the ending base image to be displayed when the first special state ST23 ends. When the first special state ST23 is terminated and the game returns to the base state ST22, the special transition lottery mode will surely become the third special transition lottery mode. Also, as already explained, in the lottery process (step S2609) for the ending base image in the second special state process (FIG. 58(b)) of the main MPU 72, the second special state ST24 ends only in the third special transition lottery mode. A special ending base image 141c may be selected as the ending base image to be displayed in the case. As a result, when the special ending base image 141c is displayed as the ending image when the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 ends, the third special transition lottery mode is determined. As already explained, the special transition lottery mode is a mode that determines the probability of transition to the second special state ST24 in the base state ST22. The transition probability to state ST24 is the highest. In this case, by displaying the special ending base image 141c only when the third special transition lottery mode is selected, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority when the special ending base image 141c is displayed. .

As already described, in the ending base image lottery process (step S2609) in the second special state process (FIG. 58(b)) of the main MPU 72, even in the third special transition lottery mode, the first ending base image 141a and A second ending base image 141b may be selected. As a result, even if the first ending base image 141a or the second ending base image 141b is displayed when the second special state ST24 ends, the player's expectation for the third special transition lottery mode is increased. It can be sustained.

As already explained, in the ending base image lottery process (step S2609) in the second special state process (FIG. 58(b)) of the main MPU 72, the selection rate of the special ending base image 141c in the third special transition lottery mode is is the highest, the selection rate of the second ending base image 141b is the highest in the second special transition lottery mode, and the selection rate of the first ending base image 141a is the highest in the first special transition lottery mode. As a result, it is possible to suggest the type of the special transition lottery mode to the player by the type of the ending base images 141a to 141c displayed when the second special state ST24 ends.

As the various character images 142 to 145, as shown in FIG. 65, an end notification character image 142 indicating that the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 has ended, and a continuation condition of the current ART state ST20 are satisfied. The total number of times character image 143 showing the total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 from the ART state ST20 to the end of the ART state ST20, and the total number of times character image 143 that is given to the player in the first special state ST23 this time. A character image 144 indicating the total number of game media received and a total character image 145 indicating the total number of game media already given to the player in the current ART state ST20 are present. . In the character ROM 151 of the effect control board 81, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. an image data group 156 for displaying a character image 144 of the number obtained during bonus, and a group of image data 157 for displaying the number obtained during bonus for displaying a character image 145 of the total number obtained An image data group 158 is provided.

By using the end notification image data 155, as shown in FIG. 65, the end notification character image 142 "END" is displayed as if it exists in front of the ending base images 141a to 141c. As a result, the end notification character image 142 can be conspicuous in the ending image, and the player can clearly recognize that the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 has ended.

By using the image data contained in the image data group 156 for displaying the total number of times, as shown in FIG. 65, the total number of times character image 143 such as "bonus total 8 times" is present in front of the ending base images 141a to 141c. appears as if This makes it possible to make the total count character image 143 stand out in the ending image. In the first special state ST23, the total count character image 143 contains the value read from the transition count counter 108 of the main RAM 74 in step S2505 in the first special state process (FIG. 58(a)). The corresponding total number of times is displayed, and if it is the second special state ST24, it corresponds to the value read from the transition number counter 108 of the main side RAM 74 in step S2606 in the second special state process (FIG. 58(b)). The total number of times is displayed. This allows the player to clearly recognize the total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 from when the continuation condition of the current ART state ST20 is established until the ART state ST20 ends. becomes possible.

By using the image data included in the image data group 157 for displaying the number obtained during the bonus, as shown in FIG. ∼ 141c are displayed as if they exist in front of them. This makes it possible to make the character image 144 of the number of characters obtained during the bonus stand out in the ending image. Also, in the bonus character image 144, if it is the first special state ST23, it is read from the first total number counter 102 of the main side RAM 74 in step S2506 in the first special state processing (FIG. 58(a)). The acquired number corresponding to the output value is displayed, and if it is the second special state ST24, the first total acquired number counter 102 of the main side RAM 74 is read at step S2607 in the second special state process (FIG. 58(b)). The number of acquisitions corresponding to the read value is displayed. This allows the player to clearly recognize the total number of game media awarded to the player in the current first special state ST23 or second special state ST24.

By using the image data contained in the image data group 158 for displaying the total number of acquisitions, as shown in FIG. Appears to be in front of you. This makes it possible to make the total acquisition number character image 145 stand out in the ending image. In addition, in the first special state ST23, the total acquired number character image 145 is read from the second total acquired number counter 103 of the main side RAM 74 in step S2507 in the first special state process (FIG. 58(a)). If it is the second special state ST24, it is read from the second total number counter 103 of the main side RAM 74 at step S2608 in the second special state processing (FIG. 58(b)). The number of wins corresponding to the given value is displayed. This allows the player to clearly recognize the total number of game media that have already been given to the player in the current ART state ST20.

The various character images 142 to 145 are displayed so as not to overlap each other in the ending image. This makes it possible to ensure the visibility of the various character images 142-145.

In the configuration in which the ending images are displayed as described above, the present slot machine 10 allows the player to adjust whether or not the various character images 142 to 145 are displayed and the manner in which they are displayed. However, the player can adjust the display mode of the ending base images 141a to 141c of the type to be displayed. The manner in which the ending image is adjusted will be described with reference to FIGS. 68(a) to 68(d).

As for the adjustment modes of the various character images 142 to 145, for example, the display position can be changed from the initial display position and the display size can be changed from the initial display size as shown in FIG. 68(a). In the case of FIG. 68(a), when the special ending base image 141c and the end notification character image 142 are displayed in the initial display state, the total number character image 143, the bonus character image 144, and the total number character The image 145 is displayed in a smaller size than the initial display size shown in FIG. 65(a), and the display position is changed to the corner side of the image display device 63 from the initial display position shown in FIG. 65(a). there is As a result, while the various character images 142 to 145 continue to be displayed, the central portion of the special ending base image 141c can be prevented from being hidden by the various character images 142 to 145, and the various character images 142 to 145 It is possible to reduce the area where the special ending base image 141c is hidden.

Note that the display position and display size of the end notification character image 142 can also be changed. In addition, it is possible to change the display position and display size of only one of the end notification character image 142, total number character image 143, bonus character image 144, and total number character image 145. It is possible to change the display position and display size by combining various character images 142 to 145 arbitrarily. In addition, it is possible to display the various character images 142 to 145 in a larger size than the initial display size, to reduce the display of the various character images 142 to 144 once displayed in an enlarged manner, and to display the various character images in a reduced display once. 142 to 145 can be enlarged and displayed.

In the case of FIG. 68(b), in a situation where the special ending base image 141c is displayed in the initial display state, the end notification character image 142, the total count character image 143, and the bonus number character image 144 are hidden. At the same time, the total acquisition number character image 145 is displayed in a smaller size than the initial display size shown in FIG. The display position has changed. As a result, it is possible to continue displaying the total acquired number character image 145 while reducing the area hidden by the various character images 142 to 145 in the special ending base image 141c.

Note that only one of the end notification character image 142, the total count character image 143, the bonus character image 144, and the total win count character image 145 can be hidden, and any combination can be hidden. can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display again the various character images 142 to 145 that were once hidden.

In the case of FIG. 68(c), all of the various character images 142 to 145 are hidden while the special ending base image 141c is displayed in the initial display state. This makes it possible to prevent the entire special ending base image 141c from being hidden by the various character images 142-145. Various character images 142 to 145 that have been temporarily hidden can be displayed again.

In the case of FIG. 68(d), all the character images 142 to 145 are hidden, and the special ending base image 141c is partially enlarged from the initial display state. This makes it possible to highlight the partial area in the special ending base image 141c. However, even in this case, the special ending base image 141 c is displayed over the entire image display device 63 .

It is possible to enlarge and display any area of the special ending base image 141c. Also, it is possible to restore the special ending base image 141c to the initial display state. In addition, it is possible to display the special ending base image 141c in a smaller size than in the initial display state. It is possible to display it as a partial area of the image 141c.

How the display mode of the ending image is adjusted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 69(a) shows the rotation period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game in the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24, and FIG. 69(b) shows the period of staying in the base state ST22. 69(c) shows the start timing of one game, FIG. 69(d) shows the display period of the ending image, FIG. 69(e) shows the period during which the start of one game is restricted, and FIG. f) indicates the period during which an explanation image indicating that the display mode of the ending image can be adjusted is displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 69(g) indicates the period during which the display mode of the ending image can be adjusted. show. Note that the situation in FIG. 69 is a situation in which the special ending base image 141c is displayed as the ending base image.

At timing t1, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R of the final game in the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 are finished rotating as shown in FIG. 69(a). In this case, at the timing t1, the display of the ending image on the image display device 63 is started as shown in FIG. 69(d), and the start of a new game is restricted as shown in FIG. 69(e). . In this case, the special ending base image 141c is displayed in the initial size on the image display device 63, and the various character images 142 to 145 are displayed in the initial size and the initial display position.

At the timing of t1, the explanation period starts as shown in FIG. 69(f). During the explanation period, it is possible to adjust the display mode of the ending image in the explanation image display area 146 (see FIG. 65) set in the corner portion of the image display device 63, and an effect operation for performing the adjustment is performed. A character image for explaining the operation mode of the device 64 is displayed by scrolling in a certain direction (specifically, in the horizontal direction). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the display mode of the ending image can be adjusted and how to operate the effect operation device 64 for performing the adjustment. Incidentally, the explanatory image display area 146 is displayed so as not to overlap the individual images and various character images 142 to 145 displayed in the special ending base image 141c. As a result, it is possible to display the explanation image display area 146 while preventing the visibility of the individual image of the special ending base image 141c and the various character images 142 to 145 from being lowered.

After that, when 15 seconds have passed since the ending image started to be displayed at timing t2, the explanation period ends as shown in FIG. 69(f), and the ending image is displayed as shown in FIG. A period in which the display mode can be adjusted is started. In this case, at the timing t2, the start of a new game is still restricted as shown in FIG. 69(e). As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the adjustment method of the display mode of the ending image in a situation where the start of a new game is restricted, and the ending image in a situation where the start of a new game is restricted. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to adjust the display mode of the. When the explanation period ends, the display of the explanation image display area 146 on the image display device 63 ends.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the state in which the start of a new game is restricted is lifted. Then, at timing t4, a new game start operation is performed as shown in FIG. At the same time, the display of the ending image on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 69(d), and the game starts in the base state ST22 as shown in FIG. 69(b).

Hereinafter, the processing configuration in the effect-side MPU 82 for enabling the display of the ending image as described above will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the ending display control process executed by the MPU 82 on the effect side. The ending display control process is executed, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec.

If it is not the period during which the ending image is displayed (step S3201: NO), if a special state end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3202: YES), from the special state end command, this The total number of occurrences of the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24 that occurred after the continuation condition of the ART state ST20 was established is grasped (step S3203). Also, from the special state end command, the total number of game media awarded to the player in the current first special state ST23 or second special state ST24 is grasped (step S3204). Also, from the special state end command, the total number of game media already given to the player in the current ART state ST20 is grasped (step S3205). Also, the type of the ending base images 141a to 141c to be displayed in the current ending image is grasped from the special state end command (step S3206).

After that, the image display device 63 starts displaying the ending image corresponding to the grasped result of steps S3203 to S3206 (step S3207). As a result, in a state where the ending base images 141a to 141c ascertained in step S3206 are displayed in the initial size, the end notification character image 142 is displayed in the initial size and in the initial display position, and the value ascertained in step S3203 is displayed. is displayed in the initial size and the initial display position, and the bonus winning number character image 144 corresponding to the value grasped in step S3204 is displayed in the initial size and the initial display position. The total acquisition number character image 145 corresponding to the value grasped in S3205 is displayed in the initial size and the initial display position.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special ending base image 141c is to be displayed in the current ending image (step S3208). When the special ending base image 141c is to be displayed, the explanation display start setting process is executed (step S3209), and the first ending base image 141a or the second ending base image 141b is displayed instead of the special ending base image 141c. If it is to be displayed, the explanation display start setting process is not executed.

Here, adjustment of the display mode of the ending image is possible when the special ending base image 141c is to be displayed, and the first ending base image 141a and the second ending base image 141b are to be displayed. is not possible in some cases. This makes it possible to enhance the feeling of superiority when the special ending base image 141c is displayed. Then, in response to the fact that the display mode of the ending image can be adjusted only when the special ending base image 141c is displayed, the description display is set to start only when the special ending base image 141c is displayed. Processing is performed. In the explanation display start setting process, it is possible to adjust the display mode of the ending image, and to scroll the character image in the explanation image display area 146 for explaining the operation mode of the production operation device 64 for performing the adjustment. start the display. Note that when the first ending base image 141a and the second ending base image 141b are to be displayed, the explanation display start setting process is not executed. is to be displayed, the explanation image display area 146 is not displayed.

If it is the period during which the ending image is displayed (step S3201: YES), if it is the explanation period (step S3210: YES), the process for updating the explanation display is executed to update the explanation period in the explanation image display area 146. is updated (step S3211). If a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3212: YES) while the ending image is being displayed (step S3201: YES), the display of the ending image on the image display device 63 is terminated. (Step S3213). Also, if the ending image is being displayed (step S3201: YES) and not the explanation period (step S3210: NO), the special ending base image 141c is to be displayed (step S3214). : YES), the control process for the adjustable period is executed (step S3215).

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing control processing for the adjustable period.

If any of the character images 142 to 145 has been moved to the effect operating device 64 (step S3301: YES), layout adjustment processing corresponding to the movement operation is executed (step S3302). . The moving operation can be performed individually for each of the various character images 142-145. By executing the layout adjustment process, the display positions of the character images 142 to 145 that are the targets of the movement operation are changed from the display positions up to that point.

If any one of the character images 142 to 145 has been erased on the effect operating device 64 (step S3303: YES), erasing adjustment processing corresponding to the erasing operation is executed (step S3304). . The erasing operation can be performed individually for each of the various character images 142-145. By executing the erase adjustment process, the display of the character images 142 to 145 targeted for the erase operation is ended.

If a redisplay operation of the character images 142 to 145 to be erased has been performed on the production operating device 64 (step S3305: YES), redisplay adjustment processing corresponding to the redisplay operation is performed. Execute (step S3306). The redisplay operation can be performed for each of the character images 142 to 145 to be erased. By executing the redisplay adjustment process, the display of the character images 142 to 145 targeted for the redisplay operation is resumed.

If the special ending base image 141c or one of the character images 142 to 145 is being enlarged and displayed on the production operating device 64 (step S3307: YES), enlargement adjustment corresponding to the enlarged display operation is performed. Processing is executed (step S3308). The enlargement display operation can be performed individually for each of the special ending base image 141c and various character images 142-145. Further, when an enlargement display operation is performed, designation of a dot that is the center of enlargement and an enlargement ratio are designated by operating the operating device 64 for presentation. By executing the enlargement adjustment process, the display size of the special ending base image 141c or the character images 142 to 145, which is the object of the enlargement display operation, is enlarged from the previous display size.

If the special ending base image 141c or one of the character images 142 to 145 has been reduced to display on the production operating device 64 (step S3309: YES), the reduction adjustment corresponding to the reduced display operation is performed. Processing is executed (step S3310). The reduced display operation can be performed individually for each of the special ending base image 141c and various character images 142-145. In addition, when a reduced display operation is performed, designation of the dot that will be the center of the reduction and reduction ratio are designated by operating the operating device 64 for presentation. By executing the reduction adjustment process, the display size of the special ending base image 141c or the character images 142 to 145, which is the target of the reduction display operation, is reduced from the previous display size.

<Distinction between specific control and non-specific control>
Next, the difference between specific control and non-specific control executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the slot machine 10, of the various controls executed by the main MPU 72, part of the control related to fraud monitoring is non-specific control, and the game progresses based on the other control related to fraud monitoring and game operations by the player. Control other than non-specific control is defined as specific control, including control for causing Specifically, the specific control includes control by main processing (FIG. 8) that is executed when supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and control by timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) that is periodically executed. are included in specific controls. Also, except for the first non-specific control process and second non-specific control process executed in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) and the third non-specific control process executed in the reel control process (FIG. 19), normal Control by the process (FIG. 10), for example, lottery process for a combination executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, driving control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and provision of benefits when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate. Controls are contained in specific controls.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in the main-side ROM 73. As shown in FIG. In correspondence with the fact that the control executed by the main MPU 72 is classified into specific control and non-specific control, as shown in FIG. The addresses of the areas in which the data, programs for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored are clearly distinguished. Specifically, specific control programs are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses X(1) to X(k+2). Further, addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5) consecutive to addresses X(1) to X(k+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored. Specific control data are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from k+6) to X(m+2). Addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) following addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored. m+6) to X(n+2), programs for non-specific control are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses. Addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) following addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are addresses of unused areas in which data is not stored. n+6) to X(p+2), data for non-specific control are collectively stored in each continuous address area. In addition, the relationship between the programs and data and the addresses as described above is set in both the physical addresses in the main ROM 73 and the logical addresses on the memory map recognized in the main MPU 72 .

As described above, the specific control program and specific control data, and the non-specific control program and non-specific control data, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls, Since they are stored in areas with different ranges of addresses, when checking only a specific control program and specific control data, for example, the addresses where these specific control programs and specific control data are stored can be used. It is sufficient to check only the area of the range. For example, when checking only the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, the address where the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored. Only the area of coverage needs to be checked. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform work when checking programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. In addition, along with this, it becomes possible to efficiently perform the work for correcting programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control.

No data is stored between the address range of the area in which the specific control program and specific control data are stored and the address range of the area in which the non-specific control program and non-specific control data are stored. By setting the address range of the unused area, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control in the checking work.

In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in areas of different ranges of addresses, regardless of the execution order of processes for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it becomes possible to efficiently perform work when checking programs and data separately. In addition, since the address range of an unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area in which the program is stored and the address range of the area in which the data is stored, the program This makes it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range and the data address range during the checking work.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how each area in the main RAM 74 is set. In correspondence with the fact that the control executed by the main MPU 72 is distinguished between specific control and non-specific control, the main RAM 74 also has a work area 74a for specific control and a specific control The address range of the stack area 74b for non-specific control and the address range of the non-specific control work area 74c and the non-specific control stack area 74d are clearly distinguished. Specifically, an area of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) is set as a work area 74a for specific control. Addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) following addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) are addresses of unused areas. ) is set as a stack area 74b for specific control. Addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5) following addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) are addresses of unused areas. ) is set as a non-specific control work area 74c. Addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) following addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are addresses of unused areas. ) is set as a stack area 74d for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 74 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main MPU 72 .

Since the work area 74a for specific control and the work area 74c for non-specific control are separately set as described above, when the main MPU 72 executes the specific control and when the non-specific control is executed, Different areas of the main side RAM 74 are used. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event in which necessary data in the main-side RAM 74 is erased in the other.

Since the stack area 74b for specific control and the stack area 74d for non-specific control are set separately, data stored in the registers of the main MPU 72 can be saved when specific control is executed. Different areas are used when executing non-specific control and when saving data stored in the registers of the main MPU 72 . As a result, when the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is saved under the condition that one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, the data saved in the register of the main MPU 72 is erased under the other control. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event such as being done.

Next, the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process executed by the main MPU 72 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data will be described. First, the first non-specific control process will be described.

The first non-specific control process is executed at step S412 in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) as already described. Specifically, when the first non-specific control process is started, the specific control program is specified to call the first non-specific control process, the first non-specific control process executed by using the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control is started. That is, the process of calling the first non-specific control process is set in the specific control program, and the first non-specific control process is set in the non-specific control program. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the first non-specific control process.

In the first non-specific control process, first, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is prohibited (step S3401). Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is included in processing executed in specific control as already explained. By prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when the first non-specific control process is started, the process corresponding to the specific control is executed while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. no need to run.

After that, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3402). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the first non-specific control process is executed is saved separately. As will be described later, when the first non-specific control process ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned to, the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. As a result, when the first non-specific control process ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed, the data state of the register of the main side MPU 72 is restored to the state before the first non-specific control process was started. It is possible to

After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( step S3403). When the first non-specific control process ends, the value of this stack pointer is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control, so that the data to be returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74b for specific control is It becomes possible to specify the range of the stored area.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3404). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for non-specific control, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area is specified. is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3405). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state in which the non-specific control was executed last time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a is ON (step S3406). The flag is set to "1" (step S3407). The state in which the first insertion detection flag is set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b changes from detecting medals to not detecting them. . When a negative determination is made in step S3406, or when the process of step S3407 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is ON (step S3408). When the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is ON (step S3408: YES), it is determined whether or not the first inserted medal detection flag is set to "1" (step S3409).

If the first inserted medal detection flag is not set to "1" (step S3409: NO), the second inserted medal is detected after the medal is detected by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a if the medal is inserted normally. Medals should have been detected by the sensor 45b, but medals were detected by the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b in a situation where medals were not detected by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a. becomes. In this case, there is a possibility that the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b have erroneously detected the passage of medals by using an illegal jig. Therefore, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 (step S3410). It should be noted that the longest execution cycle of the first non-specific control process in the state where the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is being executed is the shortest period during which medals are detected by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a. The shortest period from the start of detection of medals by the medal detection sensor 45a to the start of detection of medals by the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the detection of medals by the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is set shorter than any of the shortest

The effect-side MPU 82 receives the abnormality notification command, and uses the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to perform abnormality notification corresponding to the fact that the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b have been tampered with. This abnormality notification state indicates that the key cylinder 14 has been unlocked in the abnormality cancellation determination process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) executed after the first non-specific control process ends. is specified, when it is specified that the reset button 56 has been operated, an abnormality release command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 82 to cancel. That is, the monitoring process to determine whether or not to cancel the abnormality notification and the canceling process to cancel the abnormality notification, which are started under the non-specific control, are executed as the specific control. Since the main MPU 72 is set so that the period during which the specific control is executed is longer than the period during which the non-specific control is executed, by executing the monitoring process and the canceling process as the specific control, an abnormality It becomes possible to cancel the abnormality notification immediately when the cancellation operation of the notification is performed. Note that the key cylinder 14 is provided with a sensor for identifying that the release operation has been performed, and the detection signal of this sensor is input to the main side MPU 72 .

After transmitting the abnormality notification command, 1 is added to the value of the injection abnormality counter provided in the non-specific control work area 74c in the main RAM 74 (step S3411). Then, when the value of the insertion abnormality counter is "3" or more (step S3412: YES), the progress of the game is stopped by an infinite loop. This operation prohibited state is released by executing the all clear processing (step S104).

Incidentally, the input abnormality counter is cleared to "0" when the first non-specific control process is executed 40000 times or when the main side RAM 74 is initialized. When the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is repeatedly executed without the game being started, it takes about 40 seconds to execute the first non-specific control process 40000 times. Thus, in the configuration in which the progress of the game is stopped when an abnormal action to the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b occurs a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, clearing the insertion abnormality counter to "0" is executed as a process of non-specific control. becomes possible.

When a negative determination is made in step S3408, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3409, or when a negative determination is made in step S3412, the data in all the registers of the main MPU 72 are transferred to the non-specific control stack in the main RAM 74. It is saved to the area 74d (step S3413). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before returning from the first non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control is saved separately. As already explained, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the stack area 74 d for non-specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . As a result, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the non-specific control data state.

After that, the value of the non-specific control stack pointer for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is stored in the non-specific control work area 74 c in the main RAM 74 . (step S3414). When the process corresponding to non-specific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control, and is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74d for non-specific control. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be processed is stored.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3415). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for specific control, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the data is stored in the range of the specified area. The stored data is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3416). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the specific control state immediately before the current first non-specific control process is started.

Thereafter, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3417). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started periodically. Then, the first non-specific control process ends. When the first non-specific control process ends, step S413 in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is executed using the specific control program. It should be noted that the data indicating that step S413 is the process to be returned in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) when the first non-specific control process is completed is the specific control process before the first non-specific control process is started. is stored in the work area 74a for. However, the data may be stored in the non-specific control work area 74c.

Next, the second non-specific control process will be described.

The second non-specific control process is executed at step S416 in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) as already described. Specifically, when the second non-specific control process is started, the specific control program is specified to call the second non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process executed by using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data is started. That is, the process of calling the second non-specific control process is set in the specific control program, and the second non-specific control process is set in the non-specific control program. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the second non-specific control process.

In the second non-specific control process, first, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is prohibited (step S3501). Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is included in processing executed in specific control as already explained. By prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when the second non-specific control process is started, the process corresponding to the specific control is executed while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. no need to run.

After that, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3502). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the second non-specific control process is executed is saved separately. As will be described later, when the second non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. As a result, when the second non-specific control process ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed, the data state of the register of the main side MPU 72 is restored to the state before the second non-specific control process was started. It is possible to

After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( step S3503). When the second non-specific control processing ends, the value of this stack pointer is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control, so that the data to be returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74b for specific control is It becomes possible to specify the range of the stored area.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3504). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for non-specific control, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area is specified. is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3505). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state in which the non-specific control was executed last time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 56 has been operated while the key cylinder 14 is not being unlocked (step S3506). As already explained, the state in which the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 are announcing an abnormality can be canceled by operating the reset button 56 together with unlocking the key cylinder 14 . In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent person thinks that the state in which the abnormality notification is being executed can be canceled by operating the reset button 56 without performing the unlocking operation for the key cylinder 14. For example, in order to cancel the execution state of the abnormality notification that has been started by performing a fraudulent act on the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, the jig for fraud is removed from the housing without performing the unlocking operation for the key cylinder 14. 11 and illegally operating the reset button 56. When such an action is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, and an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 (step S3507).

The production-side MPU 82 receives the abnormality notification command, and uses the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to perform abnormality notification corresponding to the unauthorized operation of the reset button 56 . After that, the progress of the game is stopped by entering an infinite loop. This operation prohibited state is released by executing the all clear processing (step S104).

If a negative determination is made in step S3506, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the non-specific control stack area 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S3508). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before returning from the second non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control is saved separately. As already explained, when the second non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the stack area 74 d for non-specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . As a result, when the second non-specific control process is started, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the non-specific control data state.

After that, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74d for non-specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. (step S3509). When the process corresponding to non-specific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control, and is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74d for non-specific control. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be processed is stored.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3510). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for specific control, the range of the area where the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 is specified, and stored in the range of the specified area. The stored data is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3511). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the specific control state immediately before the current second non-specific control process is started.

Thereafter, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3512). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started periodically. Then, the second non-specific control process ends. When the second non-specific control process ends, step S304 in the normal process (FIG. 10) is executed using the specific control program. It should be noted that the data indicating that the process to be returned to when the second non-specific control process ends is step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 10) is the data for the specific control before the second non-specific control process is started. is stored in the work area 74a. However, the data may be stored in the non-specific control work area 74c.

Next, the third non-specific control process will be described.

The third non-specific control process is executed at step S1101 in the reel stop process (FIG. 19) as already described. In detail about the case where the third non-specific control process is started, the specific control program is specified to call the third non-specific control process, the third non-specific control process executed by using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data is started. That is, the process of calling the third non-specific control process is set in the specific control program, and the third non-specific control process is set in the non-specific control program. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the third non-specific control process.

In the third non-specific control process, first, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is prohibited (step S3601). Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is included in processing executed in specific control as already explained. By prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when the third non-specific control process is started, the process corresponding to the specific control is executed while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. no need to run.

After that, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3602). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the execution of the third non-specific control process is saved as it is. As will be described later, when the third non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. As a result, when the third non-specific control process ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed, the data state of the register of the main side MPU 72 is restored to the state before the third non-specific control process was started. It is possible to

After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( step S3603). When the third non-specific control processing ends, the value of this stack pointer is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control, so that the data to be returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74b for specific control is It becomes possible to specify the range of the stored area.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3604). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for non-specific control, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area is specified. is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3605). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state in which the non-specific control was executed last time.

After that, it is determined whether or not one of the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is ON (step S3606). As already explained, in the normal processing (FIG. 10), the acceptance prohibition processing (step S306) is executed before starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a matter of fact, medals are not detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. In this situation, if one of the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is ON, there is a high possibility that an illegal jig has been inserted from the medal insertion slot 45. FIG. Therefore, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3606, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 (step S3607).

Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the effect-side MPU 82 uses the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to perform abnormality notification corresponding to the fact that the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b have been tampered with. After that, the progress of the game is stopped by entering an infinite loop. This operation prohibited state is released by executing the all clear processing (step S104).

If a negative determination is made in step S3606, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the non-specific control stack area 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S3608). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before returning from the third non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control is saved separately. As already explained, when the third non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the stack area 74 d for non-specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . As a result, when the third non-specific control process is started, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the non-specific control data state.

After that, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74d for non-specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. (step S3609). When the process corresponding to non-specific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control, and is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74d for non-specific control. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be processed is stored.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3610). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for specific control, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the data is stored in the range of the specified area. The stored data is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3611). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the specific control state immediately before the current third non-specific control process is started.

Thereafter, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3612). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started periodically. Then, the third non-specific control process ends. When the third non-specific control process ends, step S1102 in the reel stop process (FIG. 19) is executed using the specific control program. It should be noted that the data indicating that step S1102 is the process to be restored in the reel stop processing (FIG. 19) when the third non-specific control processing is completed is the specific control processing before the third non-specific control processing is started. is stored in the work area 74a for. However, the data may be stored in the non-specific control work area 74c.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a game state other than the internal state ST2, when a CB role is won, no other role is won, and in a situation where only the CB role is won, the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is specified. In the case of the stop mode, none of the winnings including the first CB winning and the second CB winning are established. On the other hand, in the internal state ST2 in which the state of winning the CB combination is carried over, if any of the index values IV = 2 to 10 is won, depending on the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the normal bell Winning or compensating bell winning is established, and CB winning is certainly established when both of these normal bell winning and compensating bell winning are not established. This makes it possible to change not only the type of winning, but also the presence or absence of winning depending on the relationship with other winning roles, even if the situation is common in that the CB role is won. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which winnings are established. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the situation where only the CB role is won as described above, the winning of the CB role may not be achieved. = 2 to 10, the CB prize can be established, so that in a game state other than the internal state ST2, it is possible to shift to the internal state ST2 when the CB prize is not established. In the internal state ST2, when a winning is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, it is possible to create a situation in which the CB prize is established and the state shifts to the CB state ST3. As a result, in a configuration in which the game state is differentiated depending on whether or not the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, it is possible to cause the transition of the game state depending on whether or not the CB prize is established.

The symbols that stop on the main line ML1 are when the winning of the CB role is established in the game in which the CB role is won, and when the winning of the CB role is established while the winning state of the CB role is carried over. The type of combination is different. As a result, it is possible to perform different stop control regarding establishment of the CB prize between the game in which the CB win is won and the game in the internal state ST2 in which the state of winning the CB win is carried over.

In a game in which a CB win is won, the win-win bit in the determination information buffer B is set to the mode for single CB, so that the 1st to 3rd group wins (hereinafter referred to as , CB winning 1st group to 3rd group winnings), the 4th group winnings in the 1st CB winning and 2nd CB winnings (hereinafter referred to as CB winning 4th group winnings) ) are stop-displayed on the main line ML1 with priority over the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol combination. On the other hand, in the state in which the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, the winning combination will be the winning combination when the combination of symbols corresponding to the fourth group of CB winning prizes is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 10. Since the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st to 27th supplementary bell combinations and the constituent symbols partially overlap, the setting mode of the number of bits provided in the judgment information buffer B and the accessory bit becomes a mode for double winning. As a result, in a state where the winning state of the CB winning combination is carried over, the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the CB winning fourth group winning combination correspond to the CB winning first to third group winning combinations. The symbols forming the combination of symbols are stopped and displayed with priority on the main line ML1. In other words, by differentiating the target of the symbol to be preferentially stopped and displayed on the main line ML1 between the game in which the CB role is won and the game in which the winning state of the CB role is carried over, the target to be stopped on the main line ML1 is displayed. It is possible to vary the combination of symbols for the CB winning, and accordingly it is possible to vary the mode of whether or not the CB winning is established in each situation. As a result, between the game in which the CB role is won and the game in which the CB role winning state is carried over, for example, the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the combination of the CB winning symbols to be stopped is changed. Even if not, it is possible to make the mode of whether or not the CB prize is established different depending on each situation.

The combination of symbols corresponding to the 4th group winning combination of CB and the combination of symbols corresponding to the compensating bell combination, which is a winning combination when winning with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, are the reels 32L and 32M. , 32R are set corresponding to a plurality of stop order patterns, and symbol combinations corresponding to the 4th group wins of the CB prizes set to correspond to the same stop order pattern and the compensating bell combination. The combination of corresponding symbols is common symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped in an order different from the last order in the stop order pattern. Symbols that enable a small win such as a supplementary bell win and a special win such as a CB win at the same time have priority over other symbols when stopping on the main line ML1. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped are stopped in different orders, the common symbols are preferentially stopped on the main line ML1. As a result, when any one of IV=2 to 10 is won in a state in which the winning state of any CB winning combination is carried over, establishment of a combination of symbols corresponding to the 4th group winning combination of CB winning is CB. It is possible to give priority to establishment of a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning first to third group wins.

In a state where the winning state of any of the CB roles is carried over, winning is achieved with any index value IV. Winning corresponding to the index value IV is established regardless of the stop mode of 32M and 32R. As a result, it is possible to limit the situations in which a CB prize can be established to the case where a prize is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 10. This makes it possible to clarify the situation in which a CB prize can be established in a state in which the winning state of any CB combination is carried over.

In the ART state ST20 in which the condition for continuation is satisfied, reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 33M, While the execution of the stop mode of 32R is notified, the notification is not executed in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. As a result, in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the ART state ST20 can be continued by avoiding establishment of the CB winning, and in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the CB The ART state ST20 ends when it becomes difficult to avoid winning a prize.

ART transition lottery processing is executed when winning of any CB role is not established in the game in which the CB role is won. Then, when a transition to ART state ST20 is won in the ART transition lottery process, the game is shifted to ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied. As a result, even if the CB role is won and the prize corresponding to the CB role is not established, the transition to the ART state ST20 does not occur unless the transition winning is achieved in the ART transition lottery process, which is expected by the player. It is possible to diversify the target. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The ART shift lottery process is executed when any of the CB roles is won in the game, and the winning of the CB role is not achieved. Even if it doesn't work, it won't run. As a result, it is possible to limit opportunities for the ART shift lottery process to be executed, and it is possible to increase the attention of the players to the fact that the CB role is not won in the game in which the CB role is won. becomes.

The first special state ST23 is when a shift to the first special state ST23 is won in the ART shift lottery process executed when the winning of the CB combination is not established in the game in which any CB combination is won. It is a game state that shifts only to . The first special state ST23 is more advantageous for the player than other game states. As a result, the player's attention to the ART transition lottery process is increased, and as a result, in the game in which one of the CB roles that triggers the execution of the ART transition lottery process is won, the winning of the CB role is not established. The player's attention is enhanced.

A first CB combination and a second CB combination are set as the CB combination, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in different manners to avoid establishing a CB prize depending on the type of the won CB combination. As a result, the player who expects to avoid the establishment of the CB winning will predict the type of the winning CB combination and perform the stop operation based on the prediction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In particular, the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the establishment of the first CB prize is the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second CB prize, and the establishment of the second CB prize is avoided. The stopping mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for the purpose is the stopping mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first CB winning. As a result, in a game in which one of the CB wins has been won, if the player's prediction of the type of the won CB win is wrong, the CB winning will be established without fail. As a result, the player will carefully predict the type of CB combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

The winning probability of the first CB combination and the winning probability of the second CB combination are the same. As a result, the probability that the type of CB winning predicted by the player is correct can be the same regardless of the type of CB winning predicted. As a result, it is possible to predict the type of winning CB hand in a situation where the probability of correct prediction is not biased.

Even if either the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established, the same CB state ST3 is entered. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the CB prize is established, and to achieve the excellent effects already described.

In a game in which one of the CB winning combinations is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the CB winning first to third group winning combinations is established. A plurality of combinations of symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of CB are set in correspondence with the types of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R of the third stop. In the first stop and the second stop, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, regardless of which reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is the third stop. Regardless of the stop operation timing of , while the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the CB are stopped on the main line ML1, the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, Whether or not the CB prize is established differs depending on the stop operation timing of 32R. As a result, it is possible to clarify the object to which the player should pay attention regarding whether or not the CB winning is established.

In addition, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that determine whether or not the CB winning is established are not limited to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the predetermined type, but the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are the target of the third stop. Therefore, regardless of the order in which the rotation of the plurality of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the player is required to perform the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are the target of the third stop. It is possible to attract attention.

In particular, the presence or absence of establishment of the CB prize is different depending on the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are the targets of the third stop instead of the first stop or the second stop, so all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Until the rotation of 32M and 32R is stopped, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the CB winning has been established. As a result, the state in which the player pays attention to whether or not the CB prize is established can be maintained until the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped.

When any one of the index values IV=2 to 10 is won in a state in which the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the correct answer are first stopped, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Regardless of the stop operation timing, the normal bell winning is surely established and the establishment of the CB winning is avoided. As a result, in a state in which the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, it is possible to avoid establishing a CB prize simply by setting the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to a predetermined stopping order.

Further, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the correct answer are not stopped at the first stop, by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the correct answer at the stop operation timing for the correct answer, a compensatory bell prize is established. Establishment of CB winning is avoided. Thus, even if the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be stopped at the first stop due to an operation error, etc., the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped at the correct target stop operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid establishment of CB winning. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities to avoid establishing a CB prize.

The reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the stop operation by the correct target stop operation timing are the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, when the player recognizes the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a state in which the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R different from the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are recognized. Even if the reels 32M and 32R are set as stop targets for the first stop, the player recognizes the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be stopped at the stop operation timing of the correct target, so the correct target reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are stopped at the timing of the stop operation of the correct answer target, it is possible to avoid the establishment of the CB winning easily.

In the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, if the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be stopped at the first stop, the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at the correct target stop operation timing. The stop modes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be stopped are notified. Then, according to the notification, the stop operation of the correct target reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed at the timing of the correct target stop operation, whereby the compensation bell prize is established and the establishment of the CB prize is avoided. As a result, if any of the index values IV = 2 to 10 is won in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, and if the normal bell prize is not established, the supplementary bell prize is established and the CB prize is awarded. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to avoid establishment.

When the CB prize is established in the ART state ST20, the ART state ST20 is terminated and the state shifts to the CB state ST3. Then, after the CB state ST3 ends, the post-CB RT state ST6 is entered. In this case, if the CB prize is established in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the post-CB RT state ST6 is reached and the ART is ended halfway. Then, in the post-CB RT state ST6 and in the mid-term end state of the ART, one of the CB roles is won and the winning of the CB role is not established, so that the transition to the internal state ST2 occurs and the state ended last time. ART state ST20. As a result, even if the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied is terminated in the middle, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to return to the ART state ST20 in the middle.

In addition, in the post-CB RT state ST6 and in the ART midway end state, if the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established and the state shifts to the relief RT state ST7, the ART state ST20 of the last terminated state. return to As a result, as a condition for enabling the return to the ART state ST20 in the middle of the state, in addition to the condition that the winning of any CB role is not established in the game in which the CB role is won, any relief replay is possible. Since there is also a condition that a prize is established, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of situations in which it is possible to return to the ART state ST20 in the intermediate state. Therefore, even a player who ends the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied can be prevented from losing the desire to continue the game.

In the post-CB RT state ST6, the probability of winning the relief replay combination is higher than the probability of winning the CB combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the ART state ST20 in the intermediate state without extremely increasing the probability of winning one of the CB roles.

If a relief replay win is established in the post-CB RT state ST6, which is not a halfway end state of ART, the advantage is lower than if a relief replay win is established in the post-CB RT state ST6, which is a halfway end state of ART. transition to As a result, it is possible to quickly return to the ART state ST20, which has ended in the middle, while not greatly affecting the degree of advantage in the state where the ART is not halfway ended.

If the index value IV=13 or 14 is won in the post-CB RT state ST6, not only the relief replay combination but also the first replay combination becomes a winning combination. Then, when the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not performed in a mode in which the relief replay winning can be established, the first replay winning is established, and the game state shifts to the normal state ST1. The ART halfway termination state is released. As a result, even if an opportunity to return to the ART state ST20 in the situation where the ART was terminated in the middle of the ART could not be returned to the ART state ST20, the ART is terminated in the middle. State ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the benefit of relief from being excessive when the ART state ST20 ends in the middle.

When the index value IV=13 or 14 is won in the post-CB RT state ST6 in the halfway end state of the ART, the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the relief replay winning prize is notified. On the other hand, if the ART is not in the halfway end state, the notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to return to the ART state ST20 in the state where the ART has ended halfway, while preventing the transition to the ART state ST20 from becoming easy in the state where the ART has not ended halfway. It becomes possible.

In the halfway end state of the ART, a notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the ART is in the halfway end state. As a result, a player who has terminated the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied due to an operation error or the like does not stop the game without recognizing that an opportunity to return to the ART state ST20 may occur. It becomes possible to do so.

In the normal state ST1, if one of the CB roles is won and the winning of the CB role is not established, and if the game shifts to the chance state ST21, the game is played outside the slot machine 10 after 5 games are completed in the chance state ST21. The output of the chance signal directed to is started. As a result, even if the transition to the chance state ST21 actually occurs, it is possible to create a situation in which the player predicts whether or not the transition to the chance state ST21 has occurred, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. becomes. Further, when specifying the chance signal output opportunity, it is only necessary to monitor whether or not five games have been played since the transition to the chance state ST21 occurred. It is possible to simplify the configuration.

When the chance state is shifted to ST21, output of the chance signal is started and the delay signal is output, and when the management computer of the game hall receives the chance signal and the delay signal at the same time, the slot machine is operated in the game hall. 10, the update of the information display device provided corresponding to the slot machine 10 is not executed after 5 games have been played, but the chance signal is output from the slot machine 10 when 5 games have been played in the chance state ST21. With the configuration to start, it is possible to update the information display device after 5 games are completed in the chance state ST21 without complicating the processing configuration of the management computer of the game hall.

In the normal state ST1, when one of the CB roles is won and the winning of the CB role is not established, the internal state notification unit 68 shifts to the chance status ST21 after five games have been completed in the chance status ST21. lights up. As a result, even if the transition to the chance state ST21 actually occurs, it is possible to create a situation in which the player predicts whether or not the transition to the chance state ST21 has occurred, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. becomes. Further, when identifying the trigger for switching the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state, it is only necessary to monitor whether or not five games have been completed after the transition to the chance state ST21 has occurred. can be simplified.

When the SB winning combination is won in the normal state ST1 and the SB winning combination is not established, the game shifts to the short RT state ST4. In the short RT state ST4, the winning probability of the replay combination is the same as in the chance state ST21, and if the index value IV=1 is won, a normal bell win is established as in the chance state ST21. On the main line ML1, there are cases where the SB role is won in the normal state ST1 and the SB prize is not established, and in the case where any CB role is won in the normal state ST1 and the CB prize is not established. The combination of symbols in the is a similar combination. Furthermore, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform a common effect in both the case of shifting to the short RT state ST4 and the case of shifting to the chance state ST21. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the game state has shifted to the short RT state ST4 or the chance state ST21 from the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the state of winning a prize, and the state of execution of the effect. , the game can be played while making the player expect that the transition to the chance state ST21 will occur when the game state shifts to any of the game states. In this case, if the transition to the short RT state ST4 occurs, the chance signal is not output and the internal state notification unit 68 is not switched to the lighting state. When the transition to ST21 occurs, output of the chance signal is not started and the internal state notification section 68 is not switched to the lighting state until five games are completed. As a result, which of the short RT state ST4 and the chance state ST21 has been shifted can be determined by the mode of the information display device provided corresponding to the slot machine 10 in the game hall or the internal state provided in the slot machine 10. It is possible to prevent it from being found out from the mode of the notification unit 68 .

The number of games for which the output of the chance signal and the switching to the lighting state of the internal state notification unit 68 are delayed when the transition to the chance state ST21 occurs is the number of games that is greater than the number of games that can be continued in the short RT state ST4. . This makes it possible for the player to expect that the transition to the chance state ST21 will occur until the short RT state ST4 ends, even if the transition to the short RT state ST4 occurs. Become.

When shifting from the base state ST22 to the chance state ST21, the output of the chance signal is started when the chance state ST21 is started. In other words, the output of the chance signal is delayed when the transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs. is started, output of the chance signal is started. This makes it possible to start outputting the chance signal at a timing suitable for each situation.

In the configuration in which the ending image is displayed on the image display device 63 when the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24 ends, the ending notification character image 142, the total count character image 143, and the Whether or not to display the bonus character image 144 and the total number character image 145, the display size, and the display position can be changed based on the operation of the production operation device 64, and the display size of the special ending base image 141c is produced. It can be changed based on the operation of the operating device 64 . As a result, the ending image can be adjusted to the player's preference, and the game can be more interesting.

When adjusting the ending image, it is possible to change the display mode of each image 141c, 142 to 145 individually. This makes it possible to finely change the aspect of the ending image.

Various character images 142 to 145 can be put into a non-display state based on the operation of the operating device 64 for presentation. As a result, a player who does not need to display some or all of the various character images 142-145 can display an ending image that does not include the various character images 142-145. On the other hand, the special ending base image 141c cannot be hidden. This makes it possible to prevent the image display device 63 from being in a state where no image is displayed.

Although the display size of the special ending base image 141c can be changed based on the operation of the production operating device 64, the special ending base image 141c continues to be displayed over the entire image display device 63. FIG. This makes it possible to prevent a state in which no image is displayed on part of the image display device 63 during the display period of the ending image.

When the first ending base image 141a or the second ending base image 141b is displayed, it is not possible to change the display mode of the ending image based on the operation of the production operating device 64, while the special ending base image 141c is displayed. If so, it is possible to change the display mode of the ending image based on the operation of the effect operating device 64 . This makes it possible to enhance the player's sense of satisfaction when the special ending base image 141c is displayed.

When the special ending base image 141c is displayed, it becomes possible to change the display mode of the ending image after a predetermined period of time has passed since the ending image started to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to secure a period in which the ending image in the initial state is visually recognized by the player or the manager of the game hall.

In a period in which the display mode of the ending image cannot be changed, notification is made that a period in which the display mode of the ending image can be changed occurs. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that it is possible to change the display mode of the ending image.

Since a new game cannot be started until a specific period of time has passed since the display of the ending image started, the display of the ending image cannot be terminated. In this case, the specific period is longer than the predetermined period during which the display mode of the ending image cannot be changed. This makes it possible to reliably secure a period during which the display mode of the ending image can be changed.

When the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process are executed in the start waiting process (FIG. 11), the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 at that time is used for the specific control in the main RAM 74. is saved in the stack area 74b. Similarly, when the third non-specific control process is executed in the reel stop process (FIG. 19), the data stored in the register of the main side MPU 72 at that time is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main side RAM 74. is evacuated to As a result, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent the data stored in the register of the main side MPU 72 from being rewritten when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed. . Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends, the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. FIG. As a result, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the specific control from the state of the register of the main side MPU 72 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. .

Execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is prohibited when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed. This makes it possible to prevent further processing interrupts from occurring in a situation where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed while data is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for saving data from becoming complicated.

In the configuration in which a first non-specific control process (step S412) is executed and a second non-specific control process (step S416) is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control in the start waiting process (FIG. 11), The first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process are not aggregated as a series of processes, but when the first non-specific control process ends, the execution of the timer interrupt process is once permitted and the second non-specific control process is permitted. 2 Execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted again when the non-specific control process is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period during which the execution of the timer interrupt process is continuously prohibited in order to execute the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process It is possible to secure the opportunity for timer interrupt processing to be executed between

The saving and restoring of the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 74b for the specific control when executing the process corresponding to the specific control correspond to the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process, respectively. Let it be done individually. As a result, the data is saved in each of the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process, and a timer interrupt is generated between the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process. In a configuration in which the opportunity to execute processing is guaranteed, timer interrupt processing is executed in a situation where data stored in the register of the main side MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control when executing processing corresponding to specific control. It is possible to prevent it from being executed.

When a process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, not only is the data in the register of the main MPU 72 at that time saved in the stack area 74b for specific control, but the process corresponding to non-specific control ends. In that case, the data in the register of the main MPU 72 at that time is saved in the non-specific control stack area 74d. This makes it possible to switch the data state of the registers of the main MPU 72 according to whether the process corresponding to the specific control is executed or the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. It is possible to appropriately perform each of the processing corresponding to the control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

In the main ROM 73, the address group of the specific control program for executing the process corresponding to the specific control and the address group of the non-specific control program for executing the process corresponding to the non-specific control are clearly defined. are classified into This makes it possible to improve the workability when checking or correcting only one of the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

Also in the main RAM 74, the address group of the area used when executing the process corresponding to the specific control and the address group of the area used when executing the process corresponding to the non-specific control are stored in the work area 74a for specific control and It is clearly distinguished as a work area 74c for non-specific control. As a result, when executing one of the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other processing from being rewritten. .

Not only is the image display device 63 controlled by the effect-side MPU 82 notified of the stop mode, but also the special display section 67 directly controlled by the main-side MPU 72 is notified corresponding to the stop mode to be notified. is done. As a result, when the image display device 63 is performing notification of the stop mode, the main MPU 72 can visually confirm whether or not the special display section 67 is also performing notification corresponding to the stop mode to be notified. It is possible to check whether or not there is fraudulent activity in the signal path between the player and the MPU 82 on the production side.

If the player has not won a predetermined corresponding combination in which a predetermined prize is generated due to a predetermined stop mode, the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the combination is not executed in the special display portion 67 . This makes it possible to clarify the role of the special display portion 67 .

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop mode, the special display portion 67 performs the notification corresponding to the stop mode to be notified. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the notification of the stop mode executed by the image display device 63 is normal each time the notification of the stop mode is executed.

The notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display section 67 is performed in a manner that makes it more difficult for the player to grasp the details of the stop mode to be notified than the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 . As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image display device 63 in the configuration in which the special display section 67 is provided in addition to the image display device 63 . Therefore, even if the notification mode in the special display section 67 is made simple, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The display range of the special display portion 67 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image display device 63 in the configuration in which the special display section 67 is provided in addition to the image display device 63 . Therefore, even if the notification form in the special display section 67 is made simple, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the configuration in which the stop mode command that enables execution of the notification of the stop mode in the image display device 63 is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 82, the stop mode command includes the result of the winning lottery process itself. can't As a result, even if the communication path between the main side MPU 72 and the performance side MPU 82 is illegally accessed and the stop mode command is illegally acquired, the result of the winning lottery process can be grasped from the stop mode command. can be disabled. Therefore, it is possible to substantially nullify the fraudulent act by acquiring the stop mode command.

The main MPU 72 collectively executes the determination of whether or not to perform the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 and the notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display section 67 . As a result, even if two-way communication is not performed between the main side MPU 72 and the effect side MPU 82, the special display section 67 corresponds to the stop mode when the image display device 63 notifies the stop mode. It is possible to enable notification to be performed.

In a configuration in which a plurality of types of stop mode notification to be executed by the image display device 63 are set, the special display portion 67 executes notification in a mode corresponding to the type of stop mode notification. As a result, even in a configuration in which a plurality of types of notification of the stop mode are set, the contents of the notification of the stop mode corresponding to the current game can be grasped by confirming the content of the notification on the special display part 67. becomes possible.

Even in the case of winning a predetermined corresponding combination in which a predetermined prize is generated when a predetermined stop order is reached, if the stop mode is not notified on the image display device 63, the special display unit 67 displays the stop mode. The corresponding notification is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stop mode from being performed on the special display portion 67 in a situation where it is not preferable to perform the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 .

When the image display device 63 displays an image indicating that there is a possibility that the transition of the game state will occur although the notification of the stop mode is not executed, the notification corresponding to the stop mode is not executed on the special display part 67.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stop mode from being performed on the special display portion 67 in a situation where it is not preferable to perform the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 . Further, when an image indicating that there is a possibility that a game state transition will occur is displayed on the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the display content on the image display device 63 is displayed although it is not a notification corresponding to the stop mode. It is executed in the special display section 67 . As a result, even if the image display device 63 displays an image indicating that there is a possibility that the game state will be changed, the image display device 63 can be displayed by confirming the special display portion 67. It is possible to confirm whether the displayed image is legitimate or not.

The notification of the stop mode is started on the image display device 63 at a timing after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop mode is started on the special display portion 67 . Thus, by checking the special display portion 67 at the timing when the notification of the stop mode is started on the image display device 63, it is possible to confirm whether or not the notification of the stop mode is normal. .

Even if the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 is started after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display portion 67 is started, the stop on the image display device 63 is stopped during the invalid period of the stop operation. Mode notification is started. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the content of the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 before the stop operation is validated.

After the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 ends, the notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display portion 67 ends. As a result, the notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display unit 67 does not end before the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 ends. It is possible to increase the number of opportunities to confirm whether or not the product is a product.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration when non-specific control is executed by the main MPU 72 . Differences from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing in this embodiment.

In the start waiting process, as other processes of step S3701, the same processes as steps S401 to S411 of the start waiting process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. After that, execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is prohibited (step S3702), and the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3703). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the first non-specific control process is executed is saved separately. Incidentally, the processes of steps S3701 to S3703 are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

After that, the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are used to execute the first non-specific control process (step S3704). FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the first non-specific control process in this embodiment.

In the first non-specific control process, first, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is transferred to the stack pointer for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. It is stored in the work area 74c (step S3801). When the first non-specific control process ends and the process returns to the start waiting process, the value of this stack pointer is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control, so that the main MPU 72 is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be restored to the register is stored.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3802). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for non-specific control, the range of the area where the data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 is specified, and the range of the specified area is specified. is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3803). This makes it possible to restore the state of the registers of the main MPU 72 to the state in which the non-specific control was executed last time.

After that, as other processing of step S3804, the same processing as steps S3406 to S3412 of the first non-specific control processing (FIG. 74) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are monitored to determine whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred, and if the fraudulent activity has occurred, processing to deal with it is performed. be done.

After that, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the non-specific control stack area 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S3805). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before returning from the first non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control is saved separately. As already explained, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the stack area 74 d for non-specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . As a result, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the non-specific control data state.

After that, the value of the non-specific control stack pointer for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is stored in the non-specific control work area 74 c in the main RAM 74 . (step S3806). When the process corresponding to non-specific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control, and is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74d for non-specific control. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be processed is stored. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3807).

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 77), when the first non-specific control process ends, the process of steps S3705 to S3709 is executed using the specific control program and specific control data. Specifically, from the value of the stack pointer read in step S3807 of the first non-specific control process, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified. , the data stored in the range of the specified area is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3705). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the specific control state immediately before the current first non-specific control process is started. Thereafter, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3706). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started periodically.

After that, as other processing of step S3707, the same processing as steps S413 to S415 of the start waiting processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is prohibited (step S3708), and the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3709). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the second non-specific control process is executed is saved separately.

After that, the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are used to execute the second non-specific control process (step S3710). In the second non-specific control process, as in the first non-specific control process, first, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is set. , is stored in the non-specific control work area 74c in the main RAM 74. FIG. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. FIG. Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for non-specific control, the range of the area where the data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 is specified, and the range of the specified area is specified. , is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . Thereafter, the same processes as steps S3506 to S3507 of the second non-specific control process (FIG. 75) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, a process for monitoring whether or not the reset button 56 has been tampered with is executed, and if the tampering has been done, a process for coping with it is executed. After that, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 . In addition, the value of the non-specific control stack pointer for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is stored in the non-specific control work area 74 c in the main RAM 74 . Let Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. FIG.

When the second non-specific control process ends, the process of steps S3711 and S3712 is executed using the specific control program and specific control data. Specifically, from the value of the stack pointer read at the end of the second non-specific control process, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified. The data stored in the range of the identified area is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3711). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the specific control state immediately before the current second non-specific control process is started. Thereafter, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3712). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started periodically.

As for the third non-specific control process, the same processes as steps S3702 to S3703 are executed using the specific control program and specific control data before starting the third non-specific control process. do. Also, when the third non-specific control process is started, the same processes as steps S3801 to S3803 are executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. Also, when the third specific control processing ends, the same processing as steps S3805 to S3807 is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. Also, when the third non-specific control process is terminated and the reel stop process is resumed, the same processes as steps S3705 and S3706 are executed using the specific control program and specific control data.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 at that time is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74. The process of saving, and the process of returning the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control to the register of the main side MPU 72 when finishing the process corresponding to the non-specific control are the programs for the specific control and the specific control. It is executed using the data for In addition, processing for prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), which is processing corresponding to the specific control, and processing for permitting the execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) are also performed by the program for the specific control and the program for the specific control. performed using data. Thereby, the program and data for executing the process corresponding to the specific control and the process for handling the data used in executing the process corresponding to the specific control are aggregated into the program for the specific control and the data for the specific control. becomes possible.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration when non-specific control is executed by the main MPU 72 . Differences from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing start waiting processing in this embodiment, and FIG. 79(b) is a flow chart showing reel stop processing in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79(a), in the start waiting process, as other processes of step S3901, the same processes as steps S401 to S411 of the start waiting process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed, In step S3902, non-specific control call processing is executed instead of the first non-specific control processing, and as other processing in step S3903, steps S413 to steps of the start waiting processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment The same processing as S415 is executed, and in step S3904, non-specific control calling processing is executed instead of the second non-specific control processing. Further, as shown in FIG. 79(b), in the reel stop processing, in step S4001, non-specific control calling processing is executed in place of the third non-specific control processing, and in steps S4002 to S4005, the above-described first implementation is executed. The same processing as steps S1102 to S1110 of the reel stop processing (FIG. 19) in the form is executed.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the non-specific control calling process executed in steps S3902 and S3904 of the start waiting process (FIG. 79(a)) and step S4001 of the reel stop process (FIG. 79(b)). . The non-specific control calling process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data, except for the non-specific control process activated in step S4104, which will be described later.

In the non-specific control call processing, the execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is first prohibited (step S4101), and the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the specific control stack area 74b in the main RAM 74 ( step S4102). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the non-specific control process is executed is saved separately.

After that, the module address table stored in the main ROM 73 as data for specific control is read out to the work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74, and a non-specific control process corresponding to the object of this call is executed. The address of the area of the main ROM 73 storing the non-specific control program is obtained from the module address table (step S4103). The module address table sets the correspondence relationship between the type of processing that triggers the execution of the non-specific control call processing and the start address of the non-specific control program for executing the non-specific control processing to be executed. ing. Specifically, if the non-specific control calling process executed in step S3902 of the start waiting process (Fig. 79(a)), the non-specific control program for executing the first non-specific control process A non-specific control program for executing the second non-specific control process if the start address is acquired and the non-specific control call process executed in step S3904 of the start waiting process (Fig. 79(a)) is acquired, and if it is the non-specific control calling process executed in step S4001 of the reel stop process (FIG. 79(b)), the non-specific control for executing the third non-specific control process The starting address of the program is obtained.

After that, the type of non-specific control process corresponding to the address acquired in step S4103 is executed (step S4104). In this case, the non-specific control process is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. The non-specific control process includes a first non-specific control process, a second non-specific control process, and a third non-specific control process. Processing contents of these first to third non-specific control processes are the same as the processing contents of the first to third non-specific control processing in the second embodiment. In this case, as the first process in each non-specific control process, first, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is transferred to the main side. The work area 74c for non-specific control in the RAM 74 is stored. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. FIG. Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for non-specific control, the range of the area where the data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 is specified, and the range of the specified area is specified. , is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . After that, the fraud monitoring process corresponding to the current non-specific control process is executed. After that, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 . In addition, the value of the non-specific control stack pointer for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is stored in the non-specific control work area 74 c in the main RAM 74 . Let Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. FIG.

When the execution of the non-specific control process that is the object of execution this time is completed, the processes of steps S4105 and S4106 are executed using the specific control program and specific control data. Specifically, from the value of the stack pointer read in the last process in the non-specific control process executed this time, the range of the area where the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored. is specified, and the data stored in the range of the specified area is returned to the register of the main side MPU 72 (step S4105). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the specific control state immediately before the current non-specific control process is started. Thereafter, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S4106). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started periodically.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 at that time is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74. The process of saving, and the process of returning the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control to the register of the main side MPU 72 when finishing the process corresponding to the non-specific control are the programs for the specific control and the specific control. It is executed using the data for In addition, processing for prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), which is processing corresponding to the specific control, and processing for permitting the execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) are also performed by the program for the specific control and the program for the specific control. performed using data. Thereby, the program and data for executing the process corresponding to the specific control and the process for handling the data used in executing the process corresponding to the specific control are aggregated into the program for the specific control and the data for the specific control. becomes possible.

In addition, processing for saving data to the stack area 74b for specific control, processing for restoring data from the stack area 74b for specific control, processing for prohibiting execution of timer interrupt processing, and execution of timer interrupt processing is not set for each of the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process, and the third non-specific control process, but the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process, and the second non-specific control process. It is set for the process for calling the process to be executed from among the control process and the third non-specific control process. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the specific control program accordingly.

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in the content of the non-specific control calling process. This difference will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

The non-specific control calling process (FIG. 80) in the third embodiment is configured to be executed using a specific control program and specific control data, except for the non-specific control process in step S4104. However, all the non-specific control calling processes in this embodiment are executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. That is, in steps S3902 and S3904 of the start waiting process (FIG. 79(a)) and step S4001 of the reel stop process (FIG. 79(b)), the program for specific control and the data for specific control are used. , Only the setting process for starting the non-specific control call process is performed, and the non-specific control call process itself is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data be done.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the non-specific control calling process in this embodiment.

First, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is prohibited (step S4201), and data of all registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S4202). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the non-specific control call process is executed is saved separately.

After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( step S4203). When the calling process of non-specific control ends and returns to the start waiting process or reel stop process, by reading the value of this stack pointer from the work area 74c for non-specific control, in the stack area 74b for specific control It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be returned to the register of the main MPU 72 is stored.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S4204). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer for non-specific control, the range of the area where the data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 is specified, and the range of the specified area is specified. is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S4205). This makes it possible to restore the state of the registers of the main MPU 72 to the state in which the non-specific control was executed last time.

After that, the module address table stored in the main ROM 73 as data for non-specific control is read into the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74, and the non-specific control processing corresponding to the current call target is executed. The address of the area of the main ROM 73 storing the non-specific control program for the control is obtained from the module address table (step S4206). As in the third embodiment, the module address table contains the type of processing that triggers the execution of the non-specific control call processing, and the non-specific control program for executing the non-specific control processing to be executed. A correspondence relationship with the start address of is set. Specifically, if the non-specific control calling process executed in step S3902 of the start waiting process (Fig. 79(a)), the non-specific control program for executing the first non-specific control process A non-specific control program for executing the second non-specific control process if the start address is acquired and the non-specific control call process executed in step S3904 of the start waiting process (Fig. 79(a)) is acquired, and if it is the non-specific control calling process executed in step S4001 of the reel stop process (FIG. 79(b)), the non-specific control for executing the third non-specific control process The starting address of the program is obtained.

Incidentally, in steps S3902 and S3904 of the start waiting process (FIG. 79(a)) and step S4001 of the reel stop process (FIG. 79(b)), the non-specific control calling process is started. It not only executes the setting process, but also executes the process of storing the data indicating the type of process that triggered the execution of the non-specific control call process in the work area 74c for the non-specific control in the main RAM 74. In step S4206, the data stored in the non-specific control work area 74c is used to specify the type of processing that triggered the execution of the non-specific control call processing, and the corresponding type of non-specific control processing is executed. Get the corresponding start address from the module address table. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and in steps S3902 and S3904 of the start waiting process (Fig. 79(a)) and step S4001 of the reel stop process (Fig. 79(b)), calling of non-specific control Data indicating the type of processing that triggered the execution of the processing is stored in the work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74, and in step S4206, the data stored in the work area 74a for specific control is used to perform non-processing. A configuration may be adopted in which the type of processing that triggered the execution of the specific control call processing is specified, and the start address corresponding to the corresponding type of non-specific control processing is obtained from the module address table.

After that, the type of non-specific control process corresponding to the address acquired in step S4206 is executed (step S4207). The non-specific control process includes a first non-specific control process, a second non-specific control process, and a third non-specific control process. In each of these non-specific control processes, without executing the process for permitting or prohibiting execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) and the process for saving or restoring the data stored in the register of the main side MPU 72. , to perform fraud monitoring corresponding to each non-specific control process. Specifically, for the first non-specific control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Only the process of step S3412 is executed. In the second non-specific control process, only steps S3506 and S3507 of the second non-specific control process (FIG. 75) in the first embodiment are executed. In the third non-specific control process, only steps S3606 and S3607 of the third non-specific control process (FIG. 76) in the first embodiment are executed.

In the non-specific control call processing, after the non-specific control processing is executed in step S4207, the data of all the registers of the main side MPU 72 are saved in the non-specific control stack area 74d in the main side RAM 74 (step S4208). . As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before returning from the non-specific control calling process to the specific control process is saved separately. As already described, when the non-specific control call process is started, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . As a result, when the non-specific control call process is started, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the non-specific control data state.

After that, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74d for non-specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74. (step S4209). When the non-specific control call processing is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer should be read from the work area 74c for non-specific control and returned to the register of the main MPU 72 in the stack area 74d for non-specific control. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area where the data is stored.

Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S4210). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer, the range of the area in which the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the data stored in the range of the specified area is specified. is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S4211). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the specific control state immediately before the current non-specific control call process is started. Thereafter, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S4212). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started periodically.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the process of saving and restoring data when executing the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the process of prohibiting and permitting execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) are both It is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

In addition, the process of saving and restoring data when executing the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the process of prohibiting and permitting execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) are the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process. It is not set for each of the specific control process and the third non-specific control process, but the process to be executed from among the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process and the third non-specific control process is set for the process to call . This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the game state are different from those in the first embodiment. Differences from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the game states are the normal state ST1, the internal state ST2, the CB state ST3, the short RT state ST4, and the SB state. ST5, relief RT state ST7, off RT state ST10, ART state ST20, chance state ST21, base state ST22, first special state ST23, and second special state ST24 are set. The contents of these game states are basically the same as those of the first embodiment.

However, in this embodiment, the post-CB RT state ST6 in the first embodiment is not set, and when the CB state ST3 ends, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1. Then, when the game state shifts to the CB state ST3 due to the player's operation error or the like in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is established, the normal state ST1 after the CB state ST3 corresponds to the halfway end state of the ART. The normal state ST1 is reached.

In addition to the first replay combination, the first replay combination is set as the winning combination with the index value IV=15 in the lottery table for the normal state in the present embodiment. In addition, in the lottery table for the normal state in this embodiment, not only the index values IV=1 to 18 but also the index value IV=19 exist. A combination and a second relief replay combination are set. When the index value IV=15 in the lottery table for the normal state is won, the right reel 32R is first stopped, and when the right reel 32R is stopped at a predetermined stop operation timing, the second corresponding to the first relief replay combination. When 1 relief replay winning is established and the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time but the right reel 32R is not stopped at a predetermined stop operation timing, it is ensured. The 1st replay win is established. In addition, when the index value IV=19 in the lottery table for the normal state is won, the right reel 32R is first stopped, and when the right reel 32R is stopped at a specific stop operation timing, it corresponds to the second relief replay combination. When the second relief replay winning prize is established and the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time but the right reel 32R is not stopped at a specific stop operation timing. The first replay prize is surely established.

When the index value IV=15 is won in the normal state ST1 in the halfway end state of ART, the stopped state of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling establishment of the first relief replay prize is displayed as an image. The device 63 notifies. In addition, in the state where the ART is halfway finished and in the normal state ST1, if the index value IV=19 is won, the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second relief replay winning prize is changed. The image display device 63 notifies. On the other hand, even if the index value IV = 15 or 19 is won in the normal state ST1, which is not the halfway end state of the ART, the establishment of the first relief replay prize or the second relief replay prize is possible. The stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not reported.

When the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established in the normal state ST1, the game moves to the relief RT state ST7. In this case, if the normal state ST1 in which the ART is halfway terminated is shifted to the rescue RT state ST7, the rescue RT state ST7 and the ART state ST20 are entered. The situation that ended in the middle is taken over to the current ART state ST20 as it is. Also, in the state of the normal state ST1 in which the ART is halfway finished, if the index value IV=15 or 19 is won, but the first replay prize is established, the chance continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of continuable games. , the base continuation counter, the first special continuation counter, and the second special continuation counter are all cleared to "0", thereby terminating the halfway end state of ART. On the other hand, if the normal state ST1, which is not the halfway end state of ART, shifts to the rescue RT state ST7, the state becomes the rescue RT state ST7 and the ART state ST20. State ST20 is a state in which the continuation condition is not established.

When one of the CB combinations is won in the normal state ST1, which is the halfway end state of ART, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable avoidance of winning of the winning CB combination. The image display device 63 notifies the stopping mode. In this case, by avoiding the winning of the CB combination, the internal state ST2 becomes the ART state ST20, and the situation in which the immediately preceding ART state ST20 ended in the middle is taken over to the current ART state ST20 as it is. . On the other hand, when the winning of the winning CB combination is established, the game shifts to the CB state ST3. In this case, all of the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first special continuation counter, and the second special continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of continuable games are cleared to "0", thereby terminating the ART mid-term end state.

In the relief RT state ST7, if a win is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 10 and neither the normal bell winning nor the supplementary bell winning is established, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1. It is the same as the embodiment. Further, when the relief RT state ST7 is started, the initial number of games that can be continued is set to "1000", and when the number of games that can be continued becomes "0", the transition to the normal state ST1 is explained above. It is the same as the first embodiment. In addition, in the relief RT state ST7, if any CB combination is won and the winning of the CB combination is not established, the internal state ST2 and ART state ST20 are entered. is the same as the embodiment of In addition, in the state of the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not established in the relief RT state ST7, if any CB combination is won and the winning of the CB combination is not established, the ART transition lottery process is performed. What is done is the same as in the first embodiment above.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing relief RT control processing executed by the main MPU 72 instead of the CB post-processing in the first embodiment.

In the relief RT control process, in the normal state ST1 (step S4401: YES), if the first relief replay winning prize or the second relief replay winning prize is established (step S4402: YES), the setting processing for the relief RT state is executed. (Step S4403). In the setting process for the rescue RT state, the state flags other than the rescue RT state flag in the state flag storage area 105 are cleared to "0" and the rescue RT state flag is set to "1". As a result, the gaming state shifts to the relief RT state ST7. In the rescue RT state ST7, the lottery table for rescue RT (FIG. 42) is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12). In the relief RT state setting process, the relief RT continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is set to "1000", which is the initial number of continuable games in the relief RT state ST7.

After that, by determining whether or not any of the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first continuation counter, and the second continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued is 1 or more, the ART It is determined whether or not the process is in a halfway terminated state (step S4404). If ART is halfway terminated (step S4404: YES), ART return setting processing is executed (step S4405). In the ART return setting process, the game state corresponding to the counter set to a value of 1 or more among the chance continuation counter, the base continuation counter, the first special continuation counter, and the second special continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of continuable games. Numerical information of ST21 to ST24 is set in the ART state counter 106. For example, if the value of the chance continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART state counter 106 is set to "1" to shift to the chance state ST21, and if the value of the base continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART is set to shift to the base state ST22. The state counter 106 is set to "2", and if the value of the first special continuation counter is 1 or more, the ART state counter 106 is set to "3" to shift to the first special state ST23, and the second special continuation counter is set to "3". is greater than or equal to 1, the ART state counter 106 is set to "4" to shift to the second special state ST24. As a result, the player returns to the game state in which the player stayed in the previous ART state ST20.

Thereafter, an output start flag setting process is executed (step S4406). In the output start flag setting process, one of the chance signal output start flag and the ART signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Specifically, if the game state to return from the ART state ST20 this time is the chance state ST21, the output start flag of the chance signal is set to "1". As a result, output of the chance signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started. On the other hand, if the game state to return from in the ART state ST20 this time is any one of the base state ST22, the first special state ST23 and the second special state ST24, the output start flag of the ART signal is set to "1". As a result, the output of the ART signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started.

If the ART state is not halfway finished (step S4404: NO), the ART state counter 106 is set to "1" (step S4407). As a result, the gaming state shifts to a rescue RT state ST7 and a chance state ST21. However, in this case, the value corresponding to the initial number of games that can be continued in the chance state ST21 is not set in the chance continuation counter in the area 107 for the number of games that can be continued, and the value of the chance continuation counter is maintained at "0". be. That is, the state is ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. Thereafter, the chance signal output start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4408). As a result, output of the chance signal from the external output terminal board 69 is started.

In the relief RT control process, in the relief RT state ST7 (step S4409: YES), it is determined whether or not a fall roll has occurred (step S4410). The falling number is a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main line ML1 when neither the normal bell winning nor the supplementary bell winning is established when winning with any of the index values IV = 2 to 10. That is. If a falling dot occurs (step S4410: YES), various counters for ART are cleared (step S4411). As a result, even in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is established in the rescue RT state S7, the game state is changed to the normal state ST1 without entering the ART mid-term end state when a falling eye occurs. will be transferred. Also, setting processing for the normal state is executed (step S4412). As a result, the game state shifts to the normal state ST1. In the normal state ST1, the normal state lottery table is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 12).

Thereafter, the ART signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4413), and the chance signal output stop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4414). As a result, even if either the ART signal or the chance signal is being output from the external output terminal board 69, the output of the signal to be output is stopped.

In the relief RT control process, if no falling number occurs in the relief RT state ST7 (step S4410: NO), the value of the relief RT continuation counter provided in the area 107 for the number of continuable games is decremented by 1 (step S4415). As a result, the number of games that can be continued in the relief RT state ST7 is decremented by one. When the value of the relief RT continuation counter becomes "0" (step S4416: YES), the game state is shifted to the normal state ST1 by executing the processing of steps S4411 to S4414 already described.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the post-CB RT state ST6 is not set as the gaming state, and when the CB state ST3 ends, the state shifts to the normal state ST1 and the continuation condition is established. When the 1st CB prize or the 2nd CB prize is established in the ART state ST20, the ART is brought to a midway end state in the normal state ST1, and when the relief replay prize is established in the normal state ST1, the ART state ST20 is returned to. As a result, while simplifying the processing configuration in that the post-CB RT state ST6 does not exist, it is possible to have a configuration in which a return to the ART state ST20 is performed upon establishment of a relief replay winning prize. .

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) When one of the CB wins is won in the normal state ST1, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R for establishing or not establishing the winning corresponding to the won CB win. A configuration may be adopted in which, although the stop mode is not reported, the notification corresponding to the winning of the CB combination is executed. As a result, in a game in which one of the CB roles is won, the player can perform the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R while expecting that the CB prize will not be established.

(2) In a game in which one of the CB roles is won, if the winning of the CB role is not established, the configuration is not limited to the ART state ST20 by shifting to the internal state ST2. In the game in which the CB role is won, when the winning of the CB role is established, the ART state ST20 may be established by shifting to the CB state ST3. In this case, when a predetermined prize is established, or when a predetermined prize is not established despite winning a predetermined combination, the ART state ST20 is terminated by ending the CB state ST3, and the continuation condition is satisfied. In the established ART state ST20, a notification is made to prevent the termination condition from being established. It is possible to configure the ART state ST20 to end as the state ST3 ends.

(3) In the priority order information creation process (FIG. 16), lines extending in a straight line other than the main lines ML1 to ML3 may be included in the search lines. In this case, in the game in which one of the CB roles is won, if the winning of the CB role is not established, the predetermined number may be stopped and displayed on the lines other than the main lines ML1 to ML3, and one of the CB roles may be displayed. In a game in which the winning of the CB role is not established, the predetermined number is not stopped and displayed not only on the main lines ML1 to ML3 but also on the straight lines other than the main lines ML1 to ML3. good. As a result, it is possible to restrict the situation in which the player visually recognizes the predetermined number to the game in which the CB combination was not won in the game in which the CB combination was won.

(4) When the index value IV=1 is won, if the winning state of the CB role is not carried over, the compensation bell winning is established, and if the winning status of the CB role is carried over, the normal bell winning is established. The processing configuration for doing so is not limited to the processing from step S1008 to step S1010 in the winning process (FIG. 18). For example, in a state where the winning state of the CB combination is not carried over, if the upper limit of the information on the number of awarded game media that can be set in the number of awarded bits is set to "1", a normal bell prize is established. However, "1" is set in the grant number bit in the same manner as when the supplementary bell winning is established, and the pattern that establishes the supplementary bell winning is closer to the main line ML1 than the pattern that establishes the normal bell winning. The drawing bit is set so as to be preferentially stopped, and in the state where the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, the upper limit of the information of the number of awarded game media that can be set in the number of awarded bits is set to the upper limit of the information of the normal bell winning. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of game media to be provided at the time of establishment is set to “9” or more. As a result, when the winning state of the CB combination is not carried over, the symbol corresponding to the supplementary bell winning is preferentially displayed on the main line ML1 over the symbol corresponding to the normal bell winning. In the state that the winning state is carried over, the symbols corresponding to the normal bell winning can be preferentially stopped and displayed on the main line ML1 over the symbols corresponding to the supplementary bell winning.

(5) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which two types of CB combinations, ie, the first CB combination and the second CB combination, are set, and three or more types may be configured. In this case, for example, when any of the games in which the CB role is won wins the CB role, the ART state is shifted to ST20, and when the CB role does not win in the game in which the CB role is won. , the winning state of the CB combination may be cancelled. As a result, even in a configuration in which three or more types of CB hands are set, it is possible to have a configuration in which a transition to the ART state ST20 can occur in a game in which the CB hand is won. In this configuration, as in (2) above, the ART state ST20 may continue under the condition that the state is the CB state ST3, and the ART state ST20 continues regardless of whether the state is the CB state ST3 or not. may be configured.

(6) The advantage of the player in the ART state ST20 may differ depending on whether the winning state of the first CB combination is carried over or the winning state of the second CB combination is carried over. For example, rather than the ART shift lottery process executed when the first CB prize is not established in the game where the first CB role is won, it is executed when the second CB prize is not established in the game where the second CB role is won. The ART transition lottery process may have a higher probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST20, and although the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST20 is the same or substantially the same, the chance state ST21 and the base state ST22. and the distribution probability to the first special state ST23 may be different. As a result, in the game in which any CB role is won, the player not only expects that the winning of the CB role will not be established, but also expects that a more advantageous CB role is won. It is possible to improve the interest of Further, for example, the ART state ST20 when the winning state of the first CB role is carried over may have a higher probability of winning the replay combination than the ART state ST20 when the winning state of the second CB role is carried over. .

(7) ART transition lottery processing is executed in the game in which any of the CB roles is won, and the winning of the CB role is not established. is not limited to the configuration in which the transition to the ART state ST20 occurs, but in the game in which any CB role is won, if the winning of the CB role is not established, the transition to the ART state ST20 certainly occurs. may be As a result, it is possible to further heighten the player's sense of expectation for winning one of the CB roles and not winning the CB role. In this configuration, the chance state ST21 may be started when the transition to the ART state ST20 occurs. may be determined by lottery.

(8) The transition to the first special state ST23 is not limited to the configuration in which the transition to the first special state ST23 can occur only when the CB role is not won in the game in which the CB role is won. A configuration that can occur even in a state in which the winning state is carried over may be employed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which transition from the base state ST22 to the first special state ST23 can occur. This makes it possible to increase the chances of transition to the first special state ST23.

(9) The ART shift lottery process may be configured to be executed in situations other than the case where any of the CB wins has not been won in the game. For example, ART transition lottery processing is executed when relief replay winning is established in post-CB RT state ST6, which is not an ART half-finished state, and transition to ART state ST20 is made in the ART transition lottery processing when the transition wins. may be configured to generate

(10) In a game in which one of the CB roles is won, if the winning of the CB role is not established and the transition to the ART state ST20 does not occur and the transition to the lost RT state ST10 occurs, the lost RT state ST10 is entered. An ART transition lottery process may be executed in each game, and a transition to the ART state ST20 may occur when a transition is won in the ART transition lottery process. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the chances of the transition to the ART state ST20, and to improve the interest of the game in the lost RT state ST10.

(11) In a game in which one of the CB roles is won and in a game in which the winning state of the CB role is carried over, the symbol combination corresponding to the CB winning to be established and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. The configuration is not limited to the configuration having the same relationship with the order, and may have different configurations. In this case, for example, in a game in which one of the CB roles is won, if the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order, the establishment of the CB prize is not ensured, and the winning state of the CB role is set. In a game in which is carried over, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a specific order of stopping, the establishment of the CB winning may be ensured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CB prize from being established simply by setting the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the predetermined stopping order or the specific stopping order, and the game in which the CB role is won and the CB role are won. It is possible to change the stopping mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding establishment of the CB prize in the game in which the state is carried over.

(12) A game in which the CB winning combination is won and a game in which the winning state of the CB combination is carried over may have a different combination of CB winning symbols to be established. Specifically, in a game in which a CB winning role is won, the CB winning first to third group roles are treated as winning roles, while the CB winning fourth group role is not treated as a winning role. In a game in which the winning state of the CB role is carried over, the CB winning 4th group role is treated as a winning role, while the CB winning 1st to 3rd group roles are treated as winning roles. A configuration that does not break is also possible. In this case, even if the mode of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not different between the game in which the CB role is won and the game in which the winning state of the CB role is carried over, in the former game, the CB prize is awarded. Symbol combinations corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins can be established, and in the latter game, symbol combinations corresponding to the CB winning 4th group win can be established.

(13) In the state where the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, the situation in which neither combination is won in the combination lottery process (Fig. 12) does not occur. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a loss result in which no player wins is generated. In this case, since only the CB win is won when the result is out, even if the winning state of the CB win is carried over, the 1st to 3rd group wins of the CB prize win. The winning combination of the fourth group, which is treated as a winning combination, is not treated as a winning combination. Then, even in a game in which the winning state of the CB role is carried over, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop mode like the game in which the CB role is won, the CB prize is included. None of the winnings will be established, and the CB winning will be established unless the predetermined stop mode is performed.

(14) In a state in which the winning state of the CB combination is carried over, if a winning is made with an index value IV other than the index value IV = 2 to 10, the winning of the lottery combination set to that index value IV is established. Although the CB prize is not established because it is prioritized over the establishment of the CB prize, the CB prize can be established even if the index value IV other than the index value IV = 2 to 10 is won instead. may be configured.

(15) In a situation where any of the CB wins and a predetermined small win other than the index value IV=2 to 10 are in a winning state at the same time, the CB winning first to third group wins are the winning wins. Therefore, depending on the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a situation may occur in which none of the winnings is established. In this case, the situation may occur in a state in which the winning state of the CB hand is carried over, and the hand set to the predetermined index value IV in the normal state ST1 is the CB hand and the predetermined small hand. The above situation may occur in a game in which one of the CB roles is won.

(16) When the 1st to 3rd group winning CB wins are treated as winning hands, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the stop are considered to be the reels up to the first stop and the second stop. Also, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st to 3rd group wins of the CB prize are stopped on the main line ML1 regardless of the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the 3rd stop. Whether or not the CB winning is established is determined according to the timing of the stop operation of the target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but this may be changed. For example, whether or not the CB winning is established is determined according to the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the first stop, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the first stop are main lines. When the symbols that enable the establishment of the CB prize are stopped on the ML1, the CB prize is established regardless of the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are the targets of the second stop and the third stop. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the first stop do not stop the symbols enabling the establishment of the CB winning on the main line ML1, the reel 32L targeted for the second and third stops. , 32M, and 32R may be configured such that CB winning is not established regardless of the stop mode. Further, for example, it may be configured such that whether or not the CB prize is established is determined according to the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the second stop.

Further, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R associated with the stop operation timing and whether or not the CB winning is established may be fixed to any one of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. In this case, it is unclear which reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to determine whether or not the CB winning is established. It is possible to simplify the configuration in that there is no need to prepare individually for each pattern.

(17) In a state where the winning state of the CB role is carried over, if a win is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, the normal bell role is won, but the supplementary bell role is not won. may be In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order that enables establishment of the normal bell prize when winning with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which CB winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing of 32M and 32R. In addition, in a state in which the winning state of the CB role is carried over, if the winner is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, the complementary bell role will be the winning role, but the normal bell role will not be the winning role. good too. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in such a manner as to enable establishment of the compensatory bell prize when winning is won with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are not stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which CB winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing of 32M and 32R.

(18) In the case where the winning state of the CB combination is carried over and the winning is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 10, and the first stop is not the reels 32L, 32M and 32R for the correct answer, When the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the correct answer is not the correct timing, the CB prize is established. If the stop operation timing of 32L, 32M, and 32R is the correct timing, establishment of the CB prize may be avoided, and if it is not the correct timing, the CB prize may be established.

(19) In the state where the ART is not in the mid-term end state, when the post-CB RT state ST6 shifts to the internal state ST2 or the relief RT state ST7, the state shifts to the exit RT state ST10 instead of the ART state ST20. may be This makes it possible to reduce the advantage of staying in the post-CB RT state ST6.

(20) When the transition to the CB state ST3 is made in the post-CB RT state ST6, which is the halfway end state of the ART, the configuration is not limited to the end of the halfway end state of the ART. A configuration in which the halfway termination state is maintained may be employed. Then, the halfway end state of the ART may be continued until returning to the halfway ended ART state ST20. As a result, even if the ART state ST20 in the state where the continuation condition is satisfied is ended in the middle, the return to the ART state ST20 in the state ended in the middle is surely generated.

Note that this configuration may be applied to the fifth embodiment. In this case, even if the first replay win is established in the normal state ST1 in which the ART is halfway ended, the ART halfway end state does not end. Thus, the ART state ST20, which is the state ended in , is reliably returned.

(21) In the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, if the CB prize is established and the state shifts to the CB state ST3, the upper lamp is kept until the state returns to the ART state ST20 including the CB state ST3. 61, the effect for the ART state ST20 on the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 continues, and the image display device 63 says, "The performance of the advantageous state is temporarily declining due to an error in the pressing order. It may be configured to display an image indicating that the ART is in the middle end state, such as "If winning is avoided, the game will return to an advantageous state." As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who ends the ART state ST20 in spite of the fact that the continuation condition is satisfied from stopping the game even though the ART state is in the middle end state. becomes.

(22) If a CB prize is established in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the CB state ST3, the advantage of the CB state ST3 is a game in which one of the CB roles is won. The CB state ST3 when the winning of the CB role is established in , and the CB state ST3 to which the CB winning is established in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not established may be higher than the CB state ST3. For example, in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, in the CB state ST3 where the CB prize is established and the transition is made, the number of game media that is larger than the number of game media required to start one game in each game. It is good also as a structure which is provided or can be provided. As a result, it is possible to provide a relief benefit to the player who ends the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied.

(23) The replay probability of the RT state ST6 after CB is not limited to the same or substantially the same as that of the normal state ST1, and the replay probability of the RT state ST6 after CB is higher than that of the normal state ST1. , or may be the same or substantially the same as the relief RT state ST7. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the post-CB RT state ST6.

(24) When the CB state ST3 is completed, the post-CB RT state ST6 may be shifted to the rescue RT state ST7. In this case, if a shift to the CB state ST3 occurs in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the CB state ST3 ends and if a shift to the rescue RT state ST7 occurs, the Returning to the ART state ST20, which is the terminated state, and when a transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the CB state ST3 is terminated and the relief RT state ST7. A configuration may be adopted in which the same state as the off-RT state ST10 occurs when a transition to RT occurs. As a result, return to the ART state ST20 can occur early.

(25) In the fifth embodiment, another game state is set between the normal state ST1 and the relief RT state ST7. may be another game state, and when a relief replay win is established in the game state, another game state may be entered, and when a relief replay win is established in the game state, the relief RT state ST7 may be established. In addition, in the normal state ST1 and in each of the game states, it may be possible to execute a notification that a relief replay win can be established under the condition that the ART is in the middle end state. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the transition to the relief RT state ST7 will occur even though the ART is not in the half-finished state.

(26) When a transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs, a delay signal as well as the chance signal may be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 at the timing of the transition. In this case, when only the chance signal is received, the management computer of the game hall identifies that the transition from the base state ST22 to the chance state ST21 has occurred, and the chance state ST21 on the information display device provided in the game hall. When the delay signal is received in addition to the chance signal, it is specified that a transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 has occurred, and the chance state in the information display device. The updating process of the display section showing the number of occurrences of ST21 is executed when a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) are played in the chance state ST21. In this case, although the processing configuration of the management computer of the gaming hall becomes complicated, the processing load of the main MPU 72 is reduced in that it is not necessary to output a signal corresponding to the number of games completed in the chance state ST21. can be reduced.

(27) There is no limitation to the configuration in which the chance signal is not output when the chance state ST21 ends in a situation where the transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs and the output of the chance signal is delayed. Alternatively, the chance signal may be output for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the output of the chance signal is delayed, the management computer of the game hall can accurately grasp the number of occurrences of the chance state ST21. In this case, the output of the chance signal may be started when the initially set number of delay games is completed after the transition to the chance state ST21 occurs, or when the chance state ST21 ends. .

(28) When a transition from the normal state ST1 to the chance state ST21 occurs, both the output timing of the chance signal and the switching timing of the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state are delayed. It may be configured such that only is delayed. For example, while the output timing of the chance signal is delayed, the timing of switching the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state may not be delayed, and the timing of switching the internal state notification unit 68 to the lighting state may be delayed. The output timing of the chance signal may be configured so as not to be delayed.

(29) The internal state notification unit 68 may be configured to be in a lighting state regardless of whether the winning state of the CB combination is carried over or not carried over. However, in order to make it possible to distinguish from the display state of the internal state notification unit 68 whether the winning state of the CB combination is carried over or not, the winning state of the CB combination is carried over. It is necessary to make the display mode of the internal state notification unit 68 different between the state of being present and the state of not being carried over.

(30) The period during which the display mode of the ending image can be changed based on the operation of the effect operating device 64 is not limited to when the special ending base image 141c is displayed, and the first ending base image 141c is displayed. Even when the image 141a is displayed and when the second ending base image 141b is displayed, it is possible to change the display mode of the ending image based on the operation of the production operating device 64. good. This makes it possible to increase the chances of changing the display mode of the ending image.

Further, in this configuration, the type of the ending base image can be changed among the first ending base image 141a, the second ending base image 141b, and the special ending base image 141c based on the operation of the production operation device 64. good. As a result, the contents of the ending base image can also be changed according to the taste of the player.

(31) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the state in which the special ending base image 141c is displayed over the entire image display device 63 is maintained even during the period in which the display mode of the ending image can be changed. As a result of reducing the display size of the special ending base image 141c, the image display device 63 may have an area where no ending image is displayed.

Also, the special ending base image 141c is not limited to the non-display state, and may be configured to allow the special ending base image 141c to be non-display state. However, in this case, the special ending base image 141c can be hidden under the condition that any one of the character images 142 to 145 is displayed. It is possible to prevent a state in which the ending image is not displayed at all.

(32) Even when the ART state ST20 ends and the CB state ST3 is entered, an ending image including a character image corresponding to the total number of game media awarded in the ART state ST20 may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the ending image may be configured to be changeable based on the operation of the effect operating device 64, as in the case of the ending image in the first embodiment.

(33) The configuration in which the display mode of an image can be changed based on the operation of the production operation device 64 in the first embodiment may be applied to an image other than the ending image. For example, in the configuration in which the opening image is displayed when the ART state ST20 is started, the configuration may be such that the display mode of the opening image can be changed based on the operation of the operation device 64 for presentation. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a premium image that is generated only when a predetermined winning combination is won is displayed, the configuration may be such that the display mode of the premium image can be changed based on the operation of the operating device 64 for presentation. . Also, a configuration that allows the display mode of an image to be changed based on the operation of the operating device 64 for presentation may be employed in the pachinko machine. In this case, for example, the display mode of the end image of the bonus may be changed based on the operation of the operation device 64 for effect, and the display mode of the predetermined ready-to-win effect image may be changed based on the operation of the operation device 64 for effect. The configuration may be changeable.

(34) The display content of the image is changed accordingly as the game is continued in the slot machine 10, and the password enabling the display of the display content is read from the slot machine 10 and sent to the slot machine 10 in the next game. In the case of a configuration in which the game can be restarted from the display content in the situation where the password is read by registering the password, the operation of the operation device 64 for effect is performed on the condition that the game using the password is being performed. The configuration may be such that the display mode of the ending image can be changed based on.

(35) Each of the game states ST21 to ST24 of the ART state ST20 is configured to set the number of games that can be continued, but it may be configured to set the number of games that can be continued. In this case, if the set initial continuable number of game media is awarded when transitioning to each of the game states ST21 to ST24, the conditions for continuation of the game states ST21 to ST24 are not satisfied. For example, when the initial continuable number of game media is awarded in the base state ST22, a transition to the chance state ST21 occurs, and the initial continuable number of game media is awarded in either of the special states ST23 and ST24. ART state ST20, in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, may be changed to ART state ST20 when the initial continuable given number of game media is awarded in chance state ST21. .

(36) In the base state ST22, there is a high-probability transition state to the second special state ST24 apart from the special transition lottery mode, and the transition win is made in the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24. In some cases, the transition high probability state may be set in the subsequent base state ST22. In this case, if the number of sets of the transition high-probability state is 1 or more, the transition high-probability state is set, and the number of sets of 2 or more can be set in the first special state ST23 or the second special state ST24. good too.

(37) The ART transition lottery process and the process of managing the progress of the ART state ST20 may be configured to be executed by the effect side MPU 82 instead of the main side MPU 72 . In this case, the main side controls the timing of transition to the ART state ST20, the timing of transition to the chance state ST21, the timing of transition to the base state ST22, the timing of transition to the first special state ST23, the timing of transition to the second special state ST24, and the like. Since the MPU 72 cannot directly comprehend, the main MPU 72 indirectly comprehends the transition of the game state according to the winning mode, and executes output control of the chance signal and the ART signal based on the comprehension result. may be For example, in the case of winning, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is daringly notified in the winning combination in which the prize is established regardless of the stopping order and stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the event of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R occurs successively in that stopping order, it is possible to determine that the transition to the ART state ST20 has occurred and start outputting the ART signal. good. In addition, when a replay win occurs only when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined order, output of the ART signal is started, and when the replay win occurs again in that state, A configuration may be adopted in which the output of the ART signal is restarted after the output of the ART signal is temporarily stopped.

(38) When any CB combination is won in the normal state ST1, the ART shift lottery process is executed at the start of the game (that is, before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is validated). By adopting a configuration in which different drawing bit tables are selected depending on whether the ART transition winning is won or not, the reels 32L, 32L, and 32L on the main line ML1 when the CB winning is not established in the game. A configuration may be adopted in which the stop results of 32M and 32R are different between the case of winning the ART transition and the case of not winning the ART transition. For example, when an ART shift win is made, the combination of symbols corresponding to the non-establishment of the CB prize and the shift win is stopped and displayed on the main line ML1, When ART transition winning is not achieved, a combination of symbols corresponding to non-establishment of CB winning but not transition winning is stop-displayed on the main line ML1. As a result, it becomes possible to notify that the ART transition winning has been made by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, when the ART transition is won, the stop result corresponding to the game state of the transition destination in the ART state ST20 may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the type of game state to which the ART state ST20 is to be shifted by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

Also, in this configuration, if one of the CB roles is won in the state of the relief RT state ST7 and the state of the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the ART transition lottery process wins the ART transition. Regardless of whether or not it has become, it may be configured to be a stop result displayed when the ART transition winning is not won in the normal state ST1. Thus, in a situation where the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is established only by the game state shifting from the relief RT state ST7 to the internal state ST2 is continued, the symbol combination corresponding to the ART transition winning is not stopped and displayed. It becomes possible to In the ART state ST20, which is the rescue RT state ST7 and the continuation condition is not satisfied, the stop result corresponding to the result of the ART transition lottery process is displayed in the same way as in the normal state ST1. is preferred.

(39) When a transition to the CB state ST3 occurs in the ART state ST20 in which the post-CB RT state ST6 and the relief RT state ST7 are not set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the benefit of the ART state ST20 is It may be configured to disappear completely. In this case, the importance of not allowing the CB prize to be established in the ART state ST20 in which the continuation condition is satisfied increases.

(40) If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the correct answer cannot be stopped at the first stop in the event that the winning is made with any of the index values IV=2 to 10 in the internal state ST2, the correct answer target By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the stop operation timing of the correct answer target, a normal bell prize may be established instead of the compensation bell prize. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of establishing a normal bell prize.

(41) In the short RT state ST4 and in the relief RT state ST7, when the index value IV=1 and the winner is won, the normal bell prize is established. good. In this case, when the index value IV=1 is won, the compensation bell winning is established in the short RT state ST4, while the normal bell winning is established in the lost RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21. As a result, when the normal state ST1 shifts to any of the short RT state ST4, the off RT state ST10 and the chance state ST21, the game state to which it has shifted is determined from the frequency of establishment of the normal bell winning and the supplementary bell winning. It is possible to make people predict.

(42) Although the first relief replay winning prize and the second relief replay winning prize are set as prizes that trigger the transition to the relief RT state ST7, this may be changed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which relief replay winnings are set in one-to-one correspondence with six kinds of orders assumed as the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, for example, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the symbols in the predetermined range of the left reel 32L are passing over the main line ML1, the prize is established, and the symbols other than the predetermined range of the left reel 32L are displayed on the main line ML1. Winning established by stopping operation of the left reel 32L at the timing when the left reel 32L passes through, Winning established by stopping the middle reel 32M at the timing when the pattern of the predetermined range of the middle reel 32M passes over the main line ML1 , Winning established when the middle reel 32M is stopped at the timing when the symbols outside the predetermined range of the middle reel 32M are passing over the main line ML1, and the symbols within the predetermined range of the right reel 32R are passing over the main line ML1. Winning is established by stopping operation of the right reel 32R at the timing when the right reel 32R is stopped, and winning is established by stopping operation of the right reel 32R at the timing when the pattern outside the predetermined range of the right reel 32R is passing over the main line ML1. Alternatively, eight types of relief replay prizes may be set so as to be established in relation to the stop operation timings of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of relief replay prizes are set when both the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R match. By setting different index values IV for the combinations corresponding to these winnings, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a relief replay winning will be established in a state where the ART is not halfway finished.

(43) In each of the above-described embodiments, only one main ROM 73 is provided, and the single main ROM 73 contains programs for specific control, data for specific control, programs for non-specific control, and programs for non-specific control. However, instead of this, a plurality of (for example, two) main-side ROMs 73 are connected to the main-side MPU 72 via a bus, and some of them (for example, one ) main ROM 73 stores a program for specific control and data for specific control, and a different main ROM 73 (for example, one) stores a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. may be configured. In this case, if only one of the specific control program and specific control data and the non-specific control program and non-specific control data is to be checked, only the main ROM 73 corresponding to it is retrieved. It is possible to check In addition, if only one of the specific control program and specific control data and the non-specific control program and non-specific control data is used in common among multiple models, it will be supported. It becomes possible to use the main ROM 73 in common.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, when executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, after prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), data in all registers of the main MPU 72 are specified in the main RAM 74. Although it is configured to save to the stack area 74b for control, instead of this, the data of all the registers of the main side MPU 72 are saved to the stack area 74b for specific control, and then the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is executed. It is good also as a structure which prohibits.

(45) In each of the above embodiments, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is terminated, the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, and then the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 9) is permitted to be executed, but instead of this, the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control after permitting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. It may be configured to allow

(46) In each of the above-described embodiments, a stack area 74d for non-specific control is provided, and when processing corresponding to non-specific control ends, data in all registers of the main side MPU 72 are stored in the stack for non-specific control. The data saved in the stack area 74d for non-specific control is returned to the register of the main side MPU 72 when executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. No stack area 74d is provided, and the data stored in the register of the main side MPU 72 when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed is saved when processing corresponding to non-specific control ends A configuration in which the data is erased without being deleted may be employed. In this case, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the processing corresponding to the specific control is started, the data of all the registers of the main side MPU 72 are temporarily erased and then saved in the stack area 74b for specific control. A configuration may be adopted in which the received data is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being restarted while unnecessary data remains in the registers of the main MPU 72 when executing the processing corresponding to the specific control. becomes.

(47) In the start waiting process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment, the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process may be set in a continuous processing order. Even in this case, when the first non-specific control process ends, the data saved in the stack area 74b for specific control when starting the first non-specific control process is transferred to the register of the main MPU 72. Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is temporarily permitted while returning, and when the second non-specific control process is started after that, the data of all the registers of the main side MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control. In addition, the configuration may be such that execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is prohibited. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process are arranged in a continuous processing order, the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process It is possible to secure an opportunity for timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) to be executed between processing.

(48) Instead of prohibiting execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) when executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, timer interrupt processing is performed even during execution of processing corresponding to non-specific control. A configuration in which an interrupt (FIG. 9) can occur may be used. In this case, after the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) ends, the process corresponding to the non-specific control that was being executed is resumed. Therefore, when the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) starts, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the non-specific control stack area 74d, and when the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) ends, the non-specific control The data saved in the stack area 74d for the main MPU 72 is returned to the register.

In this configuration, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is executed by interrupting both the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, at the start of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), it is specified whether the processing currently being executed is the processing corresponding to the specific control or the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, and the processing corresponding to the specific control If there is, save the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 74b for specific control, and if the process corresponds to non-specific control, save the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 74d for non-specific control. evacuate. When terminating the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), it specifies which of the stack area 74b for specific control and the stack area 74d for non-specific control is the object for which data was saved at the start of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). , the data is returned to the registers of the main MPU 72 from the specified stack areas 74b and 74d.

(49) Processing (equivalent to step S3401) for prohibiting the execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) when executing processing corresponding to non-specific control; (corresponding to step S3402), saving the value of the stack point corresponding to the stack area 74b for specific control in the work area 74c for non-specific control (corresponding to step S3403), Processing for reading the value of the stack pointer for specific control from the work area 74c for non-specific control (corresponding to step S3404), processing for returning data from the stack area 74d for non-specific control to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3405) ), the process of saving all the register data of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 74d for non-specific control (corresponding to step S3413), and the value of the stack pointer corresponding to the stack area 74d for non-specific control to the non-specific Processing for storing in the work area 74c for control (corresponding to step S3414), processing for reading the value of the stack pointer for specific control from the work area 74c for non-specific control (corresponding to step S3415), stack area for specific control 74b to the register of the main MPU 72 (corresponding to step S3416) and the processing (corresponding to step S3417) for permitting the execution of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) are all performed by a specific control program. and specific control data.

(50) In place of the configuration in which the work area 74a for specific control and the work area 74c for non-specific control are clearly distinguished in the main RAM 74, processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control A common work area of the main RAM 74 may be used regardless of which of the above is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom when using the area of the main RAM 74 .

(51) In each of the above-described embodiments, the stack pointer information is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control when the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control. Alternatively, the information of the stack pointer may be saved in the specific control work area 74a.

(52) Occurrence of a fraudulent act different from the fraudulent act being monitored in the first non-specified control process, the second non-specified control process, and the third non-specified control process as the process corresponding to the non-specified control may be configured such that a process for monitoring is set. Further, as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, in addition to or instead of the process for monitoring the occurrence of fraud such as the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process, and the third non-specific control process, A configuration may be adopted in which a process different from the process for monitoring the occurrence of fraud is set. For example, the configuration may be such that the process for externally outputting the test information used when performing the operation test of the slot machine 10 is set as the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

(53) When the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63 and when the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported, it is reported that there is a possibility that the game state may change. The special display portion 67 is not limited to the configuration in which the display is performed only when the special display portion 67 is displayed. For example, even in a situation where the image display device 63 does not notify the user of the stop mode and the notification indicating that the game state may change, a predetermined prize is generated when the predetermined stop order is reached. It may be configured such that when a predetermined corresponding combination is won, the special display section 67 informs the player accordingly. Further, for example, when the image display device 63 does not notify the user of the stop mode, but indicates that there is a possibility that the game state may change, the special display unit 67 notifies the user of the stop mode. It is good also as a structure performed. However, it is not preferable if the special display section 67 notifies the player of the stop mode in such a manner that the player can clearly specify the stop mode even though the image display device 63 does not notify the stop mode. Therefore, when the special display portion 67 is used to notify in such a situation, it is preferable that the notification is made in a manner that makes it difficult to specify the stop mode.

(54) When notification corresponding to the result of lottery processing for a winning combination is executed on the image display device 63 or the like under the control of the effect-side MPU 82, the corresponding notification may be performed on the special display section 67. good. For example, before the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, the image display device 63 displays images such as characters and letters in a display color corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination in the game. , at the timing before the image is displayed, at the same timing as the image is displayed, or at the timing after the image is displayed, a display or The display corresponding to the display color may be configured to be executed in the special display portion 67 .

(55) Regardless of the result of the winning lottery process, the special display section 67 may display some kind of display in each game. In this case, the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination may be made in the special display section 67, but the player can clearly grasp the result of the lottery process of the combination by checking the special display section 67. Therefore, it is preferable to make the notification in a manner that makes it difficult to specify the result of the winning lottery process.

(56) When the image display device 63 notifies the stop mode, the notification corresponding to the stop mode is performed in the special display section 67, but when the image display device 63 does not notify the stop mode The special display section 67 may display such that the result of the winning lottery process cannot be specified. For example, when the image display device 63 does not notify the stop mode, the display content of the special display portion 67 may be determined by lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result may be displayed on the special display portion 67. . As a result, when the image display device 63 notifies the stop mode, the special display unit 67 notifies the stop mode. It is possible to make the display contents of the display unit 67 irregular. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the function of the special display section 67, and it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display section 67. FIG.

(57) When the image display device 63 notifies the user of the stop mode and when the notification indicating the possibility that the game state will be changed is performed, the corresponding notification is performed on the special display section 67. However, in other cases, the special display portion 67 may display a display such that the result of the winning lottery process cannot be specified. For example, if the image display device 63 does not notify the user of the stop mode and that there is a possibility that the game state will change, the display contents of the special display section 67 are determined by lottery, and the lottery result is determined. may be configured such that a display corresponding to is performed in the special display portion 67 .

(58) When the main MPU 72 is supplied with operating power, the special display section 67 may always display some kind of display. For example, in the case where the image display device 63 notifies the player of the stop mode and in the game in which the notification indicating the possibility that the game state will change occurs, the corresponding notification is performed on the special display section 67, In other cases, the special display portion 67 may display a standby display indicating that the printer is on standby. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the electrical path between the main side MPU 72 and the special display section 67, and whether or not a failure has occurred in the special display section 67. This can be done by simply looking at the portion 67 .

(59) Although the period during which the notification of the stop mode is performed on the image display device 63 is included in the period during which the notification corresponding to the stop mode is performed on the special display section 67, it is limited to this. At least a part of the period during which the image display device 63 reports the stop mode is not included in the period during which the special display section 67 reports the stop mode. may be For example, after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop mode in the special display section 67 is started, the notification of the stop mode is started on the image display device 63, but the notification of the stop mode is being performed on the image display device 63. The notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display section 67 may be terminated, and the notification of the stop mode on the image display device 63 is started after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display section 67 is terminated. A configuration may also be adopted in which, after the notification of the stop mode is started on the image display device 63, the notification corresponding to the stop mode on the special display unit 67 is started, and after the timing when the notification of the stop mode is finished on the image display device 63, the special The notification corresponding to the stop mode on the display unit 67 may be terminated. The notification corresponding to the stop mode in the special display section 67 may be terminated at a timing before the termination of the notification of the stop mode in 63 . By shortening the period during which the notification corresponding to the stop mode is executed in the special display part 67 than the period during which the notification of the stop mode is executed in the image display device 63, the attention of the player to the special display part 67 is increased. It is possible to reduce the intensity.

(60) The special display section 67 may be provided in a display section for notifying other information, such as the credit display section 65 or the given number display section 66 . For example, one of the credit display portion 65 and the given number display portion 66 is a partition frame portion that partitions the outer edge of the target display portion, and notification light emission for notifying the information of the notification target of the target display portion. , the special display portion 67 may be arranged at a position adjacent to the notification light emitting portion within the area partitioned by the partition frame portion of the target display portion. In this case, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display portion 67 .

(61) The special display section 67 sets the same number of unit display sections as the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that affect the winning result. The configuration may be such that the corresponding display is executed. In this case, in the special display section 67 as well as in the image display device 63, a notification that enables the player to clearly grasp the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed.

(62) The device for executing the notification of the stop mode under the control of the effect-side MPU 82 is not limited to the image display device 63, and instead of or in addition to the image display device 63, the stop mode is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which the dedicated light emitting unit for the purpose is controlled by the effect-side MPU 82 to notify the stop state, or the speaker 62 is controlled by the effect-side MPU 82 to perform the stop state notification. good too.

(63) The configuration in which the main MPU 72 determines whether or not to execute the notification of the stop mode is not essential, and the determination of whether or not to execute the notification of the stop mode is made by the main MPU 72 and the effect side MPU 82 respectively. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the determination of whether or not to execute the notification of the stop mode is performed in the effect-side MPU 82 . However, in the case of a configuration in which the production side MPU 82 decides whether or not to execute the notification of the stop mode, the information of the decision result needs to be transmitted from the production side MPU 82 to the main side MPU 72 .

(64) The content displayed on the special display section 67 corresponds one-to-one to the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process executed on the image display device 63 or the like under the control of the effect-side MPU 82. A plurality of types of display contents are displayed on the special display unit 67 for one type of notification contents corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process executed on the image display device 63 or the like. The configuration may be set.

For example, when the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the special display section 67 displays a display corresponding to the types of wins in the game on a one-to-one basis. It may be configured to be In this case, even if the image display device 63 notifies the same stop mode, the display contents on the special display section 67 will differ according to the type of winning combination in the game.

Further, when the stop state of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, one display content selected by lottery is selected from a plurality of types of display content corresponding to the content of the notification of the stop state. , and the selected display contents may be displayed on the special display portion 67 . For example, when the image display device 63 notifies that the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the special display section In 67, one of "3", "L" and "H" may be determined by lottery and displayed. Even in this case, even if the image display device 63 notifies the same stop mode, the display contents on the special display section 67 may be different.

According to each of the above configurations, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the content notified on the special display section 67 . However, the image display device 63 has a predetermined Display content that can be displayed on the special display unit 67 when the notification is executed, and display content that can be displayed on the special display unit 67 when notification different from the predetermined notification is executed on the image display device 63 It is preferable to have a configuration that is completely different from

(65) In the special display section 67, a display corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process may be executed. In this case, the display contents in the special display portion 67 may correspond one-to-one to the result of the winning lottery process. Further, instead of this configuration, a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents in the special display section 67 are set for each result of the winning lottery process may be employed. However, in order to make the display content of the special display portion 67 correspond to the result of the winning lottery process, the display content that can be displayed on the special display portion 67 when the result of the winning lottery process is a predetermined result and the It is preferable that the display contents that can be displayed on the special display portion 67 are completely different when the result of the lottery process is different from the predetermined result. In this case, the types of display contents of the special display section 67 set for one result of the lottery process for the combination may be the same number regardless of the result of the lottery process for any combination. It is good also as composition which is a different number according to the result of lottery processing.

(66) If the special display portion 67 is configured to display a result of the lottery process for the combination, the lottery for the combination on the special display portion 67 is displayed after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped. A configuration in which display corresponding to the result of processing is started may be employed. In this case, even if the special display portion 67 is checked while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, it is possible to prevent the result of the lottery process for the combination in the game from being specified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the lottery process for the combination is executed and before the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, the lottery process for the combination on the special display section 67 is executed. A configuration in which display corresponding to the result is started may be employed.

(67) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 82 is not limited to those in each of the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 82 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 82 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(68) In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that a privilege of giving a game medium is generated when a small winning combination is won. If it is For example, a configuration may be adopted in which prizes other than game media are paid out when a minor winning combination is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(69) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, as well as RT games, CT games or AT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games.

(70) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, graphics, and the like. Also, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and a pattern can be configured with a three-dimensional shape, etc., or a composite of these can compose a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(71) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the pattern is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the stop operation means is operated, the pattern is stopped to be displayed in a variable manner. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means (function for executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a medium provision process and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The response execution means performs predetermined response execution for executing control corresponding to a predetermined response winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination and a stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern becomes a predetermined mode. Means (in the first embodiment, a function for executing ART transition determination processing, CB setting processing, and CB post-processing in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing relief RT control processing in the main MPU 72); ,
The game machine is
a first control means (main side MPU 72) having the winning lottery means;
a first notification means (special display section 67) controlled by the first control means;
A second control means (production side MPU 82) that controls the second notification means (image display device 63) so that notification is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
with
The first control means provides a first notification corresponding to one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination. A first notification control means for controlling the first notification means so that the
The second control means selects the side to be notified of the first of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring when the predetermined corresponding winning combination is won in the lottery process for the winning combination. A game characterized by comprising a second notification control means (a function of executing the processing of step S2102 in the effect side MPU 82) that controls the second notification means so that the second notification corresponding to the mode is executed. machine.

According to the feature A1, when a predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process, the notification corresponding to the predetermined mode or the notification corresponding to the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring is executed. The player who confirms the above can set the stop operation mode to the predetermined mode or not to set it to the predetermined mode, and can execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination or not to execute the control corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination. becomes. In this configuration, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won, the second notification is executed by the second notification means based on the control of the second control means. Even if the processing load for executing the notification by the second notification means is increased, it is possible to prevent its influence from reaching the first control means.

However, in the configuration in which the second notification is executed by the second notification means based on the control of the second control means, the communication path between the first control means and the second control means and the second control means It is conceivable that an act of fraudulently trying to obtain a profit while causing the second notification means to illegally perform the second notification by performing illegality. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to understand that the fraudulent act is being carried out due to the fact that the second notification is being performed by the second notification means.

On the other hand, not only the second notification is performed by the second notification means controlled by the second control means, but also the first notification is performed by the first notification means directly controlled by the first control means. will be As a result, by visually confirming whether or not the first notification is being executed by the first notification means when the second notification is being executed by the second notification means, the fraudulent act as described above can be prevented. It is possible to check whether or not there is

As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the control for executing the notification of the stop mode.

In addition, in the configuration of the feature A1,
"The pattern display means comprises a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
The predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring are that the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined corresponding order."
A configuration may be applied.

Feature A2. The first notification control means prevents the execution of notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination by the first notification means when the predetermined corresponding combination is not won in the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by:

According to the characteristic A2, when the predetermined corresponding combination is not won, the first notification means does not execute the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination, thereby clarifying the role of the first notification means. It becomes possible to

Feature A3. Characteristic A1 or A2, wherein the first notification control means executes the first notification by the first notification means when the second notification is executed by the second notification means The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A3, when the second notification is performed by the second notification means, the first notification is performed by the first notification means. It is possible to check whether the notification is legitimate or not every time the second notification is executed.

Feature A4. The first notification control means allows the player to grasp the content of the stop operation mode to be notified more than the second notification by the second notification means. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the game machine is designed to be difficult to play.

According to feature A4, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second notification means in a configuration in which both the first notification means and the second notification means are provided. As a result, even if the notification mode of the first notification means is made simple, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the display range of the first notification means is narrower than the display range of the second notification means.

According to the feature A5, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second notification means in the configuration in which both the first notification means and the second notification means are provided. As a result, even if the notification mode of the first notification means is made simple, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A6. The first control means transmits predetermined information that enables the second notification means to execute the second notification (the processing of steps S1906, S1917, S2905 and S3005 in the main MPU 72 function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information does not include the result itself of the lottery process for the winning combination.

According to feature A6, even if predetermined information is obtained illegally by illegally accessing the communication path between the first control means and the second control means, the result of the winning lottery process can be grasped from the predetermined information. It is possible to make it impossible. As a result, it is possible to substantially invalidate the fraudulent act by obtaining the predetermined information.

Feature A7. The first control means is
It is determined whether or not to execute notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination. determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S1901 to S1903, steps S1910 to S1915, steps S2901 to S2902, and steps S3001 to S3002 in the main MPU 72);
Transmission means for transmitting predetermined information when execution of notification is determined by the determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S1906, S1917, S2905 and S3005 in the main MPU 72);
with
The first notification control means controls the first notification means so that the first notification is performed based on the determination by the determination means that the notification is to be performed,
Features A1 to A6, wherein the second notification control means controls the second notification means so that the second notification is executed based on the transmission of the predetermined information by the transmission means. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature A7, the determination of whether or not to execute the first notification by the first notification means and the second notification by the second notification means are collectively executed by the first control means. As a result, even if two-way communication is not performed between the first control means and the second control means, the first notification can be executed when the second notification is executed. .

Feature A8. There are a plurality of types of the predetermined corresponding combination with different content of the predetermined mode for executing the control corresponding thereto,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the first notification control means executes the first notification in a mode corresponding to the type of the predetermined corresponding combination.

According to feature A8, even in a configuration in which a plurality of types of predetermined corresponding combinations exist, the content of notification corresponding to the current game round can be grasped by confirming the content of the first notification in the first notification means. becomes possible.

Feature A9. The first notification control means enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding winning combination is won in the lottery process for the winning combination. In a situation where the notification is not executed by the second notification means, the notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode is not performed by the first notification means. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that

According to feature A9, the first notification means executes the notification that allows the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring, even though the second notification means does not execute the notification. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature A10. The second notification control means executes notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination. means for controlling the second notification means so that the special notification is executed (function for executing the processing of step S2105 in the production side MPU 82),
When the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the winning lottery process and the special notification is executed by the second notification section, the first notification control means does not take the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the first notification means does not execute notification that allows the player to recognize the manner in which the game is to be played.

According to the feature A10, in a situation where the second notification means executes the special notification, although the notification that allows the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring is not executed, the predetermined mode and the It is possible to prevent the first notification means from executing the notification that allows the player to recognize the mode for preventing the predetermined mode.

Feature A11. The first notification control means executes notification corresponding to the situation when the predetermined corresponding winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination and the special notification is executed by the second notification means. The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized in that the first notification means is controlled so as to.

According to the characteristic A11, even when the special notification is being executed by the second notification means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special notification is legitimate by checking the first notification means. Become.

Feature A12. When both the first notification by the first notification means and the second notification by the second notification means are executed, the first notification is performed at a timing after the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the second notification is started by the second notification means.

According to feature A12, by checking the first notification means at the timing when the second notification is started in the second notification means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the second notification is legitimate. Become.

Feature A13. means for invalidating an operation to stop the variable display of the pattern for a predetermined period from the start timing when the variable display of the pattern is started;
The first notification control means causes the first notification means to start the first notification at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period elapses when the predetermined corresponding winning combination is won in the winning lottery process. so that
The second notification control means, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination, the second notification at a timing after the predetermined timing and before the predetermined period elapses. The game machine according to feature A12, wherein the game is started by the second notification means.

According to the feature A13, even if the second notification is started after the timing at which the first notification is started, it is possible to start the second notification during the invalid period of the stop operation. , it is possible for the player to recognize the content of the second notification before the stop operation is validated.

Feature A14. When both the first notification by the first notification means and the second notification by the second notification means are executed, the first notification is performed at a timing after the timing when the second notification is completed by the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the first notification ends in the notification means.

According to feature A14, since the first notification does not end before the second notification ends, it is possible to increase the chances of confirming whether the second notification is legitimate or not. Become.

For the configuration of features A1 to A14, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group A, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art As a kind of game machines, there are known slot machines and game machines that allow playing games similar to slot machines by using game balls instead of medals as game media. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while medals are being bet, the control means executes the lottery process of the winning combination. Further, when the winning lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation stop control is executed at to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

In the gaming machine in which the rotation of the reels is stopped based on the stop operation on the stop button as described above, it is notified that the reels are to be stopped in a predetermined manner, and the reels are stopped according to the notification. Arrangements are known in which corresponding controls are implemented. For example, there is known a configuration in which the stop order of the reels is notified, and a predetermined prize is established by stopping the reels in the order according to the notified stop order, and medals corresponding to the predetermined prize are paid out. there is In addition, there is a configuration in which the stop order of the reels is notified, and a predetermined prize is established by stopping the reels in the order according to the notified stop order, and the game state transition corresponding to the predetermined prize is generated. Are known. Notification of such a stop mode is performed by executing notification control by another control means that has received information from the control means that executes the lottery process for the winning combination.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the one illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately perform control for executing notification of the stop mode, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Execute specific processing (start waiting processing, reel control processing) in which a plurality of types of processing are set in a predetermined execution order, and temporarily store information in internal storage means (register of main side MPU 72) when executing processing A control means (main side MPU 72) for storing in
The control means are
First predetermined processing execution means for executing the first predetermined processing among the plurality of types of processing (function for executing processing of steps S401 to S411, steps S413 to S415, steps S1102 to S1110, etc. in the main MPU 72) When,
Second predetermined processing execution means for executing the second predetermined processing among the plurality of types of processing (first non-specific control in the main MPU 72 in the first, second, and third embodiments) processing, a function of executing the second non-specific processing and the third non-specific control processing, in the case of the fourth embodiment non-specific control calling processing, first non-specific control processing, second non-specific processing and third non-specific a function to execute specific control processing);
When starting the second predetermined process without saving the information stored in the internal storage means (stack area 74b for specific control) when starting the first predetermined process After that, save execution means for saving the information stored in the internal storage means to the save storage means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3402, S3502 and S3602 in the main MPU 72 , the function of executing the processing of steps S3703 and S3709 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4102 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. If it is a form, the function of executing the processing of step S4202 in the main side MPU 72);
When or after the second predetermined process is completed, a return executing means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means (step S3416 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, The function of executing the processing of steps S3511 and S3611, the function of executing the processing of steps S3705 and S3711 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and the step S4105 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment. function of executing the process of step S4211 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when the first predetermined process included in the specific process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means is not saved to the save storage means. When the second predetermined process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the save storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the information saved in the save storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably perform various controls.

Feature B2. The second predetermined process is either a process that is executed when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, or a process that is executed by interrupting other processes when an interrupt condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that there is no

According to feature B2, even if the supply of operating power is stopped and the interrupt process is not executed, when the second predetermined process is executed, the Information is saved in the saving storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed, which is different from the second predetermined process. It is possible to improve the accuracy of the information in the internal storage means when the processes of the process group are executed.

Feature B3. The control means is
an interrupt execution means (function for executing interrupt processing in the main MPU 72) that interrupts the specific processing and executes interrupt processing when an interrupt condition is satisfied;
Setting means for prohibiting the execution of the interrupt process when or after the second predetermined process is started (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3401, S3501 and S3601 in the main MPU 72 , the function of executing the processing of steps S3702 and S3708 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4101 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. If it is a form, the function of executing the processing of step S4201 in the main side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B3, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited when the second predetermined processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent further interruption of processing in a situation where the information stored in the internal storage means has been saved in the save storage means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration for saving the information stored in the internal storage means.

Feature B4. The control means includes a third predetermined process execution means (a second non-executable means in the main MPU 72) for executing a third predetermined process after the second predetermined process is executed as a part of the processes among the plurality of kinds of processes. function to execute specific control processing),
The setting means permits the execution of the interrupt process when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, and prohibits the execution of the interrupt process when or after the third predetermined process is started. The gaming machine according to Characterizing Feature B3.

According to feature B4, in a configuration in which execution of interrupt processing is prohibited even when the third predetermined processing included in the specific processing is executed, execution of interrupt processing is once permitted when the second predetermined processing is completed. Then, when the third predetermined process is executed, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited again. This makes it possible to shorten the period during which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and to ensure the chance of executing the interrupt processing between the second predetermined processing and the third predetermined processing.

Feature B5. The save execution means saves the information stored in the internal storage means to the save storage means when or after starting the third predetermined process,
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the return execution means restores the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after the third predetermined process is completed.

According to feature B5, the saving and restoring of information stored in the internal storage means are individually performed corresponding to each of the second predetermined process and the third predetermined process. As a result, information is saved in each of the second predetermined process and the third predetermined process, and an opportunity for interrupt processing to be executed between the second predetermined process and the third predetermined process is ensured. In the configuration, it is possible to prevent interrupt processing from being executed in a situation where the information stored in the internal storage means has been saved in the save storage means.

Feature B6. The save storage means is
a first save storage means (stack area 74b for specific control) for saving information stored in the internal storage means when or when the second predetermined process is started;
a second save storage means (stack area 74d for non-specific control) for saving the information stored in the internal storage means when or when the second predetermined process is terminated;
with
The save execution means is
When starting or after starting the second predetermined process, means for saving information stored in the internal storage means to the first save storage means (in the first embodiment, step S3402 in the main MPU 72; The function of executing the processing of steps S3502 and S3602, the function of executing the processing of steps S3703 and S3709 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and the step S4102 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment. function of executing the process of step S4202 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment);
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, means for saving information stored in the internal storage means to the second save storage means (step S3413 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, The function of executing the processing of steps S3508 and S3608, the function of executing the processing of step S3805 in the main MPU 72 in the second and third embodiments, and the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment a function to execute the processing of step S4208 in
with
The return executing means is
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, means for restoring the information saved in the first save storage means to the internal storage means (step S3416 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, The function of executing the processing of steps S3511 and S3611, the function of executing the processing of steps S3705 and S3711 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and the step S4105 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment. function of executing the process of step S4211 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment);
When starting or after starting the second predetermined process, means for returning the information saved in the second save storage means to the internal storage means (step S3405 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, The function of executing the processing of steps S3505 and S3605, the function of executing the processing of step S3803 in the main MPU 72 in the second and third embodiments, and the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment a function to execute the processing of step S4205 in
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B6, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information in the internal storage means at that time is not only saved in the first save memory means, but also when the second predetermined process ends. The information in the internal storage means at the point in time is saved in the second save storage means. Thereby, the information stored in the internal storage means is switched between when the process group corresponding to the first predetermined process is executed and when the process group corresponding to the second predetermined process is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately perform the processing of each processing group.

Feature B7. Predetermined storage means (main side ROM 73) storing a program necessary for executing processing in the control means,
A program for executing various processes included in a special process group in which the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the save storage means when the process is executed, including the second predetermined process, Address of an area in which a program for executing various processes included in a predetermined process group, which is a process group different from the special process group and includes the first predetermined process, is stored in the predetermined storage means in the predetermined storage means The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the addresses are stored in an area of an address group distinguished from the group.

According to feature B7, in the predetermined storage means, the address group of the program for executing various processes of the predetermined process group and the address group of the program for executing various processes of the special process group are clearly distinguished. there is This makes it possible to improve the workability when checking or correcting only one of the predetermined processing group and the special processing group.

Feature B8. A third process included in the special process group is executed after the first process included in the predetermined process group and before the second process, and a fourth process included in the special process group is executed. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the process is executed after the second process.

According to feature B8, classification into predetermined processing groups and special processing groups is performed regardless of the execution order of the processing, and the address groups of the programs in the predetermined storage means are clearly distinguished for each of these classified processing groups. It is This makes it possible to improve workability when checking and correcting programs for each classified process group.

Feature B9. A specific storage means (main side RAM 74) in which information is temporarily stored when executing processing in the control means,
The specific storage means includes an area (work area 74a for specific control) used when the control means executes the process included in the predetermined process group, and a specific control work area 74a included in the special process group in the control means. Characteristic feature B7 or B8, characterized in that the area (work area 74c for non-specific control) used when processing is executed is set so as to be aggregated into different address groups. game machine.

According to the characteristic B9, even in the specific storage means, the address group of the use area is clearly distinguished for each processing group. As a result, when executing a process included in one process group, it is possible to prevent information used in the process included in the other process group from being rewritten.

Feature B10. In addition to the second predetermined process, a plurality of types of processes exist as a group of special processes in which the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the save storage means when the process is executed,
The control means is
Identifying means for executing a specific process for identifying which type of process should be executed in the special process group (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4103 in the main MPU 72, In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4206 in the main MPU 72);
Starting means for starting the type of processing specified by the specified processing (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4104 in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, the processing of step S4207 in the main MPU 72 function) and
with
The save executing means saves the information stored in the internal storage means to the save storage means before the starting means starts the type of processing specified by the specifying process. The game machine according to any one of B1 to B9.

According to the characteristic B10, when executing the processing included in the special processing group, the processing for saving the information stored in the internal storage means to the saving storage means is performed in each of the processes included in the special processing group. , but are collectively executed on the processing side for specifying the processing to be executed in the special processing group. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity compared to a configuration in which the above-described saving process is set for each process included in the special process group.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the second predetermined process is a process different from a process for advancing a regular game based on player's operation.

According to feature B11, when a process different from the process for proceeding with the regular game is executed based on the player's operation, the internal storage means used in the process for proceeding with the regular game is stored. It is possible to prevent information from being rewritten.

For the configuration of features B1 to B11, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group B, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read/write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing according to the program read from the read-only storage means while writing information to and reading information from the read/write storage means. When executing this process, information is input from sensors and the like to the control means, and information is output from the control means to the electric actuators, the light emitting elements, and the like. It is also known that the control means, the read-only storage means, the read/write storage means, and the like are integrated into one chip.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while medals are being bet, the control means executes the lottery process of the winning combination. Further, when the winning lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation stop control is executed at to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. For example, a game medium is provided as the provision of the privilege.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform various controls appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Control means (main side MPU 72) for executing processing;
Predetermined storage means (main side ROM 73) storing a program necessary for executing processing in the control means;
with
The processing executed by the control means includes a predetermined processing group (processing group corresponding to specific control) including a plurality of types of processing, and a special processing group (processing group corresponding to non-specific control) including a plurality of types of processing. exists and
The program for executing the various processes included in the special process group is distinguished from the address group of the area in which the programs for executing the various processes included in the predetermined process group are stored in the predetermined storage means. A game machine characterized by being aggregated and stored in an area of a group of addresses.

According to feature C1, in the predetermined storage means, the address group of the program for executing various processes of the predetermined process group and the address group of the program for executing various processes of the special process group are clearly distinguished. there is This makes it possible to improve the workability when checking or correcting only one of the predetermined processing group and the special processing group.

Feature C2. A third process included in the special process group is executed after the first process included in the predetermined process group and before the second process, and a fourth process included in the special process group is executed. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the process is executed after the second process.

According to feature C2, classification into predetermined processing groups and special processing groups is performed regardless of the execution order of the processing, and the address groups of the programs in the predetermined storage means are clearly distinguished for each of these classified processing groups. It is This makes it possible to improve workability when checking and correcting programs for each classified process group.

Feature C3. A specific storage means (main side RAM 74) in which information is temporarily stored when executing processing in the control means,
The specific storage means includes an area (work area 74a for specific control) used when the process included in the predetermined process group is executed in the control means, and a work area 74a for specific control included in the special process group in the control means. The feature C1 or C2 according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that an area (work area 74c for non-specific control) used when processing is executed is set so as to be aggregated into different address groups. game machine.

According to the feature C3, even in the specific storage means, the address group of the use area is clearly distinguished for each processing group. As a result, when executing a process included in one process group, it is possible to prevent information used in the process included in the other process group from being rewritten.

For the configuration of features C1 to C3, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read/write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing according to the program read from the read-only storage means while writing information to and reading information from the read/write storage means. When executing this process, information is input from sensors and the like to the control means, and information is output from the control means to the electric actuators, the light emitting elements, and the like. It is also known that the control means, the read-only storage means, the read/write storage means, and the like are integrated into one chip.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while medals are being bet, the control means executes the lottery process of the winning combination. Further, when the winning lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation stop control is executed at to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. For example, a game medium is provided as the provision of the privilege.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is preferable that programs for executing various processes can be appropriately managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Display control means (function for executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a medium provision process and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The corresponding execution means is
1st prize (1st CB prize, 2nd CB prize) when the 1st prize (1st CB prize, 2nd CB prize) is won in the prize lottery process and the stop result corresponding to the 1st prize is displayed A first execution means (a function for executing CB setting processing and CB processing in the main side MPU 72) that executes the first control as the establishment of
When the second winning combination (index value IV = 2 to 10) is won in the winning lottery process and the stop result corresponding to the second winning combination is displayed, the second prize (normal bell winning, supplementary bell winning) A second execution means (function for executing the process of step S1307 in the main side MPU 72) that executes the second control as the establishment of
with
The pattern display control means includes:
In the case of the first situation in which the first winning combination is won in the winning lottery process but the second winning combination is not won, depending on the mode of operation for stopping the variable display of the pattern, A first display control means (a function of executing the process of step S603 in the main side MPU 72) that prevents any winning including the first winning from being established;
In the case of the second situation in which both the first and second winning combinations are won in the lottery process of the winning combination, if the operation mode of stopping the variable display of the pattern is not the specific operation mode, the second winning combination is selected. A second display control means (a step in the main MPU 72) for establishing the first prize when a prize different from the first prize is established and the operation mode for stopping the variable display of the pattern is the specific operation mode. a function to execute the processing of S1005 and step S1007;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, in the first situation where the first win is won but the second win is not won, none of the wins, including the first win, can occur. On the other hand, in the second situation in which both the first and second winning combinations are won, either the first winning or a winning different from the first winning is established according to the stop operation mode. As a result, even if the situation is common in that the first role is won, not only the type of winning establishment but also the existence of winning establishment can be changed depending on the relationship with other winning roles. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to diversify the mode of establishing a prize. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The pattern stop mode when the first prize is established in the first situation is different from the pattern stop mode when the first prize is established in the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature D1.

According to the feature D2, the winning of the first combination is due to the fact that the patterns are stopped in different manners in the case where the first prize is established in the first situation and in the case where the first prize is established in the second situation. In this respect, it becomes easier to perform different stop control between the first situation and the second situation.

Feature D3. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
Corresponds to a combination that is won at a winning effective position (a position on the main line ML1 to ML3) set in each of the pattern display areas when the variable display of the pattern in each of the pattern display areas is stopped. When the pattern is stopped and displayed, a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established,
When the first prize is established in the first situation, the combination corresponding to the first situation (combination of symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of the first CB prize, the combination of symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of the first CB prize, Each symbol constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the 1st group role to the 3rd group role) is stopped and displayed,
When the first prize is established in the second situation, the combination corresponding to the second situation (combination of symbols corresponding to the 4th group win of the 1st CB win, the 4th group win of the 2nd CB win) is placed in the winning effective position. Each pattern that constitutes a combination of corresponding patterns) is stopped and displayed,
The first display control means, in the first situation, gives priority to the patterns forming the first situation-corresponding combination over the patterns forming the second situation-corresponding combination, and stops them at the prize-winning position,
The second display control means is characterized in that, in the second situation, the patterns forming the second situation combination are prioritized over the pictures forming the first situation combination and are stopped at the winning effective position. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, only by changing the priority of stopping the symbols constituting the first situation-corresponding combination and the symbols constituting the second situation-corresponding combination at the prize winning positions, the first situation and the second situation can be obtained. It is possible to vary the mode of whether or not the first prize is established.

Feature D4. The first display control means disallows establishment of the combination corresponding to the second situation when the picture is stop-displayed in the picture display area that is to be stopped first in the first situation, and
The second display control means disallows establishment of the combination corresponding to the first situation when the picture is stop-displayed in the picture display area that is the stop target in the first order in the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized by:

According to the characteristic D4, when the pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area that is the target to be stopped for the first turn, the establishment of the second situation corresponding combination is not allowed in the first situation and the second situation. , the establishment of the first situation response combination is not possible, so in the first situation, the establishment of the second situation response combination is not allowed, and in the second situation, the establishment of the first situation response combination is not allowed. It becomes easier to design a configuration for generating

Feature D5. When a plurality of winning roles are won, the pattern display control means displays a pattern corresponding to winning in common for the plurality of winning roles only for one winning role. It is configured to perform control to stop with priority to the winning effective position rather than the pattern corresponding to the winning,
When the second prize is established, the symbols forming the second prize-corresponding combination are stopped and displayed at the prize-effective position,
A plurality of types of the second combination corresponding to the situation and the combination corresponding to the second prize are set in correspondence with the stop order pattern of the plurality of pattern display areas,
The second situation-corresponding combination and the second winning-corresponding combination, which are set to correspond to the same stopping order pattern, are in the pattern display areas in an order different from the last order in the stopping order pattern. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, characterized in that the patterns are common.

According to the feature D5, when multiple winning roles are won, a pattern that is common to the winning multiple winning roles wins only one winning role. Priority is given to the corresponding pattern when stopping at the prize winning position. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the stop mode with a high possibility of winning a prize.

In this configuration, a plurality of types of the second combination corresponding to the situation and the second combination corresponding to the winning prize are set in correspondence with the stop order pattern of the plurality of pattern display areas, and are set in correspondence with the same stop order pattern. The second situation-corresponding combination and the second prize-corresponding combination have a common pattern in the pattern display area whose order is different from the last order in the stop order pattern. In this case, in the second situation, the pattern common to both the second situation combination and the second winning combination is given priority over the picture forming the first situation combination when stopping at the winning effective position. becomes. As a result, while utilizing the configuration of the stop control for prioritizing the stop state with a high possibility of winning a prize as described above, in the second situation, the formation of the second situation-handling combination is controlled by the first situation-handling combination. It is possible to give priority to establishment.

Feature D6. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process for the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The winning lottery means wins some winning combination when the winning lottery process for the winning combination is executed while the winning state of the first winning combination is maintained,
When a winning combination different from the second combination is won while the winning state of the first combination is maintained, the picture display control means responds to the different combination regardless of the stop mode of the variable display of the pictures. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that a winning is established.

According to feature D6, the situation in which the first prize is established while the winning state of the first combination is maintained is limited to the situation in which the second combination is won while the winning state of the first combination is maintained. It becomes possible to This makes it possible to clarify the situation in which the first prize can be established while the winning state of the first combination is maintained.

Feature D7. When the notification execution condition is satisfied in the second situation, a predetermined notification is executed to allow the player to recognize a stop operation mode that enables establishment of a prize different from the first prize, and If the notification execution condition is not satisfied in two situations, predetermined notification execution means that does not execute the predetermined notification (function for executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72 and notification processing at the time of stop, operation notification in the effect side MPU 82 function of executing processing).

According to the feature D7, when the second winning combination is won while the winning state of the first winning combination is maintained, a predetermined notification is made to prevent the establishment of the first winning combination. It is possible to cause a situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the first situation is a situation in which only the first combination is won.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to create a situation in which no winning including the first winning is established in a situation where only the first winning combination is won.

Feature D9. The first winning combination is characterized in that, when winning in the lottery process of the winning combination, the winning state is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D8.

According to the feature D9, the winning state of the first combination is maintained because the first prize corresponding to the first combination is not established in the game in which the first combination is won. Then, when the winning state of the first combination is maintained, the winning of the second combination results in the second situation. As a result, it is possible to generate the second situation without setting the lottery results in which the first and second roles are won at the same time as the lottery results of the role lottery process. The occurrence frequency of the second situation can be adjusted only by adjusting the probability of winning the second combination.

Feature D10. Any of the features D1 to D9 characterized in that the case where the first prize is not established in the situation where the first winning combination is won is more advantageous for the player than the case where the first prize is established. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the characteristic D10, it is more advantageous if the first prize is not established, so in the first situation, the player performs the stop operation while expecting that the first prize is not established, and the second situation. In , the player performs the stop operation while expecting that a prize different from the first prize will be established.

Feature D11. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process for the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The gaming machine shifts the game state to a predetermined game state (ART state ST20) advantageous to the player when the first prize corresponding to the first prize is not established in the game in which the first prize is won. state transition means (function for executing ART transition determination processing in the main side MPU 72),
While the winning state of the first combination is maintained, the predetermined game state is continued, and when the first winning corresponding to the first combination is established, the game state is shifted to a game state different from the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized by:

According to the feature D11, the game state shifts to the predetermined game state by not establishing the first prize in the first situation, and when the predetermined game state becomes the second situation, a prize different from the first prize is awarded. By making it materialize, it becomes possible to continue the predetermined game state. Since the predetermined game state is a game state advantageous to the player, the player performs the stop operation while expecting that the first winning will not be established in the first situation, and the first winning in the second situation. The player performs the stop operation while expecting that a different prize will be established.

Feature D12. A special game state (first special state ST23) that can be shifted to only when the first prize corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won is present. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11.

According to feature D12, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to whether or not the first prize is established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

Feature D13. The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein the special game state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

According to feature D13, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that the first prize is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

Feature D14. The corresponding execution means is
special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1703 in the main MPU 72);
Lottery corresponding execution means for executing control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process when the first prize is not established in the first situation (function for executing the processing of steps S1704 to S1719 in the main side MPU 72 )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D13, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D14, if the first prize is not established in the first situation, the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed. It is possible to increase the attention of the person.

Feature D15. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process for the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The combination lottery means is configured to prevent the first combination from being included in the lottery targets in the combination lottery process when the winning state of the first combination is maintained,
In the game in which the first combination is won, if the first prize corresponding to the first combination is not established, control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed, and the winning state of the first combination is determined. The special lottery process is not executed or the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is not executed even if the first prize corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the maintained state. The gaming machine according to feature D14.

According to the feature D15, it is possible to limit the chances of executing the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process, and to increase the player's attention to whether or not the first prize is established in the first situation. It becomes possible.

Feature D16. There are a plurality of types of the first role,
In the winning lottery process, a winning combination (first CB winning combination) out of a plurality of types of first winning combination is won, and another winning combination (second CB winning combination) out of multiple types of first winning combination (second CB combination) wins. It is a configuration that creates a situation where
The first display control means, in the first situation, selects a plurality of types of stop operation modes capable of avoiding establishment of the first prize corresponding to the partial combination among the plurality of types of the first combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, characterized in that a stop operation mode for establishing the first prize corresponding to the other combination among the first combinations is established.

According to feature D16, there are a plurality of types of first winning combination that cause the first situation, and the type of the first winning combination that causes the first situation establishes the first prize or establishes the first prize. The stopping operation mode for avoidance is different. As a result, the player who expects to establish the first prize or to avoid the establishment of the first prize can predict the type of the first combination causing the first situation, and perform the stop operation based on the prediction. will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D17. The gaming machine according to feature D16, wherein the winning probabilities of the plurality of types of first combinations are the same or substantially the same.

According to feature D17, the probability that the winning probability of a plurality of types of the first hand is the same or substantially the same makes the type of the first hand that causes the first situation predicted by the player correct. can be set to be the same or substantially the same regardless of the type of first combination predicted. As a result, it is possible to predict the type of the first combination in a situation in which there is substantially no bias in the probability of correct prediction.

Feature D18. The first display control means controls, when the first situation is the result of winning the part of the plurality of types of the first winning combination, the other winning combination among the plurality of types of the first winning combination. establishment of the first prize corresponding to the part of the combination is avoided when the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern is performed in a stop operation mode that enables the establishment of the first prize corresponding to When the first situation is due to winning the other combination among the plurality of types of the first combination, the first winning combination corresponding to the partial combination among the plurality of types of the first combination Characteristic D16 or D17, characterized in that it is possible to avoid the establishment of the first prize corresponding to the other combination when the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern is performed in a stop operation mode that enables establishment. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D18, the first prize is established when the kind of first combination causing the first situation predicted by the player is incorrect. As a result, the player who expects that the first prize will not be established will make the above prediction carefully, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D19. Any one of features D16 to D18, characterized in that the corresponding execution means executes the same control even if the first prize corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of the first winning combination is established. game machine.

According to the feature D19, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while reducing the control processing load when the first prize is established.

Feature D20. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
When the variable display of the patterns in each pattern display area is stopped, and when the patterns corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed at the winning effective positions set in each of the pattern display areas, It is a configuration in which a prize corresponding to the winning role is established,
The first display control means determines, in the first situation, which pattern display area to be stopped in order other than the predetermined order, the stop operation timing of the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area. The pattern corresponding to the first prize is stopped and displayed at the winning effective position of the pattern display area, and the pattern display area to be stopped in the predetermined order is displayed in the pattern display area. The pattern corresponding to the first prize is stop-displayed at the prize-winning position in the pattern display area, except when the stop operation timing of the variable display of the pattern is a predetermined stop operation timing. The game machine according to any one of D19.

According to feature D20, the pattern display area that determines whether or not the first winning is established in the first situation is limited to the pattern display areas that are to be stopped in a predetermined order. It is possible to clarify the object that the person should pay attention to. In particular, the pattern display area that determines whether or not the first prize is established in the first situation is not limited to a predetermined type of pattern display area, but is limited to a pattern display area to be stopped in a predetermined order. Therefore, regardless of the order in which the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop operation of the pattern display area to be stopped in the predetermined order. becomes.

Feature D21. The gaming machine according to feature D20, wherein the predetermined order is the last order.

According to the feature D21, in the first situation, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the first prize is established until the variable display of patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped. As a result, the state in which the player pays attention to whether or not the first prize has been established can be maintained until the variable display of patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped.

Feature D22. There are a plurality of types of the first role,
In the winning lottery process, a winning combination (first CB winning combination) out of the multiple first winning combinations is won, and another winning combination (second CB winning combination) out of the multiple first winning combinations (second CB winning combination) is won. It is a configuration that creates a situation where
In the case of the first situation, the first display control means controls the stop operation timing of the pattern display area to be stopped in the predetermined order, corresponding to the part of the plurality of types of the first combination. The stop operation timing that can avoid the establishment of the first prize is the stop operation timing that establishes the first prize corresponding to the other one of the plurality of types of first prizes. The gaming machine according to feature D20 or D21.

According to feature D22, there are a plurality of types of the first winning combination that cause the first situation, and depending on the type of the first winning combination that causes the first situation, the first prize is established or the establishment of the first prize is established. The stopping operation mode for avoidance is different. As a result, the player who expects to establish the first prize or to avoid the establishment of the first prize can predict the type of the first combination causing the first situation, and perform the stop operation based on the prediction. will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area to be stopped in a predetermined order is stopped, whether or not the player's prediction of the type of the first combination causing the first situation was correct is checked. unable to comprehend. This makes it possible to clarify the target that the player should pay attention to in order to confirm whether or not the prediction was correct.

Feature D23. The gaming machine according to feature D22, wherein the winning probabilities of the plurality of types of first combinations are the same or substantially the same.

According to feature D23, since the winning probabilities of a plurality of types of the first combination are the same or substantially the same, the probability that the type of the first combination causing the first situation predicted by the player will be correct. can be set to be the same or substantially the same regardless of the type of first combination predicted. As a result, it is possible to predict the type of the first combination in a situation in which there is substantially no bias in the probability of correct prediction.

Feature D24. The first display control means controls, when the first situation is the result of winning the part of the plurality of types of the first winning combination, the other winning combination among the plurality of types of the first winning combination. When the stop operation is performed on the pattern display area to be stopped in the predetermined order at the stop operation timing that enables the establishment of the first winning corresponding to the first prize corresponding to the part of the winning combination If it becomes possible to avoid the establishment of one prize, and if the first situation is due to the winning of the other combination among the plurality of types of the first combination, the part of the plurality of types of the first combination When a stop operation is performed on the pattern display area to be stopped in the predetermined order at the stop operation timing enabling establishment of the first prize corresponding to the winning combination, the second winning combination corresponding to the other winning combination is performed. The gaming machine according to feature D22 or D23, characterized in that establishment of one winning can be avoided.

According to the feature D24, the first prize is established when the type of the first combination causing the first situation predicted by the player is incorrect. As a result, the player who expects that the first prize will not be established will make the above prediction carefully, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D25. According to any one of features D22 to D24, wherein the correspondence executing means executes the same control even if the first prize corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of the first winning combination is established. game machine.

According to the feature D25, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while reducing the control processing load when the first prize is established.

Feature D26. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
When the variable display of the patterns in each pattern display area is stopped, and when the patterns corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed at the winning effective positions set in each of the pattern display areas, It is a configuration in which a prize corresponding to the winning role is established,
In the second situation, when the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the corresponding order, the second display control means determines the operation timing for stopping the variable display of the pattern in each of the pattern display areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D25, wherein a prize different from the first prize is established even at the timing of .

According to feature D26, when the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the corresponding order in the second situation, the operation timing of stopping the variable display of patterns in each of the pattern display areas is any timing. Even if there is, a prize different from the first prize is established and the first prize is not established. As a result, a player who expects that the first prize will not be established in the second situation can avoid the establishment of the first prize by stopping the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the corresponding order. becomes.

Feature D27. The second display control means stops the variable display of the pattern in at least a predetermined pattern display area even if the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of pattern display areas is not stopped in the corresponding order in the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature D26, wherein when the operation timing is the stop operation timing to be established, a prize different from the first prize is established.

According to feature D27, even if the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display regions cannot be stopped in the corresponding order in the second situation, the operation timing for stopping the variable display of patterns in the predetermined pattern display regions is established. When it is the target stop operation timing, a prize different from the first prize is established and the first prize is not established. As a result, even if the player who expects that the first prize is not established in the second situation stops the variable display of the patterns in an order different from the corresponding order, the pattern changes in the predetermined pattern display area. By stopping the display at the timing of the stop operation to be established, it is possible to avoid the establishment of the first prize. Therefore, even if the variable display of the patterns is stopped in an order different from the corresponding order despite the attempt to stop the variable display of the patterns, the establishment of the first prize is avoided. It will be possible to give the opportunity to

Feature D28. Equipped with three or more of the pattern display areas,
The corresponding order is an order in which the pattern display areas to be stopped are determined in the first order, but the pattern display areas to be stopped in subsequent orders are arbitrary,
The gaming machine according to feature D27, wherein the predetermined pattern display area is a pattern display area set as the first stop target in the corresponding order.

According to the feature D28, when the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is stopped as the stop target of the first order, the establishment of the first prize can be avoided, and the predetermined pattern display area can be avoided. can not be made the stop target of the first turn, in the subsequent turn, by stopping the fluctuation display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area at the timing of the stop operation of the establishment target, the first prize can be won. establishment can be avoided. As a result, when the player who expects that the first prize will not be established in the second situation recognizes the corresponding order, the pattern display area different from the predetermined pattern display area will be the first target to be stopped. Even so, since the player recognizes the pattern display area in which the stop operation should be performed at the timing of the stop operation to be established, the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is stopped at the timing of the stop operation to be established. By doing so, it is possible to easily create a situation in which the establishment of the first prize is avoided.

Feature D29. Characteristic D28 characterized by comprising means for executing notification of the corresponding order (function for executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72, function for executing operation notification processing in the effect side MPU 82). The gaming machine described in .

According to the characteristic D29, when notification of the order of correspondence is executed, it is possible to avoid establishment of the first prize by stopping the variable display of the pattern in each pattern display area according to the order of correspondence. In addition, having the configuration of feature A28, the predetermined pattern display area, which is the target for which the establishment of the first prize can be avoided by the stop operation at the stop operation timing of the establishment target, is the stop target in the first order in the corresponding order. Since the pattern display areas are different, it is possible to grasp the type of the predetermined pattern display area by confirming the notification of the corresponding order. Therefore, even if the variable display of the pattern in each pattern display area cannot be stopped in the corresponding order in spite of the fact that the correspondence order is notified, the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is not started after that. It is possible to avoid establishment of the first prize by stopping at the stop operation timing of the establishment target.

Feature D30. means for executing notification of the corresponding order in the second situation (function for executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72 and operation notification processing in the effect side MPU 82);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped in an order different from the order corresponding to the corresponding order in the second situation, the timing of the establishment correspondence when stopping the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is determined. Means for executing a notification that the player can recognize (a function of executing notification processing at the time of stop in the main side MPU 72, a function of executing operation notification processing in the effect side MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D27 to D29, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D30, it is possible to avoid establishment of the first prize by stopping the variable display of the pattern in each pattern display area in the corresponding order by notifying the corresponding order in the second situation. Become. In addition, even if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding order, the notification is executed so that the player can recognize the timing of corresponding establishment, so that the pattern changes in the predetermined pattern display area at the timing corresponding to establishment. By stopping the display, it is possible to avoid establishing the first prize.

For the configuration of features D1 to D30, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Display control means (function for executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a medium provision process and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The corresponding execution means, when the first winning combination (first CB winning combination, second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process of the winning combination and the stop result corresponding to the first winning combination is displayed, the first winning combination (first CB winning combination) A first execution means (a function of executing CB setting processing and CB processing in the main side MPU 72) that executes the first control as establishment of winning, second CB winning),
A configuration in which the player is more advantageous to the player when the first prize is not established when the first winning combination is won than when the first prize is established,
There are a plurality of types of the first role,
In the winning lottery process, a winning combination (first CB winning combination) out of the multiple first winning combinations is won, and another winning combination (second CB winning combination) out of the multiple first winning combinations (second CB winning combination) is won. It is a configuration that creates a situation where
The pattern display control means is configured such that the stop operation mode capable of avoiding establishment of the first prize corresponding to the part of the plurality of types of the first winning combination is set to the other one of the plurality of types of the first winning combination. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a first display control means (a function of executing the processing of step S603 in the main side MPU 72) that makes it a stop operation mode that establishes the first winning corresponding to the combination of .

According to the feature E1, it is more advantageous if the first prize is not established. Therefore, in the situation where the first prize is won, the player performs the stop operation while expecting that the first prize is not established. It turns out. In this case, there are a plurality of types of the first combination, and the stopping operation mode for avoiding the establishment of the first prize differs depending on the type of the winning first combination. As a result, the player who expects to avoid the establishment of the first prize predicts the type of the first winning combination causing the first situation and performs the stop operation based on the prediction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the winning probabilities of the plurality of types of first combinations are the same or substantially the same.

According to feature E2, since the winning probabilities of a plurality of types of the first hand are the same or substantially the same, the probability that the type of the first hand predicted by the player will be correct is determined by any type of first hand. can be made the same or substantially the same even if is predicted. As a result, it is possible to predict the type of the first combination in a situation in which there is substantially no bias in the probability of correct prediction.

Feature E3. The first display control means, when the part of the plurality of types of the first winning combination has been won, the first winning combination corresponding to the other of the plurality of types of the first winning combination. When the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern is performed in a stop operation mode that enables establishment, it is possible to avoid the establishment of the first prize corresponding to the part of the winning combination, and the first winning combination of a plurality of types is performed. When the other combination is won, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a stop operation mode that enables establishment of the first winning corresponding to the part of the plurality of types of the first combination. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the establishment of the first prize corresponding to the other combination can be avoided when the operation is performed.

According to feature E3, when the type of the first winning combination predicted by the player is incorrect, the first prize is established. As a result, the player who expects that the first prize will not be established will make the above prediction carefully, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E4. According to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the corresponding execution means executes the same control even if the first prize corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of the first winning combination is established. game machine.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to reduce the control processing load when the first winning is established, while achieving the excellent effects already described.

Feature E5. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means,
When the variable display of the patterns in each pattern display area is stopped, and when the patterns corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed at the winning effective positions set in each of the pattern display areas, It is a configuration in which a prize corresponding to the winning role is established,
When the first prize corresponding to the part of the wins is established, a predetermined corresponding combination (combination of symbols corresponding to the first to third group wins of the first CB prize) is configured at the prize valid position. Each pattern is stopped and displayed,
When the first prize corresponding to the other winning combination is established, each of the symbols constituting the specific corresponding combination (combination of symbols corresponding to the first to third group winnings of the second CB winning) at the valid winning position. The pattern is stopped and displayed,
A plurality of types of the predetermined corresponding combination and the specific corresponding combination are set in correspondence with the stop order pattern of the plurality of pattern display areas,
The predetermined corresponding combination and the specific corresponding combination set to correspond to the same stop order pattern are those in which the picture in the picture display area to be stopped in the order other than the predetermined order in the stop order pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the pattern display areas to be stopped in the predetermined order have different patterns in common.

According to feature E5, the pattern display area that determines whether or not the first prize is established is limited to the pattern display area that is to be stopped in a predetermined order, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the first prize is established. It is possible to clarify the object to be applied. In particular, the pattern display area that determines whether or not the first prize is established is not limited to a predetermined type of pattern display area, but is limited to the pattern display areas to be stopped in a predetermined order. Regardless of the order in which the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area is stopped, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop operation of the pattern display area to be stopped in the predetermined order.

Feature E6. The predetermined corresponding combination and the specific corresponding combination, which are set to correspond to the same stop order pattern, are for the pattern display areas to be stopped in orders other than the predetermined order. A pattern common to the predetermined corresponding combination and the specific corresponding combination is stop-displayed at the winning effective position of the pattern display area regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern. The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized in that it is set.

According to the feature E6, at the stage when the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display areas to be stopped in the order other than the predetermined order is stopped, the patterns corresponding to both the predetermined correspondence combination and the specific correspondence combination are displayed. can be stopped and displayed at the prize winning position.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E5 or E6, wherein the predetermined order is the last order.

According to the characteristic E7, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the first prize has been established until the variable display of patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped. As a result, the state in which the player pays attention to whether or not the first prize has been established can be maintained until the variable display of patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped.

Feature E8. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process of the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The gaming machine shifts the game state to a predetermined game state (ART state ST20) advantageous to the player when the first prize corresponding to the first prize is not established in the game in which the first prize is won. state transition means (function for executing ART transition determination processing in the main side MPU 72),
While the winning state of the first combination is maintained, the predetermined game state is continued, and when the first winning corresponding to the first combination is established, the game state is shifted to a game state different from the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized by:

According to the feature E8, the game state shifts to a predetermined game state by not establishing the first prize in the game in which the first winning combination is won, and the predetermined game state is changed by not establishing the first prize in the predetermined game state. It is possible to continue. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the attention of the player to whether or not the first prize is established.

Feature E9. A special game state (first special state ST23) that can be shifted to only when the first prize corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won is present. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8.

According to feature E9, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to whether or not the first prize is established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

Feature E10. The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the special game state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

According to the feature E10, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first prize is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

Feature E11. The corresponding execution means is
special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1703 in the main MPU 72);
Lottery corresponding execution means (steps S1704 to S1719 in the main side MPU 72) that executes control corresponding to the lottery result by the special lottery process when the first prize is not established in the situation where the first role is won. function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E11, if the first prize is not established in the situation where the first winning combination is won, the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the.

Feature E12. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process of the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The combination lottery means is configured to prevent the first combination from being included in the lottery targets in the combination lottery process when the winning state of the first combination is maintained,
In the game in which the first combination is won, if the first prize corresponding to the first combination is not established, control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed, and the winning state of the first combination is determined. The special lottery process is not executed or the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is not executed even if the first prize corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the maintained state. The gaming machine according to feature E11.

According to the feature E12, it is possible to limit the opportunity of executing the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process, and the player's attention to whether or not the first prize is established in the game in which the first winning combination is won. can be increased.

For the configuration of features E1 to E12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of pattern display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding pattern display area;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means such that
When the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped, and the patterns corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed at the winning effective positions set in each of the pattern display areas. (2) corresponding execution means for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination (function for executing the medium giving process and the corresponding process at the end of the game in the main side MPU 72);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The corresponding execution means, when the first winning combination (first CB winning combination, second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process of the winning combination and the stop result corresponding to the first winning combination is displayed, the first winning combination (first CB winning combination) A first execution means (a function of executing CB setting processing and CB processing in the main side MPU 72) that executes the first control as establishment of winning, second CB winning),
The pattern display control means performs an operation to stop the variable display of the pattern for the pattern display region to be stopped in the order other than the predetermined order in the situation where the first winning combination is won. The pattern corresponding to the first prize is stopped and displayed at the winning effective position of the pattern display region regardless of the timing, and the pattern display region to be stopped in the predetermined order. The pattern corresponding to the first prize is stopped and displayed at the winning effective position in the pattern display area, except when the stop operation timing of the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area is the predetermined stop operation timing. A game machine characterized by comprising first display control means (a function of executing the processing of step S603 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the feature F1, the pattern display area that determines whether or not the first prize is established in the situation where the first winning combination is won is limited to the pattern display area that is to be stopped in a predetermined order. It is possible to clarify the target to which the player should pay attention regarding whether or not the condition is established. In particular, the pattern display area that determines whether or not the first prize is established in the situation where the first prize is won is not limited to a predetermined type of pattern display area, but the patterns to be stopped in a predetermined order. Since the display area is limited, regardless of the order in which the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped, the player must perform the stop operation of the pattern display area to be stopped in the predetermined order. can be brought to attention. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined order is the last order.

According to the feature F2, in the situation where the first combination is won, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the first prize is established until the variable display of patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped. As a result, the state in which the player pays attention to whether or not the first prize has been established can be maintained until the variable display of patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped.

Feature F3. Characteristic feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the case where the first prize is not established in the situation where the first combination is won is more advantageous for the player than the case where the first prize is established. game machine.

According to the feature F3, since it is more advantageous when the first prize is not established, the player performs the stop operation while expecting that the first prize is not established in the situation where the first winning combination is won. It will happen.

Feature F4. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process of the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The gaming machine shifts the game state to a predetermined game state (ART state ST20) advantageous to the player when the first prize corresponding to the first prize is not established in the game in which the first prize is won. state transition means (function for executing ART transition determination processing in the main side MPU 72),
While the winning state of the first combination is maintained, the predetermined game state is continued, and when the first winning corresponding to the first combination is established, the game state is shifted to a game state different from the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized by:

According to the feature F4, the game state shifts to the predetermined game state by not establishing the first prize in the game in which the first combination is won, and the predetermined game state is changed by not establishing the first prize in the predetermined game state. It is possible to continue. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the attention of the player to whether or not the first prize is established.

Feature F5. A special game state (first special state ST23) that can be shifted to only when the first prize corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won is present. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the first prize is established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the special game state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

According to the feature F6, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first prize is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

Feature F7. The corresponding execution means is
special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1703 in the main MPU 72);
Lottery corresponding execution means (steps S1704 to S1719 in the main side MPU 72) that executes control corresponding to the lottery result by the special lottery process when the first prize is not established in the situation where the first role is won. function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F7, when the first prize is not established in the situation where the first combination is won, the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed, so that the first combination is won. It is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the first prize is established in the situation where the player is present.

Feature F8. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process of the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The combination lottery means is configured so that, when the winning state of the first combination is maintained, the first combination is not included in the lottery targets in the combination lottery process,
In the game in which the first combination is won, if the first prize corresponding to the first combination is not established, control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed, and the winning state of the first combination is determined. The special lottery process is not executed or the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is not executed even if the first prize corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the maintained state. The gaming machine according to feature F7.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to limit the opportunity of executing the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process, and the player's attention to whether or not the first prize is established in the game in which the first winning combination is won. can be increased.

For the configuration of features F1 to F8, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of pattern display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding pattern display area;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means such that
When the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped, and the patterns corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed at the winning effective positions set in each of the pattern display areas. (2) corresponding execution means for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination (function for executing the medium giving process and the corresponding process at the end of the game in the main side MPU 72);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The corresponding execution means is
1st prize (1st CB prize, 2nd CB prize) when the 1st prize (1st CB prize, 2nd CB prize) is won in the prize lottery process and the stop result corresponding to the 1st prize is displayed A first execution means (a function for executing CB setting processing and CB processing in the main side MPU 72) that executes the first control as the establishment of
special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1703 in the main MPU 72);
Lottery corresponding execution means (steps S1704 to S1719 in the main side MPU 72) that executes control corresponding to the lottery result by the special lottery process when the first prize is not established in the situation where the first role is won. function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, if the first prize is not established in the situation where the first prize is won, the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed, so that the first prize is won. It is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the first prize is established in the situation where the player is present.

Feature G2. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process for the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process by the lottery corresponding execution means ends when the first prize is established.

According to the feature G2, the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process executed when the first prize is not established in the game in which the first combination is won is carried over to the winning state of the first combination. state, and ends when the first prize is established. As a result, the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed under the condition that the winning state of the first combination is carried over, and the state where the winning state of the first combination is carried over. It is possible to give a difference in the progress of the game between the state in which the winning state of the first combination is not carried over.

Feature G3. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process of the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The combination lottery means is configured so that, when the winning state of the first combination is maintained, the first combination is not included in the lottery targets in the combination lottery process,
In the game in which the first combination is won, when the first prize corresponding to the first combination is not established, control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is executed, and the winning state of the first combination is determined. The special lottery process is not executed or the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process is not executed even if the first prize corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the maintained state. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2.

According to the feature G3, it is possible to limit the opportunity of executing the control corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process, and the player's attention to whether or not the first prize is established in the game in which the first winning combination is won. can be increased.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the lottery corresponding execution means shifts to a corresponding game state corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process.

According to feature G4, special lottery processing is executed when the first prize is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won, and a shift to a game state corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery processing occurs. As a result, when the first prize is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won, it is possible to shift to one of a plurality of types of game states, thereby providing novel game contents. It becomes possible.

Feature G5. The first winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process for the winning combination, is maintained until the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is established,
The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized in that, when the first prize is established in the corresponding game state, a transition is made to a game state different from the corresponding game state.

According to the feature G5, by not establishing the first prize in the game in which the first winning combination is won, the game state is shifted to the game state corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery process, and by not establishing the first prize, the game state is continued. It is possible to As a result, it becomes possible to increase the attention of the player to whether or not the first prize is established.

Feature G6. The corresponding game state includes a special game state (first special state ST23) that can be shifted only when the first winning corresponding to the first winning combination is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won. The game machine according to feature G4 or G5, characterized in that

According to feature G6, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to whether or not the first prize is established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the special game state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

According to feature G7, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that the first prize is not established in the game in which the first winning combination is won.

For the configuration of features G1 to G7, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of pattern display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding pattern display area;
The variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means such that
When the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped, and the patterns corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed at the winning effective positions set in each of the pattern display areas. (2) corresponding execution means for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination (function for executing the medium giving process and the corresponding process at the end of the game in the main side MPU 72);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The corresponding execution means, when a specific winning combination (index value IV=2 to 10) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination and a stop result corresponding to the specific winning combination is displayed, a specific winning combination (normal bell winning, compensation A specific execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1307 in the main side MPU 72) that executes specific control when the bell winning) is established,
The pattern display control means stops the variable display of the pattern for each of the pattern display regions when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display regions is stopped in the corresponding order in the situation where the specific role is won. The specific winning is established regardless of the timing of the operation, and the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is not stopped in the corresponding order in the situation where the specific winning combination is won. Means (main side a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the MPU 72).

According to the feature H1, when the variable display of patterns in a plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the corresponding order in a situation in which a specific winning combination is won, there is an operation timing for stopping the variable display of patterns in each of the pattern display areas. The specific winning is established at any timing. As a result, a player who expects to establish a specific prize in a situation in which he/she has won a specific role can achieve the specific prize by stopping the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the corresponding order. It becomes possible.

Further, even if it is not possible to stop the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of pattern display areas in the corresponding order in the situation where the specific combination is won, the timing of the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is If it is the stop operation timing to be established, a specific winning or a different winning is established. As a result, even if a player who expects to win a prize corresponding to the specific combination in a situation where the specific combination is won stops the variable display of the patterns in an order different from the corresponding order, By stopping the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area at the timing of the stop operation to be established, it is possible to establish a specific prize or a different prize. Therefore, even if the variable display of patterns is stopped in an order different from the corresponding order in spite of trying to stop the variable display of patterns in the order of correspondence, even if the variable display of patterns is stopped in an order different from the order of correspondence, a special prize or a prize different from that It is possible to give an opportunity to establish

Feature H2. The corresponding execution means, when a predetermined winning combination (first CB winning combination, second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination and a stop result corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed, a predetermined winning combination (first CB winning combination, first CB winning combination, second CB winning combination) is displayed. Predetermined execution means (function for executing CB setting processing and CB processing in the main side MPU 72) for executing predetermined control as establishment of 2CB winning),
The pattern display control means, when both the specific winning combination and the predetermined winning combination are won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the winning operation mode of stopping the variable display of the symbols corresponds to the specific winning combination. can not be established, a means (function of executing the processing of steps S1005 and S1007 in the main side MPU 72) that enables the predetermined winning to be established. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H2, when both the special combination and the predetermined combination are won, the stop operation mode of the variable display of the pattern is a mode in which the winning corresponding to the special combination cannot be established. Since the predetermined prize is established, the player who does not expect the predetermined prize to be established expects the prize corresponding to the specific combination to be established. In this case, by having the configuration of the feature H1, it is possible to establish a specific winning by stopping the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the corresponding order, and the display of the plurality of patterns. Even if the variable display of the pattern in the area cannot be stopped in the corresponding order, if the timing of the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is the stop operation timing of the establishment target, the specific winning or A different prize is established. As a result, even if the variable display of the pattern is stopped in an order different from the corresponding order, the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is stopped at the timing of the stop operation of the target to be established, so that the specific prize is won or not. It is possible to establish different prizes and avoid establishment of a predetermined prize. Therefore, even if the variable display of the patterns is stopped in an order different from the corresponding order in spite of trying to stop the variable display of the patterns in the corresponding order, establishment of a predetermined winning is avoided. opportunity can be given.

Feature H3. The predetermined winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process for the winning combination, is maintained until the predetermined winning corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is established,
The gaming machine shifts the game state to a predetermined game state (ART state ST20) advantageous to the player when the predetermined winning corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not established in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won. means (function for executing ART transition determination processing in the main MPU 72),
While the winning state of the predetermined combination is maintained, the predetermined game state is continued, and when the predetermined winning corresponding to the predetermined combination is established, the game state is shifted to a game state different from the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2.

According to the feature H3, the game state shifts to a predetermined game state by not establishing a predetermined prize in a game in which a predetermined combination is won, and the predetermined game state is continued by avoiding establishment of a predetermined prize in the predetermined game state. becomes possible. In this case, by having the configuration of the feature H1, it is possible to establish a specific winning by stopping the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the corresponding order, and the display of the plurality of patterns. Even if the variable display of the pattern in the area cannot be stopped in the corresponding order, if the timing of the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is the stop operation timing of the establishment target, the specific winning or A different prize is established. As a result, even if the variable display of the pattern is stopped in an order different from the corresponding order, the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is stopped at the timing of the stop operation of the establishment target, so that the specific winning or the other It is possible to establish different prizes and avoid establishment of a predetermined prize. Therefore, even if the variable display of the patterns is stopped in an order different from the corresponding order in spite of trying to stop the variable display of the patterns in the corresponding order, establishment of a predetermined winning is avoided. opportunity can be given.

Feature H4. When a winning combination different from the specific combination is won while the winning state of the predetermined combination is maintained, the picture display control means wins a prize corresponding to the different combination regardless of the stop mode of the variable display of the picture. The gaming machine according to feature H3, characterized in that:

According to the feature H4, it is possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined winning state is established while the predetermined winning state is maintained to the state in which the specific winning state is won while the predetermined winning state is maintained. becomes. As a result, it is possible to clarify the situation in which the predetermined prize can be established while the winning state of the predetermined combination is maintained.

Feature H5. Equipped with three or more of the pattern display areas,
The corresponding order is an order in which the pattern display areas to be stopped are determined in the first order, but the pattern display areas to be stopped in subsequent orders are arbitrary,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the predetermined pattern display area is a pattern display area set as the first stop target in the corresponding order.

According to the feature H5, when the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is stopped as the stop target of the first order, it is possible to avoid establishment of the predetermined prize, and the predetermined pattern display area is stopped. Even if it is not possible to be the stop object of the first turn, establishment of the predetermined winning is achieved by stopping the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area at the timing of the stop operation of the establishment object in the subsequent turn. can be avoided. As a result, even if a player who expects that a predetermined prize is not established is aware of the order of correspondence and decides that a pattern display area different from the predetermined pattern display area is the first target to be stopped, Since the player recognizes the pattern display area in which the stop operation should be performed at the timing of the stop operation to be established, the predetermined winning is achieved by stopping the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area at the timing of the stop operation to be established. It is possible to make it easier to create a situation in which establishment is avoided.

Feature H6. Characteristic feature H5 characterized by comprising means for executing notification of the corresponding order (function for executing notification control processing in main side MPU 72, function for executing operation notification processing in effect side MPU 82). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature H6, when notification of the order of correspondence is executed, it is possible to avoid establishment of a predetermined prize by stopping the variable display of the pattern in each pattern display area according to the order of correspondence. In addition, having the configuration of the feature H5, the predetermined pattern display area, which is the target for which the establishment of the predetermined prize can be avoided by the stop operation at the stop operation timing of the establishment target, becomes the stop target in the first order in the corresponding order. Since it is a pattern display area, it is possible to grasp the type of the predetermined pattern display area by confirming the notification of the corresponding order. Therefore, even if the variable display of the pattern in each pattern display area cannot be stopped in the corresponding order in spite of the fact that the correspondence order is notified, the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is not started after that. It is possible to avoid establishment of a predetermined winning by stopping at the stop operation timing of the establishment target.

Feature H7. Means for executing notification of the corresponding order in the situation where the specific role is won (function for executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72 and operation notification processing in the effect side MPU 82);
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped in an order different from the order corresponding to the corresponding order in the situation where the specific role is won, the case where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area is stopped Means for executing a notification that allows the player to recognize the timing of establishment correspondence (a function of executing notification processing at the time of stop in the main side MPU 72, a function of executing operation notification processing in the effect side MPU 82); ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H7, when the special combination is won, the corresponding order is notified, and by stopping the variable display of the picture patterns in each picture display area in the corresponding order, the winning corresponding to the specific combination is realized. It is possible to establish. In addition, even if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding order, the notification is executed so that the player can recognize the timing of corresponding establishment, so that the pattern changes in the predetermined pattern display area at the timing corresponding to establishment. By stopping the display, it becomes possible to establish a prize corresponding to the special combination.

For the configuration of features H1 to H7, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Based on the establishment of the first condition by the operation of the player (the winning of any CB role that has been won and the winning of the CB role is not established), an advantageous gaming state (ART state) that is advantageous to the player ST20) a first transition means for shifting the game state (a function of executing the processing of steps S1705, S1710, S1714 and S1720 in the main MPU 72);
When the end condition is satisfied based on the player's operation in the advantageous game state (the first CB winning or the second CB winning is established), the ending means for ending the advantageous gaming state (CB setting processing in the main side MPU 72 is executed function) and
Predetermined notification executing means for executing predetermined notification for allowing the player to recognize an operation mode that enables avoidance of the termination condition being satisfied in a continuation possible state (processing of steps S1905, S1906 and S2006 in the main MPU 72 a function to execute the processing of steps S2102 and S2108 in the production side MPU 82);
with
The first transition means is configured to return to the advantageous game state when the first condition is satisfied when the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation is possible. ,
In the gaming machine, when the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state ends when the continuation is possible, the second condition is satisfied by the player's operation (first relief replay winning or Second remedial replay win is established), second transition means for returning to the advantageous gaming state (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3105 in the main side MPU 72, in the fifth embodiment, the main side a function of executing the processing of step S4405 in the MPU 72).

According to feature I1, since an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player plays the game expecting to shift to the advantageous game state, and in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is established. The game is played with the expectation that it will continue for a long time. In addition, when the advantageous game state is in a continuable state, the predetermined notification is executed, so that the advantageous game state is prevented from ending in the middle by performing an operation in a mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, it is conceivable that the termination condition may be established due to an operation error or the like even in a situation where the predetermined notification is being performed. On the other hand, even if the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends in the advantageous game state in which the continuation is possible, the advantage is obtained based on the satisfaction of the first condition or the second condition by the operation of the player. Return to game state. As a result, even if the advantageous game state ends in the middle, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to return to the advantageous game state.

In particular, as a condition for enabling return to the advantageous game state, not only the first condition but also the second condition exist, thereby increasing the occurrence frequency of the situation in which the return to the advantageous game state is possible. becomes possible. Therefore, even a player who ends the advantageous game state in the middle can be prevented from losing the desire to continue playing the game. Further, even if the probability that the first condition is satisfied is not extremely high, by increasing the probability that the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of return to the advantageous game state.

Feature I2. When the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is reached, the state is a midway end state,
In either case of returning to the advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition in the midway end state or returning to the advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the gaming machine returns to the advantageous gaming state in the terminated situation.

According to the feature I2, even if the advantageous gaming state ends despite being in an advantageous gaming state in which the game can be continued, the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the subsequent halfway ending state. When returning to the advantageous game state based on , it returns to the advantageous game state in the situation of the halfway end. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to restart the advantageous game state in the situation where the game ended halfway.

Feature I3. When the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is reached, the state is a midway end state,
It is configured to return to the advantageous gaming state when the first condition is satisfied in the midway termination state, and to return to the advantageous gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the midway termination state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the probability that the second condition is satisfied in the midway termination state is higher than the probability that the first condition is satisfied in the midway termination state.

According to feature I3, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the advantageous game state in the halfway ending state without setting the probability that the first condition is satisfied extremely high. As a result, it is possible to quickly return to the advantageous game state in the halfway end state.

Feature I4. When the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is reached, the state is a midway end state,
Even if the second condition is satisfied in a state other than the halfway ending state, it is more advantageous than the advantageous gaming state that does not shift to the advantageous gaming state or that shifts due to the second condition being satisfied in the halfway ending state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the game machine is shifted to a low degree state.

According to the feature I4, the advantageous gaming state is returned to based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied in the halfway ending state, whereas even if the second condition is satisfied in a state other than the halfway ending state, the advantageous gaming state is established. , or transition to a state with a lower advantage than when a return to an advantageous game state occurs. As a result, it is possible to quickly return to the advantageous game state that has ended in the middle, while not greatly affecting the degree of advantage in the state that is not in the halfway ended state.

Feature I5. When the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is reached, the state is a midway end state,
It is configured to return to the advantageous gaming state when the first condition is satisfied in the midway termination state, and to return to the advantageous gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the midway termination state. ,
In the game machine, when the cancellation condition is established in the midway termination state, means for terminating the midway termination state (step S3110 in the main MPU 72 and A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3111.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to prevent the half-finished state from continuing longer than necessary.

Feature I6. When the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is reached, the state is a midway end state,
wherein the game returns to the advantageous game state when the second condition is satisfied in the midway end state;
The gaming machine enters a state other than the midway termination state based on the failure of the second condition to be satisfied even though the second condition can be satisfied in the midway termination state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized by comprising means for setting (a function of executing the processing of steps S3110 and S3111 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature I6, the mid-term termination state is ended when the advantageous game state cannot be restored despite the opportunity to return to the advantageous game state in the mid-term termination state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the benefit of relief from becoming excessive when the advantageous game state ends in the middle.

Feature I7. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Display control means (function for executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a medium provision process and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
with
The first condition is established based on winning the winning combination corresponding to the first condition in the winning lottery process,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I6, wherein the second condition is established based on winning of a winning combination corresponding to the second condition in the lottery process for the winning combination.

According to feature I7, an opportunity to return to the advantageous gaming state occurs based on the winning of either the first condition-handling combination or the second condition-handling combination in the lottery process of the winning combination. It is possible to cause early recovery. Further, even if the winning probability of the winning combination corresponding to the first condition is not extremely high, the probability of returning to the advantageous gaming state can be increased by increasing the winning probability of the winning combination corresponding to the second condition. Become.

Feature I8. The first conditional winning combination is a winning combination that, when won in the lottery process for the winning combination, is maintained until the first conditional winning prize corresponding to the first conditional winning combination is established,
The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that the first conditional winning corresponding to the first conditional winning combination is not established in the game in which the first conditional winning combination is won,
The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the ending means ends the advantageous gaming state when the first conditional win corresponding to the first conditional winning combination in the winning state is established. .

According to the feature I8, the player enters the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the first conditional winning corresponding to the first conditional winning combination is not established in the game in which the first conditional winning combination is won. The game is played while expecting that the winning combination corresponding to the first condition is won and that the winning corresponding to the first condition is not established in the game in which the winning combination corresponding to the first condition is won. In addition, since the advantageous gaming state ends when the first conditional winning corresponding to the winning first conditional winning combination is established, the player can win the first conditional winning even in the advantageous gaming state. The game is played while expecting that the is not established. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, if the advantageous gaming state ends in the middle, even if the first conditional winning corresponding to the first conditional winning combination is not established in the game in which the first conditional winning combination is won. , returns to the advantageous game state based on winning the second conditional combination. As a result, it is possible to return to the advantageous game state at an early stage.

Feature I9. The corresponding execution means is
A predetermined corresponding prize (normal bell prize) corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination is established based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination and the operation mode of stopping the variable display of the pattern becomes a predetermined mode. If so, a means (a function of executing the process of step S310 in the main side MPU 72) for awarding game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined corresponding combination;
If a replay role is won in the lottery process for the role and a replay win corresponding to the replay role is established, a means for giving a replay profit (a function of executing the process of step S402 in the main MPU 72) )When,
with
When the first condition is satisfied, the probability of winning the replay role in the lottery process of the role becomes higher than in the normal state,
When the second condition is established, the probability of winning the replay role in the lottery process of the role becomes higher than the normal state,
The gaming machine according to feature I7 or I8, characterized in that, in the advantageous gaming state, which is the continuation possible state, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won, the player is informed of the stop operation mode of the predetermined mode. .

According to feature I9, in a configuration in which a state in which a predetermined mode of stop operation mode is notified when a predetermined corresponding combination is won in a state where the probability of winning a replay combination is high is an advantageous gaming state in which a continuation is possible, Even if either the first condition or the second condition is established, the winning probability of the replay combination becomes higher than that in the normal game state. As a result, even if the first condition is not satisfied, the advantageous game state can be restored when the second condition is satisfied.

Features I10. The symbol display control means, when winning the second conditional winning combination in the lottery process for the winning combination, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped in a stop mode corresponding to the second conditional winning combination, It is a configuration that establishes a second conditional winning prize corresponding to a two-conditional winning combination,
The second condition is established based on occurrence of a transition target event that is one of establishment and non-establishment of the second condition corresponding winning combination when the winning combination corresponding to the second condition is won,
When the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is reached, the state is a midway end state,
wherein the game returns to the advantageous game state when the second condition is satisfied in the midway end state;
The gaming machine enables the player to recognize the mode of the stop operation that enables the transition target event to occur when the winning combination corresponding to the second condition is won in the lottery process for the winning combination in the midway termination state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I9, characterized in that it comprises means for executing a notification for (a function of executing a replay winning notification process in the main side MPU 72).

According to the feature I10, when the second conditional combination is won in the mid-term end state, the notification is executed so that the player can recognize the mode of the stop operation that enables the transition target event to occur. It is possible to make it easier to satisfy the second condition in the midway termination state and to make it difficult to satisfy the second condition in a state other than the midway termination state.

Feature I11. In the mid-term end state, if the transition target event does not occur even though the winning combination corresponding to the second condition is won in the lottery process for the winning combination, the return to the advantageous gaming state is not performed. The gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized by comprising a means for terminating the midway termination state even if there is (a function of executing the processing of steps S3110 and S3111 in the main MPU 72).

According to the characteristic I11, the mid-term termination state is terminated when the advantageous game state cannot be restored despite the opportunity to return to the advantageous game state in the mid-term termination state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the benefit of relief from becoming excessive when the advantageous game state ends in the middle.

Feature I12. When the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is reached, the state is a midway end state,
It is configured to return to the advantageous gaming state when the first condition is satisfied in the midway termination state, and to return to the advantageous gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the midway termination state. ,
The gaming machine has means for executing notification (a function of executing the processing of step S2707 in the main side MPU 72) to enable the player to recognize that the game machine is in the midway termination state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, characterized by:

According to the characteristic I12, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game despite the midway end state.

Feature I13. Based on the establishment of the first condition by the operation of the player (the winning of any CB role that has been won and the winning of the CB role is not established), an advantageous gaming state (ART state) that is advantageous to the player ST20) a first transition means for shifting the game state (a function of executing the processing of steps S1705, S1710, S1714 and S1720 in the main MPU 72);
When the end condition is satisfied based on the player's operation in the advantageous game state (the first CB winning or the second CB winning is established), the ending means for ending the advantageous gaming state (CB setting processing in the main side MPU 72 is executed function) and
Predetermined notification executing means for executing predetermined notification for allowing the player to recognize an operation mode that enables avoidance of the termination condition being satisfied in a continuation possible state (processing of steps S1905, S1906 and S2006 in the main MPU 72 a function to execute the processing of steps S2102 and S2108 in the production side MPU 82);
with
The first transition means is configured to transition to the advantageous game state when the first condition is satisfied when the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends when the continuation possible state is established. ,
In the gaming machine, when the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state ends when the continuation is possible, the second condition is satisfied by the player's operation (first relief replay winning or Second remedial replay win is established), second transition means (first execution A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3105 in the main side MPU 72 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S4405 in the main side MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment.

According to feature I13, since an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player plays the game expecting to shift to the advantageous game state, and in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is set. The game is played with the expectation that it will continue for a long time. In addition, when the advantageous game state is in a continuable state, the predetermined notification is executed, so that the advantageous game state is prevented from ending in the middle by performing an operation in a mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, it is conceivable that the termination condition may be established due to an operation error or the like even in a situation where the predetermined notification is being performed. On the other hand, even if the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous game state ends in the advantageous game state in which the continuation is possible, the advantage is obtained based on the satisfaction of the first condition or the second condition by the operation of the player. Return to game state. As a result, even if the advantageous game state ends in the middle, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to return to the advantageous game state.

In particular, as a condition for enabling return to the advantageous game state, not only the first condition but also the second condition exist, thereby increasing the occurrence frequency of the situation in which the return to the advantageous game state is possible. becomes possible. Therefore, even a player who ends the advantageous game state in the middle can be prevented from losing the desire to continue playing the game. Further, even if the probability that the first condition is satisfied is not extremely high, by increasing the probability that the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of return to the advantageous game state.

For the configuration of features I1 to I12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern that controls the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Display control means (function for executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a medium provision process and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Predetermined transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1714 and S2416 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (chance state ST21) based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
When the game state transitions to the predetermined game state, the notification response control is executed so that the notification can be executed when the predetermined number of games is completed in the predetermined game state. Means (the function of executing the processing of steps S1715, S1716 and steps S1813 to S1818 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic J1, even if the predetermined game state is entered, the notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state may not be executed until the predetermined number of games is completed in the predetermined game state. As a result, even if a transition to a predetermined game state actually occurs, it is possible to create a situation in which the player predicts whether or not the transition to the predetermined game state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. becomes. Further, when specifying the execution trigger of the notification response control, it is sufficient to monitor whether or not the predetermined number of games has been played after the transition to the predetermined game state occurs, so the execution trigger of the notification response control is specified. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for this.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the notification response control means executes the notification response control when the predetermined number of games is completed in the predetermined game state.

According to the feature J2, when the predetermined number of games is completed in the predetermined game state, the notification response control is executed. is executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without complicating the configuration of the means for executing the notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state.

Feature J3. Provided with a specific transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1507 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts the game state to a specific game state (short RT state ST4) based on the establishment of the specific transition condition,
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the notification response control is not executed even if the transition to the specific game state occurs.

According to the feature J3, even if the transition to the specific game state occurs, the notification response control is not executed, so that when the notification based on the notification response control is performed, the predetermined game state is generated instead of the specific game state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the In this configuration, the feature J1 is provided, and even if a predetermined game state is entered, notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state is not executed until a predetermined number of games are completed in the predetermined game state. As a result, when a shift to either the predetermined game state or the specific game state occurs, it is possible for the player to predict which of these game states the transition to has occurred.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the specific gaming state.

According to the feature J4, since the predetermined game state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state, the player expects the transition to the predetermined game state. In this configuration, the features J1 and J3 are provided, and even if a transition to a specific game state occurs, the notification response control is not executed, and even if a transition to a predetermined game state occurs, a predetermined number of games are played in the predetermined game state. Notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state is not executed until the game is consumed. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the transition to the predetermined game state has occurred even when the transition to the specific game state has occurred.

Feature J5. Means for terminating the specific game state when the games for the end reference number of games are executed in the specific game state (function for executing the processing of step S1603 in the main side MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the predetermined number of games is equal to or greater than the end reference number of games.

According to the feature J5, when the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state, it corresponds to the transition to the predetermined game state until the number of games executed in the predetermined game state becomes equal to or more than the end reference number of games of the specific game state. Notification is not executed. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the transition to the predetermined game state will occur until the specific game state ends even when the transition to the specific game state occurs.

Feature J6. The corresponding execution means, when a specific corresponding winning combination (index value IV=1, replay winning combination) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination and a stop result corresponding to the specific corresponding winning combination is displayed, establishment of a specific corresponding winning prize. means for executing specific correspondence control as
Any one of the features J3 to J5, wherein at least one of the predetermined game state and the specific game state has a higher probability of winning the specific combination and a frequency of establishment of the specific corresponding prize than in a normal state. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature J6, in both the predetermined game state and the specific game state, at least one of the probability of winning the specific combination and the frequency of establishment of the specific win is higher than in the normal state. It is difficult for the player to grasp whether the game state is the predetermined game state or the specific game state. In this configuration, the features J1 and J3 are provided, and even if a transition to a specific game state occurs, the notification response control is not executed, and even if a transition to a predetermined game state occurs, a predetermined number of games are played in the predetermined game state. Notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state is not executed until the game is consumed. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the transition to the predetermined game state has occurred even when the transition to the specific game state has occurred.

Feature J7. Production execution means (image display device 63) for executing production,
Production control means (production side MPU 82) that controls the production execution means,
with
Any of the characteristics J3 to J6, wherein the effect control means comprises means for controlling the effect execution means so that a common effect is executed in each of the predetermined game state and the specific game state. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature J7, since the common effect is executed in each of the predetermined game state and the specific game state, the player can determine whether it is the predetermined game state or the specific game state from the execution state of the effect in the effect execution means. hard to grasp. In this configuration, the features J1 and J3 are provided, and even if a transition to a specific game state occurs, the notification response control is not executed, and even if a transition to a predetermined game state occurs, a predetermined number of games are played in the predetermined game state. Notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state is not executed until the game is consumed. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the transition to the predetermined game state has occurred even when the transition to the specific game state has occurred.

Feature J8. Another correspondence control means (main A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2418 in the side MPU 72 .

According to the feature J8, when a predetermined number of games are completed in a predetermined game state, notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state is executed, and when the predetermined game state is started, the predetermined game It is possible to create a situation in which notification corresponding to the transition to the state is executed. As a result, it is possible to start notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state at a timing suitable for the situation in which the transition to the predetermined game state has occurred.

Feature J9. Provided with a specific transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1507 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts the game state to a specific game state (short RT state ST4) based on the establishment of the specific transition condition,
Even if the transition to the specific game state occurs, the notification response control is not executed,
The notification response control means notifies when a game state shift to the predetermined game state occurs in a game state in which the specific transition condition can be established, and when the predetermined number of games has been completed in the predetermined game state. Execute the notification response control so that it is possible to execute
The different correspondence notification control means may execute the notification when the transition of the game state to the predetermined game state occurs in the game state in which the specific transition condition is not satisfied, and when the predetermined game state is started. The gaming machine according to feature J8, wherein the notification response control is executed so as to be possible.

According to the feature J9, when a transition to a predetermined game state occurs in a game state in which transition to a specific game state can occur, a notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state is issued after a predetermined number of games have been completed. is started after As a result, when a shift to either the predetermined game state or the specific game state occurs, it is possible for the player to predict which of these game states the transition to has occurred. On the other hand, when the transition to the predetermined game state occurs in the game state in which the transition to the specific game state does not occur, the notification corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state is given when the predetermined game state is started. be started. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to quickly recognize that the predetermined game state has been entered in a situation where the player does not make the above prediction.

Feature J10. Features J1 to J9 characterized in that the notification response control means includes means for outputting a signal to the outside of the game machine as the notification response control (function for executing the processing of step S1816 in the main side MPU 72) 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the characteristic J10, it is possible to execute notification corresponding to the shift to the predetermined game state by a device outside the gaming machine. In this case, due to the configuration of the feature J1, even if the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state, the notification is started by a device outside the gaming machine until the predetermined number of games is completed in the predetermined game state. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

Feature J11. The notification response control means includes means (a function of executing the process of step S1817 in the main MPU 72) for making the predetermined notification means (internal state notification unit 68) enter a predetermined notification state as the notification response control. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10, characterized by:

According to the feature J11, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to execute notification corresponding to transition to the predetermined gaming state. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature J1, even if the predetermined game state is entered, the predetermined notification means will not enter the predetermined notification state until the predetermined number of games is completed in the predetermined game state. It becomes possible to

Feature J12. The notification response control means is
As the notification response control, a first notification response control for outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine when a predetermined number of games is completed in the predetermined game state when the game state transitions to the predetermined game state. means (the function of executing the processing of step S1816 in the main MPU 72);
As the notification corresponding control, when the transition of the game state to the predetermined game state occurs, the predetermined notification means (internal state notification unit 68) is set to the predetermined notification state when a predetermined number of games are completed in the predetermined game state. A second notification response control means (a function of executing the processing of step S1817 in the main side MPU 72) to make
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J12, it is possible to execute notification corresponding to transition to the predetermined game state by a device outside the gaming machine, and notification corresponding to transition to the predetermined game state by the gaming machine itself. can be executed. In this case, even if the predetermined game state is entered, the output of the signal to the outside of the gaming machine and the switching of the predetermined notification unit to the predetermined notification state are not started until the predetermined number of games are completed in the predetermined game state. . As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which it is not possible to grasp whether or not the transition to the predetermined game state has occurred even if either the device outside the game machine or the predetermined notification unit is checked. In addition, it is possible to unify the notification states of devices outside the gaming machine and the predetermined notification unit.

For the configuration of features J1 to J12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. an image display means (image display device 63) for displaying an image;
Display control means (effect control device 80) for executing display control of the image display means;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means is
A plurality of types of individual images (ending base images 141a to 141c, end notification character image 142, total count character image 143, bonus win count character image 144, total win count character image 145) are simultaneously displayed during a predetermined display period. Predetermined period control means for displaying a period image (ending image) on the image display means (function for executing the processes of steps S3203 to S3207 in the production side MPU 82);
Display changing means (drawing side) for changing at least one of whether or not to display and a display mode of at least some of the plurality of types of individual images displayed in the image for the predetermined period based on the operation of the player. a function of executing control processing for the adjustable period in the MPU 82;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K1, it is possible to change at least one of the presence or absence of display and the display mode of at least some individual images among the plurality of types of individual images displayed in the image for a predetermined period based on the player's operation. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the image for the predetermined period to a mode that the player prefers. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature K2. The display change means, based on the player's operation, selects the first individual image (special ending base image 141c, end notification character image 142, total number of times character image 143, bonus number character image) among the plurality of types of individual images. 144. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein at least one of the presence or absence of display and the display mode of the total number character image 145) can be changed independently of other individual images.

According to the feature K2, it is possible to change at least one of the presence/absence of display and the display mode of the first individual image displayed in the image for a predetermined period independently of other individual images. This makes it possible to finely change the display mode of the image for the predetermined period.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the display change means does not allow all of the plurality of types of individual images to be in a non-display state.

According to the characteristic K3, it is impossible for all the individual images included in the image for the predetermined period to be in a non-display state, so it is assumed that no image corresponding to the image is displayed on the image display means for the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature K4. Background images (ending base images 141a to 141c) that are displayed so as to exist behind other images in the plurality of types of individual images are displayed as the plurality of types of individual images in the predetermined period image,
The display change means selects an image among the plurality of types of individual images that is displayed in front of the background image (end notification character image 142, total count character image 143, bonus number character image 144, the character image 145 of the total number of acquisitions can be hidden based on the player's operation, while the background image cannot be hidden. The gaming machine according to any one of K3.

According to the feature K4, the image that is displayed as if it exists in front of the background image can be hidden based on the player's operation. is displayed. On the other hand, since the background image cannot be hidden, it is possible to prevent the image corresponding to the image from being displayed on the image display means for a predetermined period of time. .

Feature K5. The display change means is means for changing the display mode of the background image to a mode corresponding to the change operation (steps S3308 and S3310 in the production-side MPU 82) based on the operation to change the display mode of the background image. A gaming machine according to feature K4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

According to feature K5, even if the background image cannot be hidden, the display mode of the background image can be changed based on the player's operation. It is possible to change the mode to the player's preference.

Feature K6. As the plurality of types of individual images, the predetermined period image includes an information presentation image (end notification character image 142, total count character image 143, bonus number character image 144) for presenting information corresponding to the progress of the game. , the total acquisition number character image 145) is displayed,
The display change means includes means for making the information presentation image in a non-display state based on a non-display operation performed on the information presentation image (function for executing the process of step S3304 in the production side MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized by:

According to the characteristic K6, the information presentation image for presenting the information corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed as the image for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can receive the information corresponding to the progress of the game through the display of the image for the predetermined period of time. can be presented to In this case, it is possible to put the information presentation image into a non-display state based on the player's operation. As a result, a player who does not need to display an information presentation image can display an image without an information presentation image for a predetermined period of time.

Feature K7. As the plurality of types of individual images, the predetermined period image includes an information presentation image (end notification character image 142, total count character image 143, bonus win character image 144) for presenting information corresponding to the progress of the game. , total acquisition number character image 145) is displayed,
The display change means is means for changing the display mode of the information display image to a mode corresponding to the change operation (step S3302 in the production side MP882, A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S3308 and S3310.

According to the feature K7, the information presentation image for presenting the information corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed as the image for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can receive the information corresponding to the progress of the game through the display of the image for the predetermined period of time. can be presented to In this case, it is possible to change the display mode of the information presentation image based on the player's operation. As a result, a player who does not attach importance to the information presentation image can change the display mode of the information display image to an inconspicuous mode, and a player who attaches importance to the information presentation image can change the display mode of the information display image. It is possible to change the display mode of to a conspicuous mode.

Feature K8. The display change means enables the change based on the player's operation when the image is displayed for the predetermined period in a situation where the changeable condition is satisfied, and enables the change based on the player's operation in a situation where the changeable condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein the change based on the player's operation is disabled when the image is displayed for the predetermined period.

According to the characteristic K8, it is possible to change the display mode of the image for a predetermined period of time based on the player's operation only when the image is displayed for a predetermined period of time in a situation where the changeable state is established. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction when a situation arises in which it is possible to change the display mode of the image for a predetermined period of time.

Feature K9. The display change means enables the change based on a player's operation when a specific type of the predetermined period image (ending image including the special ending base image 141c) is to be displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, wherein the change based on the player's operation is disabled when the predetermined period of time image of a type different from that is to be displayed. .

According to the feature K9, it is possible to change the display mode of the predetermined period image based on the player's operation only when a specific type of predetermined period image is to be displayed. This makes it possible to enhance the player's sense of satisfaction when a specific type of image is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

Feature K10. The display change means is means for enabling the change based on the player's operation when a predetermined period has passed since the display of the image for the predetermined period was started (executing the process of step S3210 in the production side MPU 82). function).

According to the feature K10, it is possible to secure a period in which the image in the initial state is visible for a predetermined period of time to the player or the manager of the game hall.

Feature K11. Means for invalidating the operation for ending the display of the image for the predetermined period (steps S312, S2504 and S2605 in the main MPU 72) until a specific period has elapsed since the display of the image for the predetermined period started function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to feature K10, wherein the specific period is longer than the predetermined period.

According to the feature K11, since the display of the image for the predetermined period cannot be finished until the specific period has elapsed since the display of the image for the predetermined period started, the period in which the image is displayed for the predetermined period is forced. It is possible to secure In this case, the specific period during which the display of the image cannot be terminated for the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period during which the display mode of the image cannot be changed for the predetermined period. This makes it possible to reliably secure a period during which the display mode of the image is changed for a predetermined period.

Feature K12. Means for executing notification for making the player aware that the change is possible based on the player's operation during the predetermined period (executing the processing of steps S3209 and S3211 in the production side MPU 82 The gaming machine according to feature K10 or K11, characterized in that it has a function to

According to the feature K12, it is possible for the player to change the display mode of the image for the predetermined period after using the predetermined period for ensuring the situation in which the image in the initial state is displayed for the predetermined period. can be recognized by

For the configuration of features K1 to K12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C3, features D1 to D30, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H7, features I1 to I13, features J1 to J12, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features D to K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while medals are being bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

10... Slot machine, 31... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42 to 44... Stop button, 47 to 49... Credit insertion button, 63... Image display device, 67... Special display unit, 68... Internal state notification unit 72... Main side MPU 73... Main side ROM 74... Main side RAM 74a... Work area for specific control 74b... Stack area for specific control 74c... Non-specific control Work area 74d Stack area for non-specific control 80 Production control device 82 Production side MPU 141a First ending base image 141b Second ending base image 141c Special ending base image 142 Character image of end notification 143 Total number of times character image 144 Character image of number of times obtained during bonus 145 Character image of total number of times obtained ML1 to ML3 Main line ST4 Short RT state ST20 ART state ST21 Chance State, ST23 . . . First special state.

Claims (1)

A control means for executing a specific process set so that a plurality of types of processes are performed in a predetermined execution order, and temporarily storing information in an internal storage means when executing the process,
The control means are
a first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the plurality of kinds of processes;
a second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the plurality of kinds of processes;
When the first predetermined process is started, the information stored in the internal storage means is not saved in the save storage means, and when or after the second predetermined process is started, the information is stored in the internal storage means. a saving executing means for saving the received information to the saving storage means;
a return executing means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined process is finished;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images